Fanuc Series 15 150 Model B

GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
Series 15 / 150 – Model B

for Machining Center
Descriptions Manual
GFZ-62082E/04 April 1997

GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
©Copyright 1997 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
B–62082E/04 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s–1
B–62082E/04 PREFACE
PREFACE
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :

Product Name Abbreviations
FANUC Series 15–MB 15–MB
FANUC Series 15–MFB 15–MFB

Series 15
FANUC Series 15MEK–MODEL B–4 (*) 15MEK
FANUC Series 15MEL–MODEL B–4 (*) 15MEL
FANUC Series 150–MB 150–MB Series 150
(*) The FANUC Series 15MEK/MEL–MODEL B–4 is a software–fixed

CNC capable of 4 contouring axes switchable out of 8 axes for milling
machines and machining centers.
Further the following functions can not be used in the 15MEK or
15MEL.
D Increment system D/E (Increment system C is an option function)
D Helical interpolation B
D Plane switching
D Designation direction tool length compensation
D 2 axes electric gear box
D Manual interruption of 3–dimensional coordinate system
conversion
D 3–dimensional cutter compensation
D Trouble diagnosis guidance
D OSI/ETHERNET function
D High–precision contour control using RISC
D Macro compiler (self compile function)
D MMC–III, MMC–IV
D Smooth interpolation
D Connecting for personal computer by high–speed serial–bus
p–1
PREFACE B–62082E/04
Manuals related to Manuals related to FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B are as follows.

Series 15/150–MODEL B This manual is marked with an asterisk (*).
List of Manuals Related to Series 15/150–MODEL B

Specification
Manual Name
Number
FANUC Series 15–TB/TFB/TTB/TTFB DESCRIPTIONS B–62072E

FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B For Machining Center DESCRIPTIONS B–62082E *
FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL B–62073E
FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (BMI Interface) B–62073E–1
FANUC Series 15–MODEL B For Lathe OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Programming) B–62554E
FANUC Series 15–MODEL B For Lathe OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Operation) B–62554E–1
FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Programming) B–62564E
FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Operation) B–62564E–1
FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B PARAMETER MANUAL B–62560E
FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–62075E
FANUC Series 15–MODEL B DESCRIPTIONS (Supplement for Remote Buffer) B–62072E–1
FANUC Series 15–MODEL B PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Macro Compiler / Macro Executer) B–62073E–2
PMC
FANUC PMC–MODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language) B–61013E
FANUC PMC–MODEL NB/NB2 PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language) B–61863E
FANUC PMC–MODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language) B–61013E–2
FANUC PMC–MODEL NB PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language) B–61863E–1
FANUC PMC–MODEL N/NA
B–61013E–4
PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language – Tool Management Library)
Conversational Automatic Programming Function
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR MACHINING CENTER
B–61263E
(Series 15–MF/MFB) PROGRAMMING MANUAL
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR MACHINING CENTER
B–61264E
(Series 15–MF/MFB) OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE
B–61234E
(Series 15–TF/TTF/TFB/TTFB) OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION II FOR LATHE
B–61804E–2
(Series 15–TFB/TTFB) OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Tracing / Digitizing
FANUC Series 15–MB DESCRIPTIONS (Supplement for Tracing / Digitizing) B–62472E
FANUC Series 15–MB CONNECTION MANUAL (Supplement for Tracing / Digitizing) B–62473E
FANUC Series 15–MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Supplement for Tracing / Digitizing) B–62474E
Gas, Laser Plasma Cutting Machine
FANUC Series 15–MB DESCRIPTIONS (FOR GAS, LASER, PLASMA CUTTING MACHINE) B–62082EN–1
Multi–Teaching Function
FANUC Series 15–MB CONNECTION MANUAL (Multi–Teaching Function) B–62083E–1
Multiple–axis and Multiple–path Control Function
FANUC Series 15–TTB OPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–62074E–1
(Supplement Explanations for Multiple–axis and Multiple–path Control Function)
p–2
B–62082E/04 Table of Contents
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p–1
I. GENERAL
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
II. NC FUNCTIONS
1. CONTROLLED AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.1 BASIC CONTROLLED AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.2 CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.3 BASIC SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLABLE AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.4 SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.5 NAME OF AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.6 PROGRAMMING AXIS NAME ADDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.7 INCREMENT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.8 MAXIMUM STROKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2. PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.1 POSITIONING (G00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.2 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (G60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.3 LINEAR INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.4 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.5 3–DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.6 HELICAL INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.7 HELICAL INTERPOLATION B (G02, G03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.8 HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION (G07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.9 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION (G12.1, G13.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.10 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION (G07.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.11 EXPONENTIAL FUNCTION INTERPOLATION (G02.3, G03.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.12 CIRCULAR THREADING B (G02.1, G03.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.13 INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.14 HELICAL INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.15 SPLINE INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.16 SPIRAL INTERPOLATION AND CONICAL INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.17 SMOOTH INTERPOLATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
c–1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B–62082E/04
4. THREAD CUTTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.1 EQUAL LEAD THREAD CUTTING (G33) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.2 INCH THREAD CUTTING (G33) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.3 CONTINUOUS THREAD CUTTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5. FEED FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.1 RAPID TRAVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
5.2 CUTTING FEEDRATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5.2.1 Tangential Speed Constant Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5.2.2 Cutting Feedrate Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5.2.3 Per Minute Feed (G94) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5.2.4 Per Revolution Feed (G95) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5.2.5 Inverse Time Feed (G93) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5.2.6 F1–digit Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5.3 OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.3.1 Feedrate Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.3.2 Second Feedrate Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.3.3 Second Feedrate Override B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.3.4 Rapid Traverse Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.3.5 Function for Overriding the Rapid Traverse Feedrate in 1% Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.3.6 Override Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.4 AUTOMATIC ACCELERATION/DECELERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
5.5 LINEAR ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION . . . . 64
5.6 BELL–SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
AFTER CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5.7 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION BEFORE CUTTING FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
5.8 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION BEFORE PRE–READ INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5.9 BELL–SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
AFTER RAPID TRAVERSE INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5.10 CUTTING POINT SPEED CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5.11 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION FUNCTION FOR THE CONSTANT SPEED
SPECIFIED BY THE PMC AXIS CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.12 EXACT STOP (G09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.13 CUTTING/RAPID TRAVERSE POSITION CHECK FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.14 EXACT STOP MODE (G61) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.15 CUTTING MODE (G64) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.16 TAPPING MODE (G63) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5.17 AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE (G62) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5.18 DWELL (G04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5.19 FEED PER ROTATION WITHOUT A POSITION CODER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
6. REFERENCE POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
6.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
6.2 AUTOMATIC REFERENCE POSITION RETURN (G28, G29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.3 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN CHECK (G27) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.4 2ND, 3RD AND 4TH REFERENCE POINT RETURN (G30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.5 FLOATING REFERENCE POSITION RETURN (G30.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
6.6 REFERENCE POSITION AUTOMATIC SETTING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
6.7 DOG–LESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
c–2
B–62082E/04 TABLE OF CONTENTS
7. COORDINATE SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7.1 MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM (G53) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7.2 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM (G54 TO G59) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7.3 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM (G52) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.4 WORKPIECE COORDINATES SYSTEM CHANGE (G92) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.5 WORKPIECE ORIGIN OFFSET VALUE CHANGE
(PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT) (G10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.6 ADDITIONAL WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEMS (G54.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.7 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET (G92.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
7.8 PLANE SWITCHING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

8.1 ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING (G90, G91) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
8.2 POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND (G15, G16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
8.3 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
8.4 DECIMAL POINT INPUT/POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT INPUT . . . . . . . . 87
8.5 DIAMETER AND RADIUS PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
8.6 FUNCTION FOR SWITCHING BETWEEN DIAMETER AND RADIUS PROGRAMMING . . . . 87
9. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
9.1 S CODE OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
9.2 SPINDLE SPEED BINARY CODE OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
9.3 SPINDLE SPEED ANALOG OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
9.4 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL (G96, G97) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
9.5 SPINDLE SPEED CLAMP (G92) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
9.6 ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
9.7 SPINDLE POSITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
9.8 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION (G25, G26) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

10.1 T CODE OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
10.2 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
11. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

11.1 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
11.2 SECOND MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
11.3 HIGH–SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
11.4 1–BLOCK PLURAL M COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

12.1 PROGRAM NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
12.2 PROGRAM NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
12.3 PROGRAM NAME (48 CHARACTERS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
12.4 MAIN PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
12.5 SUB PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
c–3
12.6 SEQUENCE NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

12.7 TAPE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
12.8 BASIC ADDRESSES AND COMMAND VALUE RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
12.9 COMMAND FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
12.10 LABEL SKIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
12.11 CONTROL–IN/CONTROL–OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
12.12 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
12.13 ADDITIONAL OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

13.1 CANNED CYCLES(G73, G74, G76, G80–G89, G98, G99) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
13.2 RIGID TAPPING (G84.2, G84.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
13.3 EXTERNAL OPERATION FUNCTION (G80, G81) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
13.4 OPTIONAL ANGLE CORNER ROUNDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
13.5 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
13.6 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION BY RADIUS PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
13.7 PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE (G50.1, G51.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
13.8 INDEX TABLE INDEXING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
13.9 FIGURE COPYING (G72.1, G72.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
13.10 CIRCLE CUTTING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

14.1 TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION (G43, G44, G49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
14.2 TOOL OFFSET (G45, G46, G47, G48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
14.3 CUTTER COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
14.3.1 Cutter Compensation B (G40 – 42) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
14.3.2 Cutter Compensation C (G40 – G42) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
14.4 3–DIMENSIONAL TOOL COMPENSATION (G40, G41) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
14.5 TOOL OFFSET BY TOOL NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
14.6 TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
14.6.1 Tool Compensation Memory A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
14.6.2 Tool Compensation Memory B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
14.6.3 Tool Compensation Memory C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
14.7 NUMBER OF TOOL OFFSETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
14.8 CHANGING OF TOOL OFFSET AMOUNT (PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT) (G10) . . . . . . 128
14.9 ROTARY TABLE DYNAMIC FIXTURE OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
14.10 THREE–DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
14.11 DESIGNATION DIRECTION TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
15. ACCURACY COMPENSATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

15.1 STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
15.2 INTERPOLATION TYPE PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
15.3 THE SECOND CYLINDRICAL PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
15.4 INCLINATION COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
15.5 STRAIGHTNESS COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
15.6 BACKLASH COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
c–4
15.7 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER ENTRY (G10, G11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

15.8 INTERPOLATION–TYPE STRAIGHTNESS COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
15.9 STRAIGHTNESS COMPENSATION AT 128–POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
15.10 BI–DIRECTIONAL PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
16. COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

16.1 AXIS SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
16.2 SCALING (G50, G51) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
16.3 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (G68, G69) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
16.4 THREE–DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
17. MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

17.1 SKIP FUNCTION (G31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
17.2 MULTI–STEP SKIP FUNCTION (G31.1 – G31.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
17.3 HIGH–SPEED SKIP SIGNAL INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
17.4 SKIPPING THE COMMANDS FOR SEVERAL AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
17.5 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (G37) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
17.6 HIGH–SPEED MEASURING POSITION REACH SIGNAL INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
17.7 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
17.8 TOOL LENGTH/WORKPIECE ZERO POINT MEASUREMENT B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
17.9 TORQUE LIMIT SKIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
18. CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

18.1 CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
18.2 NUMBER OF COMMON VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
18.3 READ/PUNCH FUNCTION FOR CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
18.4 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
18.5 KEY AND PROGRAM ENCRYPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
19. FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED CUTTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

19.1 HIGH SPEED MACHINING (G10.3, G11.3, G65.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
19.2 MULTI–BUFFER (G05.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
19.3 AUTOMATIC CORNER DECELERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
19.4 FEEDRATE CLAMP BY CIRCULAR RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
19.5 ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
19.6 HIGH–PRECISION CONTOUR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
19.7 FEED FORWARD CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
19.8 HIGH–SPEED DISTRIBUTION BY DNC OPERATION USING REMOTE BUFFER . . . . . . . . . 170
19.9 BINARY DATA INPUT OPERATION BY REMOTE BUFFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
19.10 DISTRIBUTION PROCESS BY REMOTE BUFFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
19.11 HIGH–PRECISION CONTOUR CONTROL USING 64–BIT RISC PROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
20. AXES CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

20.1 FOLLOW UP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
20.2 FOLLOW–UP FOR EACH AXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
20.3 MECHANICAL HANDLE FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
c–5
20.4 SERVO OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

20.5 MIRROR IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
20.6 CONTROL AXIS DETACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
20.7 SIMPLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
20.8 FEED STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
20.9 ARBITRARY COMMAND MULTIPLY (CMR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
20.10 TWIN TABLE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
20.11 SIMPLE SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL POSITIONAL DEVIATION
CHECK FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
20.12 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (G41.1, G42.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
20.13 CHOPPING FUNCTION (G81.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
20.14 AXIS CONTROL WITH PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
20.15 UPGRADED 5–AXIS CONTROL COMPENSATION PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
20.16 ROLL–OVER FUNCTION FOR A ROTATION AXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
20.17 TWO AXES ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
20.18 SKIP FUNCTION FOR EGB AXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
20.19 ELECTRONIC GEARBOX AUTOMATIC PHASE SYNCHRONIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
21. AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

21.1 OPERATION MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
21.1.1 Tape Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
21.1.2 Memory Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
21.1.3 MDI Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
21.2 SELECTION OF EXECUTION PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
21.2.1 Program Number Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
21.2.2 Program Search with Program Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
21.2.3 Sequence Number Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
21.2.4 Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
21.3 ACTIVATION OF AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
21.3.1 Cycle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
21.4 EXECUTION OF AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
21.4.1 Buffer Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
21.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
21.5.1 Program Stop (M00, M01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
21.5.2 Program End (M02, M30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
21.5.3 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
21.5.4 Feed Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
21.5.5 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
21.6 RESTART OF AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
21.6.1 Program Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
21.6.2 Program Reset Function and Output of M, S, T, and B, Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
21.6.3 Restart of Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
21.6.4 Tool Retract & Recover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
21.7 MANUAL INTERRUPTION DURING AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
21.7.1 Handle Interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
21.7.2 Automatic/Manual Simultaneous Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
21.8 RETRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
21.9 ACTIVE BLOCK CANCEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
21.10 TRANSVERSE INHIBIT LIMIT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
c–6
22. MANUAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

22.1 MANUAL FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
22.2 INCREMENTAL FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
22.3 MANUAL HANDLE FEED (1ST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
22.4 MANUAL HANDLE FEED (2ND, 3RD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
22.5 MANUAL ARBITRARY ANGLE FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
22.6 MANUAL NUMERIC COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
22.7 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
22.8 MANUAL INTERRUPTION FUNCTION FOR THREE–DIMENSIONAL
COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
22.9 STORED STROKE LIMIT CHECK IN MANUAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
23. PROGRAM TEST FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

23.1 ALL AXES MACHINE LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
23.2 MACHINE LOCK ON EACH AXIS (Z AXIS COMMAND CANCEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
23.3 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
23.4 DRY RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
23.5 SINGLE BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
23.6 RETRACE PROGRAM EDITING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
24. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

24.1 SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
24.2 EXPLANATION OF THE KEYBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
24.3 SOFT KEYS AND CALCULATION KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
24.4 MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
24.5 DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
24.6 LANGUAGE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
24.7 CLOCK FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
24.8 RUN HOUR & PARTS NUMBER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
24.9 LOAD METER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
24.10 MENU SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
24.11 SOFTWARE OPERATOR’S PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
24.12 GRAPHIC DISPLAY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
24.13 NC FORMAT GUIDANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
24.14 NC FORMAT GUIDANCE WITH PICTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
24.15 SIMPLE CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
24.16 DATA PROTECTION KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
24.17 DIRECTORY DISPLAY OF FLOPPY CASSETTE/PROGRAM FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
24.18 MACHINING TIME STAMP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
24.19 DIRECTORY DISPLAY AND PUNCHING ON EACH GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
24.20 FUNCTION FOR DISPLAYING MULTIPLE SUBSCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
24.21 HELP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
24.22 PARAMETER SETTING (RS–232–C) SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
24.23 SCREEN FOR SPECIFYING HIGH–SPEED AND HIGH–PRECISION MACHINING . . . . . . . . 231
24.24 OPERATION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
24.25 WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
c–7
24.26 CRT SCREEN SAVING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

24.27 M–CODE GROUP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
24.28 WORKPIECE ZERO POINT MANUAL SETTING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
24.29 SCREEN SAVER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
25. PART PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

25.1 FOREGROUND EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
25.2 BACKGROUND EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
25.3 EXPANDED PART PROGRAM EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
25.4 NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
25.5 PART PROGRAM STORAGE LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
25.6 PLAY BACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
25.7 OVERRIDE PLAY BACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
25.8 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
25.9 HIGH–SPEED PART PROGRAM REGISTRATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
25.10 FUNCTION SELECTION WITH HARD KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
25.11 MULTI–EDIT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
26. DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

26.1 SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
26.2 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS GUIDANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
27. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

27.1 TAPE READER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
27.1.1 Tape Reader without Reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
27.1.2 Tape Reader with Reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
27.2 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
27.3 INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
27.3.1 FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
27.3.2 Portable Tape Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
27.3.3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
27.3.4 FANUC Handy File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
28. SAFETY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

28.1 EMERGENCY STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
28.2 OVERTRAVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
28.2.1 Overtravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
28.2.2 Stored Stroke Check 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
28.2.3 Stored Stroke Check 2 (G22, G23) (M Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
28.2.4 Stroke Check before Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
28.3 INTERLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
28.3.1 Interlock per Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
28.3.2 All Axes Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
28.3.3 Automatic Operation All Axes Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
28.3.4 Block Start Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
28.3.5 Cutting Block Start Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
28.4 EXTERNAL DECELERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
28.5 UNEXPECTED DISTURBANCE TORQUE DETECTION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
c–8
29. STATUS OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

29.1 NC READY SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
29.2 SERVO READY SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
29.3 REWINDING SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
29.4 ALARM SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
29.5 DISTRIBUTION END SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
29.6 AUTOMATIC OPERATION SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
29.7 AUTOMATIC OPERATION START LAMP SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
29.8 FEED HOLD SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
29.9 RESET SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
29.10 INPOSITION SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
29.11 MOVE SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
29.12 AXIS MOVE DIRECTION SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
29.13 RAPID TRAVERSING SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
29.14 TAPPING SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
29.15 THREAD CUTTING SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
29.16 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
29.17 INCH INPUT SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
29.18 DI STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
30. EXTERNAL DATA INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

30.1 EXTERNAL TOOL COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
30.2 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
30.3 EXTERNAL SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
30.4 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
30.5 EXTERNAL MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
30.6 EXTERNAL ALARM MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
30.7 EXTERNAL OPERATORS MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
30.8 EXTERNAL CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE VALUE INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
30.9 EXTERNAL TOOL OFFSET AMOUNT OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
30.10 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
30.11 EXTERNAL SEQUENCE NUMBER OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
30.12 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFT AMOUNT OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . 263
30.13 EXTERNAL MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM COMPENSATION AMOUNT OUTPUT . . . 263
30.14 EXTERNAL CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE VALUE OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
31. EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
32. MACHINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

32.1 BASIC MACHINE INTERFACE (BMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
32.2 3M INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
32.3 6M INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
c–9
33. PROGRAMMABLE MACHINE CONTROLLER (PMC–NA/NB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

33.1 PMC INSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
33.2 NC WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
33.3 NC WINDOW B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
33.4 KEY INPUT FROM PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
33.5 OUTPUT AND SETTING OF PMC PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
34. MAN MACHINE CONTROL (MMC) (ONLY 150–MB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

34.1 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
34.2 SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
34.3 MMC/CNC WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
34.4 MMC/PMC WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
35. CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

35.1 CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
35.2 POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
35.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
36. SERVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
37. POSITION DETECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
38. SPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
39. MACHINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
40. POSITION SWITCHING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
APPENDIX
A. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
B. FUNCTIONS AND COMMAND FORMAT LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
C. LIST OF TAPE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS BASIC UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
E. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS CRT/MDI UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
F. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
G. POWER SUPPLY AND HEAT LOSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
c–10
I. GENERAL
B–62082E/04 GENERAL 1. GENERAL
1 GENERAL
To achieve high–speed, highly accurate, and highly efficient processes

required for future machining needs, the Series 15, an advanced industrial
computer, was developed as the high–grade AI–CNC.
It uses surface–mounted electronic parts to enable the control unit to be
made compact and the high–speed multi–master bus (FANUC BUS) to
standardize all the printed– circuit boards for providing a series of systems
in different sizes from small to large.
The sophisticated functions such as the world’s fastest CNC function
using a 32–bit microprocessor, high–speed and highly accurate digital
servo system, and high–speed PMC function provided with the newly
developed processor dedicated to PMC allow great enhancement of
machining throughput. The high–grade AI–CNC has AI functions such
as intelligent failure diagnosis guidance which allow full use of the user’s
know–how.
The 15–MB with the addition of a man–machine control (MMC) function
which enables the incorporation of a high level man–machine interface.
3
2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL B–62082E/04
2 LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS
Series 15 has the basic machine interface (BMI), FS3 interface and the
FS6 interface and there are some limitations on functions depending on
the machine interfaces.
The specification list also informs which functions are effective for each
machine interface.
The features of CNCs mentioned here are classified as in the following
table and the lists of specifications are written according to this
classification.
Classification of specification Table No. of specification list
Standard specification Table 2 (a)
Optional specification Table 2 (b)
Detailed explanations of each function is mentioned in an item of the text

indicated in the specification list.
1) List of standard specification
The list indicates the standard features.
2) List of optional specification
The list indicated features which can be added to the standard features.
See DESCRIPTIONS (Supplement for Tracong/Digitizing) (B–62472E)

of FANUC Series 15–MB for the following functions.
D Tracing functions
D Digitizing functions
See DESCRIPTIONS (B–62082EN–1) (For Gas, Laser, Plasma Cutting
Machine) of FANUC Series 15–MB for the following functions.
D Automatic exact stop check
D Gradual curve cutting
D Torch swivel control function
D Error detect function
D Prallel axis control function
D Accelerating/decelerating signal
D Background graphic display
4
B–62082E/04 GENERAL 2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS
Table 2 (a) Standard specification (1/6)

Items Functions Reference
item
Basic machine 3M interface 6M interface
interface (BMI)
Controlled axis 3 axes Same as left Same as left II 1.1

(2 axes also possible)
Simultaneous controllable 2 axes Same as left Same as left II 1.3

axes
Axis name Optional from Same as left Same as left II 1.5

X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C
Increment system 0.01, 0.001, 0.0001 mm Same as left Same as left II 1.7
0.001, 0.0001, 0.00001 inch
Interpolation unit 0.005, 0.0005, Same as left Same as left Appendix

0.00005 mm, 0.0005, A
0.00005, 0.000005 inch
Maximum commandable 8 digits Same as left Same as left Appendix

value A
High resolution detection YES YES YES

interface
Positioning Linear interpolation type Same as left Same as left II 3.1

positioning is also available
Linear interpolation YES YES YES II 3.3
Multi–quadrant circuit YES YES YES II 3.4

interpolation
Rapid traverse rate YES YES YES II 5.1
Tangential speed constant YES YES YES II 5.2.1

control
Cutting feedrate clamp For each axis Same as left Same as left II 5.2.2
Feed per minute YES YES YES II 5.2.3
Feedrate override 0–254% 0–150% 0–200% II 5.3.1

1% step 10% step 10% step
Rapid traverse override F0, F1, 50%, 100% Same as left Same as left II 5.3.4
Function for overriding the YES YES YES II 5.3.5

rapid traverse feedrate in
1% units
Automatic acceleration/ Rapid traverse: Same as left Same as left II 5.4

deceleration Linear acceleration/decel-
eration
Cutting feed:
Exponential acceleration/
deceleration
Linear acceleration/ YES YES YES II 5.5

deceleration after cutting
feed interpolation
5

item
interface (BMI)
Acceleration/deceleration YES YES YES II 5.7

before cutting feed
interpolation

prior to pre–read
interpolation
Bell–shaped acceleration/ YES YES YES II 5.9

deceleration after rapid
traverse interpolation
Cutting/rapid traverse YES YES YES II 5.13

position check function
Exact stop, YES YES YES II 5.14–

Exact stop mode (Tapping mode signal 5.16
Cutting mode is not available)
Tapping mode
Dwell Per second dwell and per Same as left Same as left II 5.18
revolution dwell
Reference position return Manual, automatic Same as left Same as left II 6.1
(G27, G28, G29) II 6.2
II 6.3
Reference position YES NO NO II 6.6

automatic setting function
Dog–less reference YES YES YES II 6.7

position setting function
Machine coordinate system YES YES YES II 7.1

selection (G53)
Workpiece coordinate YES YES YES II 7.2

system selection (G54–G59)
Local coordinate system YES YES YES II 7.3

setting (G52)

system change (G92)

system presetting
Absolute/incremental Can be combined in the Same as left Same as left II 8.1

programming same block
Decimal point input/pocket YES YES YES II 8.4

calculator type decimal
point input
Function for switching YES YES YES II 8.6

between diameter and
radius programming
6

item
interface (BMI)
S code output S8–digit command S2–digit command Same as left II 9.1

(Binary output) (BCD output)
T code output T8–digit command T2–digit command Same as left II 10.1

(Binary output) (BCD output)
Miscellaneous function M8–digit command M2–digit M3–digit II 11.1

(Binary output) (BCD output) (BCD output)
High speed M/S/T/B YES NO NO II 11.3

interface
Program number/program Program number: 4 digits Same as left Same as left II 12.1
name Program name: II 12.2
16 characters
Program number search YES YES YES II 12.1
Main program/subprogram Subprogram: Same as left Same as left II 12.4

Fourfold nesting II 12.5
Sequence number 5–digit Same as left Same as left II 12.6
Sequence number search YES YES YES II 12.6
Tape code EIA RS244, ISO840 Same as left Same as left II 12.7
automatic recognition
Command format Word–address format Same as left Same as left II 12.9
Label skip YES YES YES II 12.10
Control in/out YES YES YES II 12.11
Optional block skip YES YES YES II 12.12
Circular interpolation radius YES YES YES II 13.6

programming
Circle cutting function YES YES YES II 13.10
Tool length compensation YES YES YES II 14.1
Tool offset amount memory Common to all tools Same as left Same as left II 14.6.1
A
32 tool offsets YES YES YES II 14.7
Incremental offset input YES YES YES
Backlash compensation Max. 9999 pulses Same as left Same as left II 15.6
Tool length measurement YES YES YES III 17.7
Automatic corner YES YES YES II 19.3

deceleration
Feedrate clamp by circular YES YES YES II 19.4

radius
Advanced preview control YES YES YES II 19.5

function
7

item
interface (BMI)
Follow–up YES YES YES II 20.1
Follow–up for each axis YES YES YES II 20.2
Servo off and mechanical YES YES YES II 20.3

handle feed II 20.4
External mirror image Possible on all axes Possible on all axes Possible on all axes II 20.5
Controlled axis detach YES YES YES II 20.6
Roll–over function for a YES YES YES II 20.16

rotation axis
Automatic operation Tape operation/Memory Same as left Same as left II 21

operation/MDI operation
Cycle start/feed hold YES YES YES II 21.3.1

II 21.5.4
Buffer register YES YES YES II 21.4.1
Program stop/program end YES YES YES II 21.5.1

II 21.5.2
Reset and rewind YES YES YES II 21.2.4

II 21.5.5
Transverse inhibit limit YES NO NO II 21.10
Jog feed YES YES YES II 22.1
Incremental feed 1, 10, 100, 1000, 1, 10, 100, 1, 10, 100, II 22.2
10000, 100000 1000 1000, 10000,
100000
Manual absolute on/off YES YES YES II 22.7
Manual operation stored YES NO NO II 22.9

stroke check
Machine lock on all axes YES YES YES II 23.1
Machine lock on each axis YES YES YES II 23.2
Auxiliary function lock YES YES YES II 23.3
Dry run YES YES YES II 23.4
Single block YES YES YES II 23.5
Retrace program editing YES NO NO II 23.6

function
Keyboards type manual 9″ monochrome Same as left Same as left II 24.1

data input (MDI), (Note)
CRT character display
NOTE
The applicable display unit is limited.
8

item
interface (BMI)
Clock function YES YES YES II 24.7
Run hour and parts number YES YES YES II 24.8

display
Load meter display YES YES YES II 24.9
NC format guidance YES YES YES II 24.13
NC format guidance with YES YES YES II 24.14

figure (Note) (Note) (Note)
Data protection key 3 types 1 type 1 type II 24.16
Directory display and YES YES YES II 24.19

punching on each group
Function for displaying YES YES YES II 24.20

multiple subscreens
Help function YES YES YES II 24.21
Parameter setting YES YES YES II 24. 22

(RS–232–C) screen
Screen for specifying high– YES YES YES II 24.23

speed and high–precision
machining
Operation history YES YES YES II 24.24
Waveform diagnosis YES YES YES II 24.25

function
CRT screen saving function YES YES YES II 24.26
Workpiece origin manual YES NO NO II 24.28

setting
Screen saver YES NO NO II 24.29
Part program storage & YES YES YES II 25

editing
Expanded part program YES YES YES II 25.3

editing
Background editing YES YES YES II 25.2
Part program storage 80 m Same as left Same as left II 25.5

length
NOTE
The applicable display unit is limited.
9

item
interface (BMI)
Resisterable programs 100 100 100 II 25.4

(Program name display is
also possible)
High–speed part program YES YES YES II 25.9

registeration function
Function selection with YES YES YES II 25.10

hard keys
Multi–edit function YES YES YES II 25.11
Self–diagnosis functions YES YES YES II 26.1
Emergency stop YES YES YES II 28.1
Overtravel YES YES YES II 28.2.1
Stored stroke check 1 YES YES YES II 28.2.2
Interlock Each axis/all axes/all axes All axes or Z–axis only Each axis, cutting II 28.3
in automatic operation/ block start
block start/cutting block
start interlock
Status output NC ready, servo ready, re- NC ready, servo ready, Same as left II 29
winding, alarm, distribution rewinding, alarm, dis-
end, automatic operation, tribution end, automat-
automatic operation start ic operation start lamp,
lamp, feed hold reset, im- feed hold, reset
position, rapid traversing,
tapping, constant surface
speed control, inch input
and DI status
Connectable servo motor FANUC AC SERVO Same as left Same as left II 36

MOTOR series
Connectable servo unit PWM transistor drive Same as left Same as left II 36
Connectable position Pulse coder/optical scale Same as left Same as left II 37

detector
Absolute position detector YES YES YES II 37
Connectable spindle motor FANUC AC SPINDLE Same as left Same as left II 38

MOTOR series
Connectable spindle servo PWM transistor drive Same as left Same as left II 38
unit
Power 200 to 240 VAC Same as left Same as left II 35.2

(About the CNC unit) +10%, –15%
50 to 60 Hz 3 Hz
10
Table 2 (b) Optional specification (1/8)

item
interface (BMI)
Controlled axes expansion Max. 8 axes plus spindle NO Max. 5 axes plus II 1.2
Name of axes: control 2 axes spindle control
Select from X, Y, Z, A, B, C,
U, V, W axis optionally
Simultaneous controllable Max. simultaneous Same as left Same as left II 1.4

axes expansion controlled axes
Single direction positioning YES YES YES II 3.2
3–dimensional circular Basic 3 axes puls Basic 3 axes plus Basic 3 axes plus II 3.5
interpolation function rotation 2 axes rotation 1 axis rotation 2 axes
Helical interpolation Also applied to Also applied to Also applied to II 3.6

additional axes, additional axes additional axes
Circular interpolation plus
max. 2 axes linear
interpolation
Helical interpolation B (*) Circular interpolation plus NO Circular interpolation II 3.7

max. 4 axes linear plus max. 3 axes linear
interpolation interpolation
Hypothetical axis YES YES YES II 3.8
Polar coordinate YES YES YES II 3.9

interpolation
Cylindrical interpolation YES YES YES II 3.10
Exponential function inter- YES YES YES II 3.11

polation
Circular threading B YES YES YES II 3.12
Involute interpolation YES YES YES II 3.13
Helical involute interruption Involute interpolation Involute interpolation Involute interpolation II 3.14
plus linear 4 axes plus linear 4 axes plus linear 4 axes
Spline interpolation YES YES YES II 3.15
Spiral interpolation and YES YES YES II 3.16

conical interpolation
Smooth interpolation (*) YES NO NO II 3.17
Thread cutting, inch thread- YES YES YES II 4

ing, continuous threading
Per revolution feed YES YES YES II 5.2.4
Inverse time feed YES YES YES II 5.2.5
F–1 digit feed YES NO YES II 5.2.6
Second feedrate override YES NO NO II 5.3.2
11

item
interface (BMI)
Second feedrate override B YES NO NO II 5.3.3
Bell–shaped acceleration/ YES YES YES II 5.6

deceleration after cutting
feed interpolation
Cutting point speed control YES YES YES II 5.10

function

function for the constant
speed specified by the
PMC axis control function
Automatic corner override YES YES YES II 5.17
Feed per rotation without a YES YES YES II 5.19

position coder
2nd to 4th reference YES 2nd reference YES II 6.4

position return position return
Floating reference point YES YES YES II 6.5

return (Note 3) (Note 3)
Programmable data input G10, tool offset amount, Same as left Same as left II 7.5
Work zero pint offset II 14.8
amount can be changed by
programming
Additional workpiece YES YES YES II 7.6

coordinate systems
Plane switching (*) YES YES YES II 7.8
Polar coordinate command YES YES YES II 8.2
Inch/metric conversion YES YES YES II 8.3
Spindle speed binary/ YES YES YES II 9.2

analog output/spindle (S command should be (S command should (S command should II 9.3
speed clamp (G92) within 60000 rpm) be within 30000 rpm) be with in 30000 rpm) II 9.5
(Note 1)
Constant surface speed YES NO YES II 9.4

control
Actual spindle speed output YES NO NO II 9.6
Spindle positioning YES NO NO II 9.7
Spindle speed –fluctuation YES NO NO II 9.8

detection
Tool life management YES NO YES II 10.2
Tool life management 512 YES NO NO II 10.2

pairs
12

item
interface (BMI)
2nd auxiliary function 8 digit BCD 3 digits BCD 3 digits II 11.2

(Select address from A, B, (Binary output)
C, U, V, W other than
controlled axes address)
1 block plural M–command YES NO NO II 11.4
48–character program YES YES YES II 12.3

name
Optional block skip addition YES NO YES II 12.13
Canned cycles (G73, G74, YES YES YES II 13.1

G76, G80–G89)
Rigid tapping YES YES YES II 13.2
Optional angle chamfering/ YES YES YES II 13.4

corner R II 13.5
Programmable mirror YES YES YES II 13.7

image
Index table indexing YES NO YES II 13.8
Figure copying YES NO YES II 13.9
Tool offset G45–G48 YES YES YES II 14.2
Cutter compensation B YES YES YES II 14.3.1
Cutter compensation C YES YES YES II 14.3.2
Three dimensional tool YES YES YES II 14.4

compensation
Tool offset by tool number YES YES YES II 14.5
Tool offset amount memory Geometry/wear memory, Same as left Same as left II 14.6.2
B radius and length offset
indistinguishable
Tool offset amount memory 6 digits, geometry/wear Same as left Same as left II 14.6.3
C memory, length/radius
offset memory
Additional tool offset pairs Total 99/200/499/999 pairs Same as left Same as left II 14.7
Rotary table dynamic YES YES YES II 14.9

fixture offset
Three–dimensional cutter YES YES YES II 14.10

comepensation (*)
Designation direction tool YES NO NO II 14.11

length compensation (*)
13

item
interface (BMI)
Stored pitch error YES YES YES II 15.1

compensation
Interpolating pitch error YES YES YES II 15.2

compensation
The second cylindrical pitch YES YES YES II 15.3

error compensation method
Inclination compensation YES YES YES II 15.4
Straightness compensation YES YES YES II 15.5
Programmable parameter YES YES YES II 15.7

entry
Interpolation–type YES NO NO II 15.8

straightness compensation
128–point straightness YES NO NO II 15.9

compensation
Bidirectional pitch error YES NO NO II 15.10

compensation
Axis switching YES YES YES II 16.1
Scaling YES YES YES II 16.2
Coordinate system rotation YES YES YES II 16.3
Three–dimensional YES NO NO II 16.4

coordinate conversion
Skip function YES YES YES II 17.1
Multi–step skip function YES NO NO II 17.2
High–speed skip signal YES YES YES II 17.3

input
Skipping the commands for YES YES YES II 17.4

several axes
Automatic tool length YES NO NO II 17.5

measurement
High–speed measuring YES YES YES II 17.6

position reach signal input
Tool length/work zero point YES YES YES II 17.8

measurement B
Torque limit skip YES NO NO II 17.9
Incremental system IS–D(*) 0.00001 mm Same as left Same as left II 1.7

0.000001 inch
14

item
interface (BMI)
Tool offset value digit YES YES YES II 14.6

expansion
Custom macro YES YES YES II 18
Custom macro common Total 100/200/300/600 Same as left Same as left II 18.2
variable variable
Read/punch function for YES YES YES II 18.3

custom macro common
variable
Interruption type custom YES NO YES II 18.4

macro
Key and program YES YES YES II 18.5

encryption
High–speed machining YES YES YES II 19.1
Multi–buffer YES YES YES II 19.2
High–precision contour YES YES YES II 19.6

control (*)
Simple synchronous control YES YES YES II 20.7
Feed stop YES YES YES II 20.8
Arbitrary command multiply YES YES YES II 20.9
Twin table control YES YES YES II 20.10
Simple synchronization YES YES YES II 20.11

control positional deviation
check function
Normal direction control YES YES YES II 20.12
Chopping function YES NO NO II 20.13
Axis control by PMC YES NO NO II 20.14
Upgraded 5–axis control YES NO NO II 20.15

compensation parameter
Two axes electronic gear YES NO NO II 20.17

box (*)
EGB axis skip YES NO NO II 20.18
Electric gear box automatic YES NO NO II 20.19

phase matching
Simple synchronous control YES NO NO II 20.7
Sequence number YES YES YES II 21.5.3

comparison and stop
15

item
interface (BMI)
Program restart YES YES YES II 21.6.1
Program restart function YES YES YES II 21.6.2

and output of M, S, T and B
codes
Restart of block YES YES YES II 21.6.3
Tool retract & recover YES NO NO II 21.6.4
Manual handle interruption YES YES YES II 21.7.1
Automatic/manual YES NO NO II 21.7.2

simultaneous operation
Retrace YES NO NO II 21.8
Active block cancel YES NO NO II 21.9
Manual handle feed (1st) YES YES YES II 22.3
Manual handle feed YES YES YES II 22.4

(2nd, 3rd)
Manual arbitrary angle feed Unit of angle: 1/16° NO NO II 22.5
Manual numerical YES YES YES II 22.6

command
Manual interruption function YES NO NO II 22.8

for three–dimensional
coordinate system
conversion (*)
Language selection YES YES YES II 24.6
Menu switch YES YES YES II 24.10
Software operator’s panel YES YES YES II 24.11
Graphic display YES YES YES II 24.12
Simple conversational YES YES YES II 24.15

automatic programming (Note 4) (Note 4) (Note 4)
function
Directory display of floppy YES YES YES II 24.17

cassette
M–code grouping YES NO NO II 24.27
Rewinding of portable tape YES YES YES II 27.3.2

reader
Machining time stamp YES YES YES II 24.18

function
Additional programs 400/1000 Same as left Same as left II 25.4
16

item
interface (BMI)
Part program storage Max. 5120 m Same as left Same as left II 25.5
length
Playback YES YES YES II 25.6
Override playback YES YES YES II 25.7
External I/O device control YES NO NO II 25.8
Trouble diagnosis guidance YES YES YES II 26.2

(*)
Tape reader without reels YES YES YES II 27.1.1
Tape reader with reels YES YES YES II 27.1.2
Reader/puncher interface YES YES YES II 27.2
Portable tape reader YES YES YES II 27.3.2
FANUC PROGRAM FILE YES YES YES II 27.3.3

Mate
FANUC Handy File YES YES YES II 27.3.4
Stored stroke check 2 YES YES YES II 28.2.3
Stroke check before move YES YES YES II 28.2.4
External deceleration Applied to all axes NO Applied only X, Y, Z II 28.4

axes
Abnormal load detection YES NO NO II 28.5

function
Moving signal output YES YES YES II 29.11
Moving direction signal YES NO NO II 29.12

output
External data input/output Input/output of tool offset Input of tool offset Input of tool offset II 30
amount, work zero offset amount and work zero amount, work zero off-
value, machine coordinate offset value are avail- set value, alarm mes-
system shift amount, alarm able (with PMC) sage, operator mes-
message, operator message and program
sage, program number NO (without PMC) number search are
search, sequence number available
search and custom macro
variables are available.
External workpiece number 31 points 15 points 31 points II 31

search
CNC window YES NO NO II 33.2
CNC window B YES YES YES II 33.3
17

item
interface (BMI)
Multi–tap transformer 200/220/230/240/380/415/ Same as left Same as left

440/460/480/550 VAC
Key input from PMC YES YES YES II 33.4
FS6M interface — — YES II 32.3

multi–handle
Position switching function YES YES YES II 40
NOTE
1 S8–digit (Binary code output) is available as a standard feature in case of Basic Machine
Interface (BMI).
2 T8–digit (Binary code output) is available as a standard feature in case of Basic Machine
Interface (BMI).
3 The floating reference point return completion signal (output signal) is not provided.
4 The applicable display unit is limited.
5 Above functions with asterisk (*) can not be used in the 15MEK or 15MEL.
18
II. NC FUNCTIONS
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS
This Part describes all the functions which will be realized throughout all
models and all machine interfaces. For which functions are available on
a specific machine interface in a specific model, refer to the list of
specifications in Part I.
21
1. CONTROLLED AXES NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
1
22
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 1. CONTROLLED AXES
1.1 3 axes (2 axes possible)

BASIC CONTROLLED
AXES
1.2 Max. 7 axes (Total max. 10 axes Cs axis: 2 axes)
CONTROLLABLE
AXES EXPANSION
1.3 2 axes
BASIC
SIMULTANEOUSLY
CONTROLLABLE
AXES
1.4 Simultaneously controllable axes:

SIMULTANEOUSLY Following are controlled all axes at a time. Positioning, Linear
interpolation, jog feed and incremental feed.
CONTROLLABLE
AXES EXPANSION
1.5 Name of axes can be optionally selected from A, B, C, U, V, W, X, Y, Z
(Set by parameter).
NAME OF AXES
23
1. CONTROLLED AXES NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
1.6 Nine alphabets A, B, C, U, V, W, X, Y, and Z can conventionally be used

for program axis name. However, 9 or more axis names are required when
PROGRAMMING AXIS 9 or more axes are to travel in the multi–axis machine with multiple heads.
NAME ADDITION This function, adds 4 addresses I, J, K, and E further in addition to 9 axis
names.
Axis name: A, B, C, E, I, J, K, U, V, W, X Y, and Z (Total 13)
The maximum number of digits is 8 and the decimal point programming

is allowed.
However, if the I, J, K, and E are used as axis names, they cannot be used
for uses other than axis names.
The conventional uses, and limitation of uses with this function are
compared in the following:
Additional G–CODE Conventional User for Comments

address etc. uses controlled axes
I, J, K G02 Center posi- Position vector The command R

G03 tion of arc of I, J, and K is used for the
axes center.
G41 Three–dimen- Same as the The three–dimen-

G42 sional offset above sional tool com-
vector pensation is not
allowed
G76 Shift value in Same as the The shift value

G87 canned cycle above cannot be com-
manded.
G22 One point of Same as left The limit position

stroke limit cannot be com-
manded.
G65 Argument Argument The decimal point

G66 position can be
G66.1 determined by in-
crement system.
E G33 Screw lead E axis position The number of

(number of vector threads in inch
threads in threading cannot
inch thread- be specified with
ing) G33.
#4108 Custom mac- No special The custom mac-

ro variable meaning ro variable
Model in- “#4108” cannot
formation of be used.
address ‘E’
CAUTION
When this function is used, the second auxiliary function
cannot be used.
24
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 1. CONTROLLED AXES
1.7
INCREMENT SYSTEM Least input Least command Maximum stroke Code
increment increment
0.01 mm 0.01 mm 999999.99 mm IS–A

0.001 mm 0.001 mm 99999.999 mm IS–B
0.0001 mm 0.0001 mm 9999.9999 mm IS–C
0.00001 mm 0.00001 mm 9999.99999 mm IS–D
0.000001 mm 0.000001 mm 999.999999 mm IS–E
0.001 inch 0.001 inch 99999.999 inch IS–A
0.0001 inch 0.0001 inch 9999.9999 inch IS–B
0.00001 inch 0.00001 inch 999.99999 inch IS–C
0.000001 inch 0.000001 inch 999.999999 inch IS–D
0.0000001 inch 0.0000001 inch 99.9999999 inch IS–E
0.001 deg 0.001 deg 99999.999 deg IS–A
0.0001 deg 0.0001 deg 9999.9999 deg IS–B
0.00001 deg 0.00001 deg 999.99999 deg IS–C
0.000001 deg 0.000001 deg 999.999999 deg IS–D
0.0000001 deg 0.0000001 deg 99.9999999 deg IS–E
Five types of increment systems are provided. Increment system IS–A,

IS–B, and IS–C can be specified for each axis by setting ISFx and ISRx
of parameter No. 1004. Increment system IS–D can be specified for each
axis by setting ISDx of parameter No. 1004. Increment system IS–E can
be specified for each axis by setting ISEx of parameter No. 1009. Metric
systems and inch systems, however, cannot be specified for a machine at
the same time. Functions, such as circular interpolation and cutter
compensation, cannot be used for axes using different increment systems.
Increment systems IS–D and IS–E are optional.
For IS–B and IS–C, parameter IPPx (data No. 1004, input unit:
multiplied by 10) sets the increment systems as follows. For the settings
of the increment systems, refer to the manual provided by the machine
tool builder.
Least input Least command Maximum stroke Code

increment increment
0.01 mm 0.001 mm 99999.999 mm IS–B

0.001 inch 0.0001 inch 99999.9999 inch
0.01 deg 0.001 deg 99999.999 deg
0.001 mm 0.0001 mm 9999.9999 mm IS–C

0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch 999.99999 inch
0.001 deg 0.0001 deg 9999.9999 deg
1.8 Maximum stroke = minimum command increment 99999999

(999999999 for IS–D and IS–E)
MAXIMUM STROKE See section 1.7.
25
2. PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
2 PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS
The following G code are offered.
G code Group Function
G00 Positioning
G01 Linear interpolation
G02 Circular/Helical/spiral/conical interpolation CW
G03 Circular/Helical/spiral/conical interpolation CCW
G02.1 Circular threading B (CW)
G03.1 Circular threading B (CCW)

01
G02.2 Involute interpolation (CW)
G03.2 Involute interpolation (CCW)
G02.3 Exponential function interpolation (CW)
G03.3 Exponential function interpolation (CCW)
G02.4 3–dimensional circular interpolation
G03.4 3–dimensional circular interpolation
G04 Dwell
00
G05.1 Multi–buffer
G06.1 01 Spline interpolation
G07 Hypothetical axis interpolation
G07.1 Cylindrical interpolation
G09 Exact stop
G10 Data setting
G10.1 00 PMC data setting
G10.3 High–speed machining registration start
G10.6 Tool retract & recover
G11 Data setting mode cancel
G11.3 High–speed machining registration end
G12.1 Polar coordinate interpolation

26
G13.1 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel
26
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 2. PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS
G12.2 Full circle cutting (clockwise)

00
G13.2 Full circle cutting (counterclockwise)
G15 Polar coordinate command cancel

17
G16 Polar coordinate command
G17 Xp Yp plane Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
G18 02 Zp Xp plane Zp: Y axis or its parallel axis
G19 Yp Zp plane Xp: Z axis or its parallel axis
G20 Inch input

06
G21 Metric input
G22 Stored stroke check on

04
G23 Stored stroke check off
G25 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off

24
G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on
G27 Reference position return check
G28 Reference position return
G29 Return from reference position
G30 Return to 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference position
G30.1 00 Floating reference position return
G31 Skip function
G31.1 Multi–step skip function 1
G33 01 Tread cutting
G37 Tool length automatic measurement
G38 00 Cutter compensation C vector retention
G39 Cutter compensation C corner rounding
G40 Cutter compensation cancel/3 dimensional tool

07
compensation cancel
G40.1 19 Normal direction control cancel
G41 Cutter compensation left/3 dimensional tool

07
compensation
G41.1 19 Normal direction control left on
27
G41.2 3–dimensional cutter compensation left
G41.3 07 Leading edge offset
G42 Cutter compensation right
G42.1 19 Normal direction control right on
G42.2 07 3–dimensional cutter compensation right
G43 Tool length compensation +
G43.1 08 Tool length compensation in tool axis direction
G44 Tool length compensation –
G45 Tool offset increase
G46 Tool offset decrease

00
G47 Tool offset double increase
G48 Tool offset double decrease
G49 08 Tool length compensation cancel
G50 11 Scaling cancel
G50.1 18 Programmable mirror image cancel
G51 11 Scaling
G51.1 18 Programmable mirror image
G52 Local coordinate system setting

00
G53 Machine coordinate system selection
G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
G54.1 Additional workpiece coordinate system selection
G54.2 Fixture offset selection

12
G60 00 Single direction positioning
G61 Exact stop mode
G62 Automatic corner override mode

15
G63 Tapping mode
G64 Cutting mode
28
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 2. PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS
G65 Macro call

00
G65.3 High speed machining program call
G66 Macro modal call A
G66.1 12 Macro modal call B
G67 Macro modal call A/B cancel
G68 Coordinate system rotation

16
G69 Coordinate system rotation cancel
G72.1 Rotation copy

00
G72.2 Parallel copy
G73 Peck drilling cycle
G74 Counter tapping cycle
G76 Fine boring cycle
G80 Canned cycle cancel/external operation function cancel
G80 Electronic gear box synchronous cancel

(Command for hobbing machine or 1 axis)
09
G81 Drilling cycle, spot boring /external operation
G81 Electronic gear box synchronous start

(Command for hobbing machine or 1 axis)
G80.5 Electronic gear box synchronous cancel

(Command for 2 axes)
G81.5 Electronic gear box synchronous start

(Command for 2 axes)
G81.1 00 Chopping
G82 Drilling cycle, counter boring
G83 Peck drilling cycle
G84 Tapping cycle
G84.2 Rigid tapping cycle
G84.3 Counter rigid tapping cycle

09
G85 Boring cycle
G86 Boring cycle
G87 Back boring cycle
G88 Boring cycle
G89 Boring cycle
29
G90 Absolute command

03
G91 Increment command
G92 Workpiece coordinates change/Maximum spindle speed

setting
00
G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system presetting
G93 Inverse time feed
G94 05 Feed per minute
G95 Feed per revolution
G96 Constant surface speed control

13
G97 Constant surface speed control cancel
G98 Canned cycle initial level return

10
G99 Canned cycle R point level return
CAUTION
G codes of group 00 are not modal.
NOTE
A number of G codes can be specified in a single block if
they are of different group each other.
30
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
3 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
31
3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
3.1 The tool path can be selected by setting either of the following parameters.
POSITIONING (G00) D Linear interpolation type positioning
Tool path is the same as linear interpolation (G01). Positioning is done
in a speed which allows the minimum positioning time without
exceeding rapid traverse rate of each axis.
D Non linear interpolation type positioning
Positioning is done with each axis separately. Tool path generally does
not became a line.
Start point
Non linear interpolation

End point type positioning
Linear interpolation
type positioning
It is decelerated, to a stop at the end point, and imposition check is

performed (checks whether the machine has come to the specified
position).
Width of inposition can be set as a parameter.
Format
G00 _ _ ;
where
_ _ : Combination of optional axis address (of X, Y, Z, U, V, W,
A, B, C) as X–Y–Z–A– . . .
This manual uses this notation hereinafter.
; : End of block ( LF for ISO code )
CR for EIA code
This manual uses this notation hereinafter.
32
3.2 It is always controlled to perform positioning to the end point from a

single direction, for better precision in positioning. If direction from start
SINGLE DIRECTION point to end point is different from the predecided direction, it once
POSITIONING (G60) positions to a point past the end point, and the positioning is reperformed
for that point to the end point.
Even if the direction from start point to end point is the same as predecided
direction, the tool stops once before the end point.
Positioning in this case is always non–linear interpolation type
positioning (this has no relations to the G00 parameter setting).
Format
G60 _;
Exceeded
amount
End point Temporary stop
3.3 Linear interpolation is done with tangential direction feedrate specified

by the F code.
LINEAR
INTERPOLATION
Format
G01 _ _ F_ _ ;
where
F : Feedrate
G01 G91 X200.0 Y100.0 F200 ;

Y axis
End point
(200, 100)
X axis
Start point
33
3.4 Circular interpolation of optional angle from 0° to 360 ° can be specified.

G02: Clockwise (CW) circular interpolation
CIRCULAR G03: Counterclockwise (CCW) circular interpolation
INTERPOLATION
(G02, G03) Yp Xp Zp
G03 G03 G03
G02 G02 G02
Xp Zp Yp
G17 G18 G19
Clockwise and counterclockwise
Feed rate of the tangential direction takes the speed specified by the F
code. Planes to perform circular interpolation is specified by G17, G18,
G19. Circular interpolation can be performed not only on the X, Y, and
Z axis but also on the parallel axes of the X, Y, and Z axes.
G17: Xp-Yp plane
G18: Zp-Xp plane
G19: Yp-Zp plane
where
Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis
Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis
Parameter is set to decide which parallel axis of the X, Y, Z axes to be the
additional axis.
Format
G02
G17 Xp_ _ Yp_ _ I_ _ J_ _ F_ _; Xp–Yp plane
G03
G02
G18 Zp_ _ Xp_ _ K_ _ I_ _ F_ _; Zp–Xp plane
G03
G02
G19 Yp_ _ Zp_ _ J_ _ K_ _ F_ _; Yp–Zp plane
G03
where
I_ _, J_ _, K_ _ Distance of tthe X, Y, Z, axes from the start point to
the center of the circle
34
End point (Xp,Yp) End point (Zp,Xp) End point (Yp,Zp)

YP
Xp Zp
Xp Zp YP
Start Start Start
point point point
Center Center Center
j i k
i k j
XpYp plane ZpXp plane YpZp plane
Circular interpolation command
35
3.5 Spatial circular interpolation can be performed by specifying an

intermediate point and end point of an arc.
3–DIMENSIONAL
CIRCULAR G02.4 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Aa1 Bb1 ;
INTERPOLATION Xx2 Yy2 Zz2 Aa2 Bb2 ;
or
FUNCTION G03.4 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Aa1 Bb1 ;
Xx2 Yy2 Zz2 Aa2 Bb2 ;
3-dimensional circular interpolation is performed by specifying one of the

above commands.
In the above commands, the first block designates the intermediate point
of an arc and the second block designates the end point.
In incremental specification, the intermediate point specified in the first
block must be specified as a position relative to the start point. The end
point specified in the second block must be specified as a position relative
to the intermediate point.
Since this function does not distinguish between the directions of
rotation, either G02.4 or G03.4 can be specified.
G02.4 and G03.4 fall within G code group 01. These commands are
continuous–state commands. Therefore, Once G02.4 or G03.4 is
specified, it is valid until another group 01 G code is specified.
Y
Intermediate
point
(X1,Y1,Z1) Z
End point
(X2,Y2,Z2)
Start
point
As shown in the figure, an arc ending at a certain point cannot be obtained

unless both an intermediate and end point are specified. Specify the
intermediate point and end point in separate blocks.
In MDI operation, 3–dimensional circular interpolation starts when the
start button is pressed after the blocks for the intermediate and end points
are entered. If the start button is pressed immediately after the
intermediate point block is entered, the end point of the arc is still
unknown so only buffering is performed. In this case, to start
3–dimensional circular interpolation, enter the end point block, then press
the start button again.
When the commands for 3–dimensional circular interpolation are
specified successively, the end point is used as the start point for the next
interpolation operation.
36
3.6 Helical interpolation performs circular interpolation of a maximum of

two axes, synchronizing with other optional two axes circular
HELICAL interpolation. Thread cutting of large radius threads or machining of solid
INTERPOLATION cams are possible by moving a tool in a spiral.
(G02, G03) The commanded speed is the speed of the tangential direction of the arc.
Format
G02
G17 Xp_ _ Yp_ _ I_ _ J_ _ α_ _ (β_ _) F_ _ ;
G03
Xp–Yp plane
G02
G18 Zp_ _ Xp_ _ K_ _ I_ _ α_ _ (β_ _) F_ _ ;
G03
Zp–Xp plane
G02
G19 Yp_ _ Zp_ _ I_ _ J_ _ α_ _ (β_ _) F_ _ ;
G03
Yp–Zp plane
where
α, β : Optional axis other than the circular interpolation axes
Tool path
X Y
Tangential speed along an arc by circular interpolation

is the rate specified in programming.
Solid cam
37
3.7 Helical interpolation B performs circular interpolation of a maximum of

four axes, synchronizing with other optional two axes linear
HELICAL interpolation.
INTERPOLATION B The commanded speed is the speed of the tangential direction of the arc.
(G02, G03)
Format
G02
G17 Xp_ _ Yp_ _ I_ _ J_ _ α_ _ (β_ _ γ _ _ δ_ _) ;
G03
Xp–Yp plane
G02
G18 Zp_ _ Xp_ _ K_ _ I_ _ α_ _ (β_ _ γ _ _ δ_ _) ;
G03
Zp–Xp plane
G02
G19 Yp_ _ Zp_ _ I_ _ J_ _ α_ _ (β_ _ γ _ _ δ_ _) ;
G03
Yp–Zp plane
where
α, β, γ, δ : Optional axis other than the circular interpolation axes
38
3.8
HYPOTHETICAL AXIS
INTERPOLATION Format
(G07)
G07α0 ; Hypothetical axis setting
G07α1 ; Hypothetical axis cancel
where,
α : One of controlled axis address
Hypothetical axis interpolation can be used for the following

applications:
(1) Sine function interpolation
Pulse distribution with one axis for the circular arc of helical
interpolation as the hypothetical axis (Pulses are distributed but not
output to the motor) allows the rest of the two axes to move as sine
function interpolation. Which of the three axes is regarded as the
hypothetical axis is commanded by G07.
Example :
G07 Y0 ; . . Determines the Y–axis as the hypothetical axis.
G91 G02 G17 X0 Y–20. R10.0 Z20.0 F50 ;
. . . . Sine interpolation is performed on the X– and Z–axes.
G07 Y1 ; . . Cancels the Y–axis as the hypothetical axis.
10.0
Sine function
Z
10.0 20.0
39
(2) Sine function change of moving speed

Pulse distribution with one axis for circular arc interpolation as the
hypothetical axis allows the moving speed of the rest of one axis to
change as a sine function.
Example :
G07 Y0 ; . . Determines the Y–axis as the hypothetical axis.
G91 G02 G17 X30.0 Y0 R15.0 F50 ;
. . . . Changes the feedrate on the X–axis as a sine function.
G07 Y1 ; . . Cancels the Y–axis as the hypothetical axis.
X axis speed
50mm/min
Time
(3) Fraction lead threading

The long axis (the axis with the largest move distance) for threading
is determined as the hypothetical axis to enable threading of the
fraction lead.
Example :
G07 X0 ; . . Determines the X–axis as the hypothetical axis.
G91 G33 X1181.102 Z100.0 F100 ;
. . . . The Z–axis lead is expressed by the following formula.
G07 X1 ; . . Cancels the X–axis as the hypothetical axis.
Z–axis lead = 100 100.0 88.4666

1181.102
40
3.9 The function in which contour control is done in converting the command
programmed in a cartesian coordinate system to the movement of a linear
POLAR COORDINATE axis (movement of a tool) and the movement of a rotary axis (rotation of
INTERPOLATION a workpiece) is the polar coordinate interpolation. It is an effective
(G12.1, G13.1) function when a straight line groove is cut on the outer diameter of a
workpiece or when a cam shaft is ground.
Whether the polar coordinate interpolation is done or not is commanded
by a G code.
G12.1; Polar coordinate interpolation mode
(Polar coordinate interpolation shall be done.)
G13.1; Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
(Polar coordinate interpolation is not done.)
These G codes shall be commanded in a single block.
1) Polar coordinate interpolation mode (G12.1)
The axes (linear axis and rotary axis) on which polar coordinate
interpolation is done are set beforehand by parameters.
Change the mode to polar coordinate interpolation mode by
commanding G12.1, and a plane (hereinafter referred to as polar
coordinate interpolation plane) is selected in which linear axis is made
to the first axis of the plane, and virtual axis being a right angle with
the linear axis is made to the second axis of the plane. Polar coordinate
interpolation is carried out on this plane.
In the polar coordinate interpolation made, the command of linear
interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02, G03) is possible.
And both absolute command (G90) and incremental command (G91)
are possible.
For the program command it is possible to apply cutter compensation.
For the path after cutter compensation is done, polar coordinate
interpolation can be made.
As for feedrate, specify the tangential speed (relative speed between
the workpiece and the tool) on the polar coordinate interpolation plane
(cartesian coordinate system) with F.
2) Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode (G13.1)
The polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode is obtained by G13.1
command.
41
3) Example of a program
Polar coordinate interpolation by X axis (Linear axis) and C axis
(Rotary axis)
C (Virtual axis)
C axis Path after cutter

compensation
Programmed path
N204 N203
N205
N200 X axis
N202 N201
Tool
N208
N206 N207 Z axis
Fig. 3.9
(X axis is diameter programming and C axis is radius programming)

O0001;
:
N100 G90 G00 X120.0 C0 Z_ ; Positioning to the starting position
N200 G12.1; Starting polar coordinate interpolation
N201 G42 G01 X40.0 F_ D01;
N202 C10.0;
N203 G03 X20.0 C20.0 R10.0 ;
Contour program
N204 G01 X-40.0 ;
(Program in cartesian coordinate
N205 C-10.0 ; system of X-C plane)
N206 G03 X-20.0 C-20.0 I10.0 K0 ;
N207 G01 X40.0 ;
N208 C0 ;
N209 G40 X120.0 ;
N210 G13.1 ; Canceling polar coordinate interpolation
N300 Z_ ;
N400 X_ C_ ;
:
M30 ;
42
3.10 When the form on the expanded side view of a cylinder (from on the
cylinder coordinate system) is commanded by a program command, the
CYLINDRICAL NC converts the form into a linear axis movement and a rotary axis
INTERPOLATION movement then performs a contour control. This feature is called the
(G07.1) cylindrical interpolation.
Cylindrical interpolation is commanded with G07.1.
G07.1 (Name of rotary axis) Radius value of cylinder ; :
Cylindrical interpolation mode
G07.1 (Name of rotary axis) 0 ; : Cancellation mode of cylindrical
interpolation
1) Cylindrical interpolation mode
Cylindrical interpolation is made between the rotary axis specified in
the block of G07.1 and the other optional linear axis.
Circle interpolation command is allowed as well as linear
interpolation, during cylindrical interpolation mode. Also, absolute
command and incremental command can be made. Cutter
compensation can be added to the program command. Cylindrical
interpolation is made for the path after cutter compensation.
Feed rate gives the tangential speed on the expanded plane of the
cylinder with F.
2) Cancellation mode of cylindrical interpolation
G07.1 (Name of rotary axis) 0;
Cancellation mode of cylindrical interpolation is made when
commanded as above.
43
3) An example of a program
O0001 (CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION);
N1 G00 G90 Z100.0 C0;
N2 G01 G18 Z0 C0;
N3 G7.1 C57299;
N4 G01 G42 Z120.0 D01 F250;
N5 G40.0;
N6 G02 Z90.0 C60.0 R30.0 ;
N7 G01 Z70.0;
N8 G03 Z60.0 C70.0 R10.0;
N9 G01 C150.0;
N10 G03 Z70.0 C190.0 R75.0;
N11 G01 Z110.0 C230.0;
N12 G02 Z120.0 C270.0 R75.0;
N13 G01 G360.0;
N14 G40 Z100.0;
N15 G07.1 C0;
N16 M30;
Z R
Fig. 3.10 (a)
Z
mm
120
90
70
0 C
0 40 60 150 190 230 270 360 deg
Fig. 3.10 (b)
44
3.11 In synchronization with the travel of the rotary axis, the linear axis (X
axis) performs the exponential function interpolation. With the other
EXPONENTIAL axes, the linear interpolation the X axis is performed.
FUNCTION This function is effective for the tapered constant helix machining in the
INTERPOLATION tool grinding machine.
(G02.3, G03.3)
X (Linear axis)
∆X
A
(Rotary axis)
∆A
Tapered constant helix machining Z
A
B
X
r
J
U
X
Fig. 3.11
The exponential function relation expression between the linear axis and
the rotary axis is defined as in the following :
X (θ) = R * (eθ/R – 1) * 1 . . . . . Travel of linear axis (1)
tan (I)
A (θ) = (–1)ω * 360 * θ . . . . . Travel of rotation axis (2)
2π
where
K = tan (J)
tan (I)
ω = 0 or 1 . . . . . Rotational direction
R, I, J are constant and θ is the angle (radian) of rotation.
Also from the equation (1),
θ (X) = K * ȏn { X * tan (I) + 1}
R
45
Equations (1) and (2) shall be specified by the following formats :

(Positive rotation) ω=0
G02.3 X_Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ F_ Q_ ;
(Negative rotation) ω=1
G03.3 X_Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ F_ Q_ ;
X_ ; Command terminal point by Absolute or incremental
Y_ ; Command terminal point by Absolute or incremental
Z_ ; Command terminal point by Absolute or incremental
I_ ; Command of angle I (The command unit is based on the
reference axis.
The range of command is 1 to 89°)
J_ ; Command of angle J (The command unit is based on the
reference axis.
The range of command is 1 to 89°)
K_ ; Amount of division of the linear axis in the exponential
function interpolation (amount of span). (The command
unit is based on the reference axis. The command range is
a positive value.)
R_ ; Command of constant value R in the exponential function
interpolation. (The command unit is based on the reference
axis.)
F_ ; Command of initial feed rate.
The command is the same as the normal F code. The feed
rate shall be given by the synthesized speed including the
rotary axis.
Q_ ; Command of feed rate at terminal point.
The command unit is based on the reference axis. Within the
NC, the tool is interpolated between the initial feedrate (F_)
and final feedrate (Q_) depending on the amount of X axis
travel.
46
3.12 Circular interpolation is made between two axes and simultaneously

linear interpolation is made beween the optional two axes and the long
CIRCULAR axis of circle interpolation in the circular threading B. This circular thread
THREADING B cutting is not the one that the tool is moved in synchronization with
(G02.1, G03.1) rotation of the spindle (work) of the spindle motor, but the one that the
sarvo motor controls the rotation of the workpiece. Therefore, it is
effective for thread cutting in the same pitch on the barrel type surface,
grooving, tool grinding, and etc. The speed along the long axis of the
circle shall be specified as the feed rate.
Format
G02.1 I_ _ J_ _
G17 Xp_ _ Yp_ _ α_ _ β_ _ F_ _ ;
G03.1 R_ _
Xp–Yp plane
G02.1 K_ _ I_ _
G18 Zp_ _ Xp_ _ α_ _ β_ _ F_ _ ;
G03.1 R_ _
Zp–Xp plane
G02.1 J_ _ K_ _
G19 Yp_ _ Zp_ _ α_ _ β_ _ F_ _ ;
G03.1 R_ _
Yp–Zp plane
where
α, β : Optional 2 axes other than circular interpolation
X
Start point
End point
(Zp, Xp)
Z
C
I
R
Arc center
K
Fig. 3.12
47
3.13 With the following command, the involute curve machining can be
performed. Approximate involute curve with a minute straight line or arc
INVOLUTE is not needed. Therefore, the programming becomes simple and reduces
INTERPOLATION the tape length. The distribution of the pulse will not be interrupted
during the continuous minute block high speed operation, so fast, smooth
involute curve machining is possible.
Format
G02.2
G17 Xp_ _ Yp_ _ I_ _ J_ _ R_ _ F_ _;
G03.2
Xp–Yp plane
G02.2
G18 Zp_ _ Xp_ _ K_ _ I_ _ R_ _ F_ _;
G03.2
Zp–Xp plane
G02.2
G19 Yp_ _ Zp_ _ J_ _ K_ _ R_ _ F_ _;
G03.2
Yp–Zp plane
G02.2 : Clockwise involute interpolation

G03.2 : Counterclockwise involute interpolation
Xp, Yp, Zp : End point coordinate value
I, J, K : Distance to the center of the basic circle of the involute
curve from start point
R : Radius of basic circle
F : Cutting feedrate
Start point
(I, J)
Basic
circle
End point
(X, Y)
Fig. 3.13 (a) Clockwise involute interpolation
Start point
End point
(X, Y)
(I, J)
R
Basic
circle
Fig. 3.13 (b) Counterclockwise involute interpolation
48
The cutter compensation can be applied to the commanded involute

curve. The intersecting point vector of a straight line or circular arc and
an involute curve is obtained and the offset involute curve is interpolated.
Tools
Involute curve
after offset
Command
involute Command
curve straight
line
Basic circle Offset vector
Fig. 3.13 (c) Cutter compensation and involute interpolation
3.14 Helical involute interpolation is a similar to helical interpolation used for

circular interpolation. Helical involute interpolation allows the
HELICAL INVOLUTE manipulation of the tool along two axes for involute interpolation and
INTERPOLATION along a maximum of four other axes concurrently.
49
3.15 Spline interpolation is prepared for machining of spline curve passing a

specific dot–string. A smooth curve passing a dot–strings can be
SPLINE machined with this function.
INTERPOLATION The spline curve obtained by spline interpolation has the following
characteristics.
(i) The spline curve passes through all command points.
(ii) The curves of the connecting line vector before and after, coincides
at all command points except for start point and end point.
(iii) The curvature before and after coincided with the command point
except for start point and end point.
Format
G06.1 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ K_ P_ Q_ R_ F_ ;
X : Mantissa of the X–axis component of primary differential vector at
start point.
Y : Mantissa of the Y–axis component of primary differential vector at
start point.
Z : Mantissa of the Z–axis component of primary differential vector at
start point.
I : Mantissa of the X–axis component of secondary differential
vector at start point.
J : Mantissa of the Y–axis component of secondary differential
K : Mantissa of the Z–axis component of secondary differential
P : Exponent of X–axis component of primary and secondary
differential vectors.
Q : Exponent of Y–axis component of primary and secondary
differential vectors.
R : Exponent of Z–axis component of primary and secondary
differential vector.
F : Feedrate
50
(Example)
G01 X – – Y – – Z – – F – – ; (P0)
G06.1 X – – Y – – Z – – I – – J – – K – – P – – Q – – R – – F – – ;
X––Y––Z––; (P1)
X––Y––Z––; (P2)
X––Y––Z––; (P3)
X––Y––Z––; (P4)
X––Y––Z––; (P5)
G00 X – – Y – – Z – – ;
(X, Y, Z) P4
P1
P5
P3
(I, J, K)
P0
P2
3.16 Spiral interpolation can be carried out when the circular interpolation
command is specified together with the number of circles of the helix or
SPIRAL a radius increment or decrement per circle.
INTERPOLATION AND Conical interpolation can be carried out when the spiral interpolation
CONICAL command is specified together with commands specifying a movement
along another axis and an increment or decrement along the axis per circle
INTERPOLATION
of the helix.
51
3.17 To machine a part having sculptured surfaces, such as metal moldings

used in automobiles and airplanes, a part program usually approximates
SMOOTH the sculptured surfaces with minute line segments. As shown in the
INTERPOLATION following figure, a sculptured curve is normally approximated using line
FUNCTION segments with a tolerance of about 10µm.
Enlarged
: Specified point
10µm
When a program approximates a sculptured curve with line segments, the

length of each segment differs between those portions that have mainly
a small radius of curvature and those that have mainly a large radius of
curvature. The length of the line segments is short in those portions
having a small radius of curvature, while it is long in those portions
having a large radius of curvature. The high-precision contour control of
the FANUC Series 15 moves the tool along a programmed path thus
enabling highly precise machining. This means that the tool movement
precisely follows the line segments used to approximate a sculptured
curve. This may result in a non-smooth machined curve if control is
applied to machining a curve where the radius of curvature is large and
changes only gradually. Although this effect is caused by high-precision
machining, which precisely follows a pre- programmed path, the uneven
corners that result will be judged unsatisfactory when smooth surfaces are
required.
Profile Portions having mainly a Portions having mainly a
small radius of curvature large radius of curvature
Example of Automobile parts Decorative parts, such as

machined parts body side moldings
Length of line Short Long

segment
Resulting surfaces Smooth surface even Uneven surfaces may

produced using when machining is result when machining is
high-precision performed exactly as performed exactly as
contour control specified by a program specified by a program
52
Example of uneven surfaces (polygon) resulting from machining that

precisely follows the line segments
The smooth interpolation function enables high- speed, high- precision

machining, as follows:
The CNC automatically selects either of two types of machining
according to the program command.
D For those portions where the accuracy of the figure is critical, such as
at corners, machining is performed exactly as specified by the
program command.
D For those portions having a large radius of curvature where a smooth
figure must be created, points along the machining path are
interpolated with a smooth curve, calculated from the polygonal lines
specified with the program command (smooth interpolation).
Use the following command to specify smooth interpolation mode:
G05.1 Q2 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
The CNC automatically selects either of the above machining types,
according to the program command. If a block specifies a travel distance
or direction which differs greatly from that in the preceding block,
smooth interpolation is not performed for that block, but linear
interpolation is performed exactly as specified by the program command.
Programming is thus very simple.
53
Example
Interpolated by smooth curve

N17
N16 N12
N15 N14 N13
N1 N11
N2 N10
N3 N5 N6
N4 N7
N8 N9
Interpolated by smooth curve Linear interpolation
Linear interpolation
N17
N16 N12
N15 N14 N13
N1 N11
N2 N10
N3 N5 N6
N4 N7
N8 N9
54
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 4. THREAD CUTTING
4 THREAD CUTTING
55
4. THREAD CUTTING NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
4.1 By feeding the tool synchronizing with the spindle rotation, thread cutting
of the specified lead is performed. Specify lead of the long axis (an axis
EQUAL LEAD along which the tool travels longest distance) direction with the F code.
THREAD CUTTING
Table 4.1
(G33)
Increment Allowable range of lead
0.01 mm 0.0001 to 5000.0000 mm/rev
0.001 mm 0.00001 to 500.00000 mm/rev
Input in millimeters 0.0001 mm 0.000001 to 50.000000 mm/rev
0.00001 mm 0.0000001 to 5.0000000 mm/rev
0.000001 mm 0.00000001 to 0.50000000 mm/rev
0.001 inch 0.00001 to 500.00000 inch/rev
0.0001 inch 0.000001 to 50.000000 inch/rev

Input
In ut in inches
0.00001 inch 0.0000001 to 5.0000000 inch/rev
0.000001 inch 0.00000001 to 0.50000000 inch/rev
The spindle must be equipped with a position coder.

Thread cutting start position (the starting point of the thread cutting,
synchronizing with the spindle rotation) can be shifted. This is useful
when cutting multiple thread. Specify the desired angle with Q.
Format
G33 _ _ F_ _ Q_ _ ;
where
F_ _ : Lead of the long axis
Q_ _ : Shift angle of thread start position (0° to 360°)
NOTE
Leads exceeding the cutting feed speed when converted to
per minute feed speed cannot be specified.
56
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 4. THREAD CUTTING
4.2 By specifying threads per inch of the long axis by the E code, inch thread
cutting is performed. Thread cutting start position can be shifted.
INCH THREAD
CUTTING (G33)
Format
G33 _ _ E_ _ Q_ _ ;
where
E_ _ : Threads per inch of the long axis
4.3 Continuous thread cutting in which thread cutting command blocks are
continuously commanded is available.
CONTINUOUS As it is controlled so that the spindle synchronism shift (occurred when
THREAD CUTTING shifting from one block to another) is kept to a minimum, special threads
like threads which leads or shape change during the cycle can also be cut.
G33 G33
G33
Fig. 4.3
57
5. FEED FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
5 FEED FUNCTIONS
58
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 5. FEED FUNCTIONS
5.1 Positioning of each axis is done in rapid motion by the positioning

command (G00).
RAPID TRAVERSE There is no need to program rapid traverse rate, because the rates are set
in the parameter (per axis).
Table 5.1
Least command
Rapid traverse rate range
increment
0.01 mm 40 to 2400000 mm/min, deg/min
0.001 mm 4 to 240000 mm/min, deg/min

Machine of mm
0.0001 mm 0.4 to 100000 mm/min, deg/min
y
system
0.001 inch 4 to 240000 inch/min
0.0001 inch 0.4 to 24000 inch/min

Machine of inch
0.00001 inch 0.04 to 10000 inch/min
y
system
0.000001 inch 0.004 to 1000 inch/min
0.0000001 inch 0.0004 to 100 inch/min
59
5.2 Feedrates of linear interpolation (G01), and circular interpolation (G02,

G03) are commanded with numbers after the F code.
CUTTING FEEDRATE
5.2.1 In cutting feed, it is controlled so that speed of the tangential direction is

Tangential Speed always the same commanded speed.
Constant Control
5.2.2 Cutting feedrate upper limit can be set as parameters of each axis. If the
Cutting Feedrate actual cutting feedrate (feedrate with override) is commanded exceeding
the upper limit, it is clamped to a speed not exceeding the upper limit.
Clamp
5.2.3 With the per minute feed mode G94, tool feedrate per minute is directly
Per Minute Feed (G94) commanded by numerical value after F.
Table 5.2.3
Least command
Cutting feedrate range
increment

In ut in mm
Input
Machine of mm 0.0001 mm 0.0001 to 100000 mm/min, deg/min
system
0.001 inch 0.00001 to 240000 inch/min
0.0001 inch 0.00001 to 24000 inch/min

In ut in inch
Input
Machine of inch 0.00001 inch 0.00001 to 10000 inch/min
system
0.000001 inch 0.00001 to 1000 inch/min
0.0000001 inch 0.00001 to 100 inch/min

In ut in mm
Input
Machine of inch 0.0001 mm 0.0001 to 100000 mm/min, deg/min
system
0.001 inch 0.00001 to 96000 inch/min
0.0001 inch 0.00001 to 9600 inch/min

In ut in inch
Input
Machine of mm 0.00001 inch 0.00001 to 4000 inch/min
system
0.000001 inch 0.00001 to 400 inch/min
0.0000001 inch 0.00001 to 40 inch/min
60
5.2.4 With the per revolution feed mode G95, tool feedrate per revolution of the
Per Revolution Feed spindle is directly commanded by numeral after F. A position coder must
be mounted on the spindle.
(G95)
Table. 5.2.4
Least command
Cutting feedrate range
increment
0.01 mm or deg 0.0001 to5000.0000 mm/rev or deg/rev

0.001 mm or deg 0.00001 to 500.00000 mm/rev or deg/rev
0.001 inch 0.00001 to 500.0000 inch/rev
0.0001 inch 0.000001 to 50.00000 inch/rev
0.00001 inch 0.0000001 to 5.000000 inch/rev
0.000001 inch 0.00000001 to 0.50000000 inch/rev
The above feedrates are limits according to the NC’s interpolation

capacity. When the whole system is considered, there are also limits
according to the servo system.
5.2.5 Inverse time feed mode is commanded by G93, and inverse time by F
Inverse Time Feed code. Inverse time is commanded with the following value in a 1/min
unit.
(G93) In linear interpolation F= Speed/distance
In circular interpolation F= Speed/radius
Command F0 for rapid traverse.
5.2.6 When a 1-digit number from 1 to 9 is commanded after the F, the preset
F1–digit Feed speed corresponding the 1-digit number commanded is set as feedrate.
Set the F1-digit feedrate change input signal on from the machine side,
and rotate the manual pulse generator. Feedrate of the currently selected
speed can be changed.
Feedrate set or changed will be memorized even after power is turned off.
61
5.3
OVERRIDE
5.3.1 The per minute feed (G94), per rotation feed (G95) and the inverse time
Feedrate Override feed (G93) can be overrided by:
0 to 254% (per every 1%).
In inverse time, feedrate converted to per minute feed is overridden.
Feedrate override cannot be performed to F1-digit feed.
Feedrate also cannot be performed to functions as thread cutting and
tapping in which override is inhibited.
5.3.2 All cutting feedrate can be overrided by:

Second Feedrate 0 to 254% (per every 1%)
A second override can be performed on feed rats once overrided.
Override No override can be performed on functions as thread cutting and tapping
in which override is inhibited.
This function is used for controlling feedrate in adaptive control, etc.
5.3.3 This function selects the second feedrate override in the range from 0 to
Second Feedrate 655.34 with 0.01% increments.
Override B
5.3.4 Rapid traverse rate can be overridden by:

Rapid Traverse F0, F1, 50, 100%
F0: A constant speed per axis can be set by parameter
Override F1: A constant % can be set by parameter
5.3.5 This function overrides the rapid traverse feedrate with a value (1% units)
Function for Overriding entered from the machine operator’s panel in the range from 0% to 100%.
By specifying the ROV8 bit of parameter 1402, the override selected by
the Rapid Traverse this function can be switched to and from the standard override for the
Feedrate in 1% Unit rapid traverse feedrate (F0, Fn, 50%, 100%).
5.3.6 Feedrate override and the second feedrate override can be clamped to
Override Cancel 100% by a signal from the machine side.
62
5.4 Acceleration and deceleration is performed when starting and ending

movement, resulting in smooth start and stop.
AUTOMATIC Automatic acceleration/deceleration is also performed when feedrate
ACCELERATION/ changes, so change in speed is also smoothly done.
DECELERATION Rapid traverse : Linear acceleration/deceleration
(time constant is parameter set per axis)
Cutting feed : Exponential acceleration/deceleration
(time constant is parameter set common to all axes)
Jog feed : Exponential acceleration/deceleration
(time constant is parameter set per axis)
FRMAX : Rapid traverse

TR : Acceleration/deceleration
Rapid traverse time constant
Speed FRMAX
TR TR Time
FJ : Jog feedrate
TJ : Jog feed time constant
JOG feed
FL : Low feedrate after deceleration
Speed
FJ
FL
TJ TJ Time
FC : Feedrate
Feed, Dry run
TC: Acceleration/deceleration
time constant
Speed
FC
TC TC Time
Fig. 5.4
63
5.5
LINEAR
ACCELERATION/ Speed
DECELERATION
AFTER CUTTING
FEED
INTERPOLATION
Time
TC TC
Fig. 5.5 (a)
In the linear acceleration/deceleration, the delay for the command caused

by the acceleration/deceleration becomes 1/2 compared with that in
exponential acceleration/deceleration, substantially reducing the time
required for acceleration and deceleration.
Also, the radius direction error in the circular interpolation caused by the
acceleration/deceleration is substantially reduced.
Y ∆r ∆r: Maximum value of radius

error (mm)
Command
path v : Feedrate (mm/sec)
r : Circular radius (mm)
Actual T1 : Acceleration/
path deceleration time
r constant (sec)
T2 : Time constant of servo
motor (sec)
Fig. 5.5 (b)
The maximum value of error in this radius direction is obtained

approximately by the following equation.
2
r + (1 T 1 ) 1 T 2 ) Vr . . . . . For exponential acceleration/deceleration
2 2
2 2
2
r + ( 1 T 1 ) 1 T 2 ) Vr . . . . . For linear acceleration/deceleration after
2 2
24 2 cutting feed interpolation
Consequently, in case of the linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation, if an error caused by the servo loop time constant is
excluded, the radius directional error will be reduced to 1/12, compared
with the exponential acceleration/deceleration.
64
5.6
BELL–SHAPED
Feedrate
ACCELERATION/
B
DECELERATION F
AFTER CUTTING
FEED
INTERPOLATION F A
2
0 TC Time
2
TC TC
Fig. 5.6
As shown above in the quadratic curve, it is possible to accelerate and

decelerate the cutting feedrate.
When the acceleration and deceleration section are connected, the
composed curve shapes just like a hanging bell. That is why this kind of
acceleration/deceleration is called bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration.
Considering a time constant as Tc (time spent to accelerate from feedrate
0 up to commanded feedrate F or time spent to decelerate from
commanded feedrate F down to feedrate 0), feedrate accelerates up to 1/2
of the commanded feedrate (F/2) for 1/2 of the time constant (Tc/2). The
acceleration/deceleration curve 0A shown in the figure above can be
expressed by the following equation :
f(t) + 2F2 t 2
TC
The curve AB and 0A are symmetric with respect to point A.
The feature of this acceleration/deceleration is that the feedrate change is
small near feedrate 0 and the commanded feedrate.
65
5.7 In response to the cutting feed command, the feedrate before

interpolation, that is, the command feedrate can be directly accelerated/
ACCELERATION/ decelerated. This enables a machined shape error caused by the delay of
DECELERATION acceleration/deceleration to be eliminated. However, the deceleration
BEFORE CUTTING command (G09) needs to be given to the block requiring deceleration
such as a corner by the program.
FEED
D Exponential
acceleration/deceleration
after feed interpolation
Interpolation Acceleration/
f (pulse distribution) f deceleration control
Servo
control Motor
t t
TC
D Linear acceleration/
deceleration after feed
interpolation
f f
Servo
control Motor
t t
TC
D Linear acceleration/
deceleration before feed
interpolation
Acceleration/decel- Servo
eration applied to control Motor
feedrate command t
TC
66
5.8 Acceleration/deceleration before Pre–read Interpolation has the

advantage that there is no machined shape error caused by the delay of
ACCELERATION/ acceleration/deceleration. However, the deceleration command (G09)
DECELERATION must be given to the block such as a corner with a large speed change of
BEFORE PRE–READ either axis. Therefore, it has the disadvantage that acceleration/
deceleration needs to be considered by program commands. However,
INTERPOLATION
this function allows automatic judgement of whether the speed is
decelerated by reading the command up to 15 blocks ahead, thus making
it unnecessary to consider acceleration/deceleration during creation of
program commands and eliminating any machined shape error caused by
the delay of acceleration/deceleration.
5.9 The function for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after rapid

traverse interpolation increases or decreases the rapid traverse feedrate
BELL–SHAPED smoothly.
ACCELERATION/ This reduces the shock to the machine system due to changing
DECELERATION acceleration when the feedrate is changed.
As compared with linear acceleration/deceleration, bell–shaped
AFTER RAPID
acceleration/deceleration allows smaller time constants to be set,
TRAVERSE reducing the time required for acceleration/deceleration.
INTERPOLATION
Linear acceleration/deceleration Bell–shaped acceleration/
for rapid traverse deceleration for rapid traverse
Feedrate
Feedrate
0 0
Time Time
Acceleration
Acceleration
0 0
Time Time
5.10 The cutting point speed control function is used when circular
interpolation is performed in the cutter compensation C mode. This
CUTTING POINT function allows a programmed feedrate to be used as the feedrate at the
SPEED CONTROL cutting point rather than the feedrate at the center of the tool.
FUNCTION This function is enabled or disabled by setting the CAFC bit of parameter
1402.
67
5.11 This function accelerates and decelerates the machining feedrate to

maintain the speed specified by the PMC axis control function throughout
ACCELERATION/ the cutting process.
DECELERATION This function linearly accelerates and decelerates the tool to ensure
FUNCTION FOR THE smooth operation during the entire cutting process. Also, when the
feedrate changes in the middle of the cutting process, this function
CONSTANT SPEED
automatically accelerates or decelerates the speed to prevent irregular tool
SPECIFIED BY THE movement.
PMC AXIS CONTROL
FUNCTION
PMC BMI CNC
Axis Axis control block Axis control

control data signal (rotation axis)
Constant Acceleration/ Servo Motor

Constant Constant speed speed deceleration
speed command control
control control
command Rotation speed data
Axis control data
Signal
When this signal turns on,
monitoring the constant speed rotation
Stop Speed command discontinues.
command skip signal
Fig. 5.11 Block diagram of system operation when the constant speed is specified
5.12 Move command in blocks commanded with G09 decelerates at the end
point, and inposition check is performed. G09 command is not necessary
EXACT STOP (G09) for deceleration at the end point for positioning (G00) and inposition
check is also done automatically. This function is used when sharp edges
are required for workpiece corners in cutting feed.
5.13 In a block in which a positioning block or an exact stop command is

specified, such as a cutting feed block, the cutting speed is decelerated at
CUTTING/RAPID the end of the block to perform the position check. The cutting/rapid
TRAVERSE POSITION traverse position check function allows the operator to set the effective
CHECK FUNCTION area size. Using this function, a small effective area can be specified for
cutting feed blocks requiring accuracy and a large effective area can be
specified for positioning blocks requiring a shorter positioning time.
5.14 When G61 is commanded, deceleration of cutting feed command at the

end point and inposition check is performed per block thereafter. This
EXACT STOP MODE G61 is valid till G64 (cutting mode), G62 (automatic corner override), or
(G61) G63 (tapping mode) is commanded.
5.15 When G64 is commanded, deceleration at the end point of each block
thereafter is not performed and cutting goes on to the next block. This
CUTTING MODE (G64) command is valid till G61 (exact stop mode), G62 (automatic corner
override), or G63 (tapping mode) is commanded.
68
5.16 When G63 is commanded, feedrate override is ignored (always regarded

as 100%), and feed hold also becomes invalid. Cutting feed does not
TAPPING MODE (G63) decelerate at the end of block to transfer to the next block. And in-tapping
mode signal is issued during tapping operation. This G63 is valid till G61
(exact stop mode), G62 (automatic corner override), or G64 (cutting
mode) is commanded.
5.17 When G62 is commanded during cutter compensation, cutting feedrate is

automatically overridden at corner. The cutting quantity per unit time of
AUTOMATIC CORNER the corner is thus controlled not to increase. This G62 is valid till G61
OVERRIDE (G62) (exact stop mode), G64 (cutting mode), or G63 (tapping mode) is
commanded.
5.18 With the G04 command, shifting to the next block can be delayed.
When commanded with a per minute feed mode (G94), shifting to the next
DWELL (G04) block can be delayed for the commanded minutes.
When commanded with a per rotation feed mode (G95), shifting to the
next block can be delayed till the spindle rotates for the commanded
times.
Dwell may always be performed by time irrespective of G94 and G95 by
parameter selection.
Format
Per second dwell
G94 G04 P_ _ ;
X_ _
P_ _ or X_ _ : Dwell time commanded in seconds
(0.001 to 99999.999 sec)
Per revolution dwell
G95 G04 P_ _ ;
X_ _
P_ _ or X_ _ : Spindle rotation angle commanded in rev.
(0.001 to 99999.999 rev)
5.19 This function provided for machines that do not have (or use) a position
coder. When a feedrate is specified in the feed–per–rotation mode, it is
FEED PER ROTATION converted to a feedrate in the feed–per–minute mode on the assumption
WITHOUT A that the spindle turns according to the spindle speed command (S code).
POSITION CODER The tool is then moved along the feed axis at the converted feedrate.
Example)
G95 G01 F1. S1000 Z100. ;
When the above command is specified, the tool is moved along the
Z–axis at F1000 in the feed–per–minute mode [mm/min], on the
assumption that the spindle turns at 1000 revolutions per minute.
NOTE
In this function, S1 corresponds to one rpm.
69
6. REFERENCE POSITION NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
6 REFERENCE POSITION
70
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 6. REFERENCE POSITION
6.1 Positioning to the reference position can be done by manual operation.

With jogging mode (J), manual reference point return (ZRN) signals, and
MANUAL signal for selecting manual reference position return axis (J1 to J6)
REFERENCE on, the tool begins to move at rapid traverse. When deceleration limit
POSITION RETURN switch mounted on the machine is turned on, it decelerates, and when it
is turned off again, it stops at the first grid point, and reference position
return end lamp lights.
This point is the reference position.
By performing manual reference position return, the machine coordinate
system and the work coordinate system is established.
There are the following two methods to perform manual reference
position return:
1) Grid method
A certain grid of the position detection is appointed as the reference
position. The reference position can be shifted by the grid shift
function.
2) Magne–switch method
The rise point of the proximity switch on the machine is appointed as
the reference position.
71
6.2 1) Return to reference position (G28)

With the G28 command, the commanded axis is positioned to the
AUTOMATIC reference position via the commanded point. After positioning, the
REFERENCE reference position return end lamp lights. If G28 was commanded
POSITION RETURN when reference position return is not performed after power on,
reference position return is done in the same sequence as the manual
(G28, G29)
reference position return.
Format
G28 _ _ ;
_ _ : Command intermediate point
2) Return from reference position (G29)

With the G29 command, the commanded axis is positioned to the point
commanded by G29, via the intermediate point commanded by G28.
Format
G29 _ _ ;
Reference position
R
Y
Suppose tool change was

performed at R.
B
Intermediate As seen from the above
point example, the programmer
A need not calculate a con-
crete movement value
C from the intermediate point
to the reference position.
Fig. 6.2 Example of use of G28 and G29
72
6.3 This function is used to check whether the reference position return
command was performed correctly.
REFERENCE When G27 is commanded, the commanded axis is positioned to the
POSITION RETURN specified position, reference position return end lamp lights if reference
CHECK (G27) position return is performed to the correct position, and alarm arises it is
not positioned correctly to the reference position.
This function is available after power is turned on and reference position
return is performed.
Format
G27 _ _ ;
6.4 With the G30 command, the commanded axis is positioned to the 2nd,
3rd, or the 4th reference position, via the commanded point. 2nd, 3rd, or
2ND, 3RD AND 4TH 4th reference position return lamp lights when positioning ends.
REFERENCE POINT Set the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference position position as parameters.
RETURN (G30) This function is available after power is turned on and reference position
return is performed.
G29 can be used to return from the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference point (same
as reference position return, G28).
Format
P2
G30 P3 _ _ ;
P4
where
P2, P3, P4: Select from 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference positions.
If not selected, 2nd reference position return is
automatically selected.
73
6.5 It is possible to return the tool to the floating reference position by

commanding the G30.1.
FLOATING The floating reference position is located on the machine and can be a
REFERENCE reference position of some sort of machine operation. It is not always a
POSITION RETURN fixed position but may vary in some cases. The floating reference
position can be set using the soft keys of MDI and can be memorized even
(G30.1)
if the power is turned off.
Generally, the position where the tools can be replaced on machining
center, milling machine is a set position on top of the machinery. The
tools cannot be replaced at any machine angle. Normally the tool
replacement position is at any of the No. 1 to No. 4 reference position.
The tool can be restored to these positions easily by G30 command.
However, depending on the machine, the tools can be replaced at any
position as long as it does not contact the workpiece.
For machinery such as these, in order to reduce the cycle time, it is
advantageous to replace tools at a position as close as possible to the
workpiece. For this purpose, tool replacement position must be changed
for each workpiece shape and this feature can be easily realized by this
function. Namely, the tool replacement position which is suitable for
workpiece can be memorized as the floating reference position and it is
possible to return the tool to the tool replacement position easily by
commanding the G30.1.
Format
G30.1 _ ;
, however _ : It is the intermediate point to the floating reference posi-

tion and is commanded by an absolute value or an incremental value.
When the G30.1 is commanded, the axis commanded is set to the

intermediate point with rapid traverse at first and then is set to the floating
reference position from the intermediate point with rapid traverse. The
positioning to the intermediate point or to the floating point is performed
at rapid traverse for each axis (non-linear positioning). When the BMI
interface is used, the floating reference position return completion signal
is output after completing the floating reference position return.
G30.1 G90 X50.0 Y40.0 ;

Y
Intermediate point (50, 40)
Floating reference
position
Workpiece
Fig. 6.5 Example of use G30.1
74
6.6 When adjusting a deceleration dog, the user should be able to adequately
match an electrical grid point with the machine zero point. When the
REFERENCE automatic reference position setting function is used, the grid shift and
POSITION software deceleration dog amount can be set automatically by moving
AUTOMATIC SETTING from a grid point where a stop is to take place, to the machine zero point.
This movement is made by turning on and off the automatic reference
FUNCTION
position setting signals (RAST1, RAST2, RAST3, ...) and by manual
operation (jog feed, manual handle feed).
In reference position return, the grid shift and software deceleration dog
function as follows:
When reference position return is performed, the tool stops at the position
where the first grid signal was detected after the limit switch of the
deceleration dog was passed.
This position is the electrical stop position. It must match the machine
zero point.
[With no grid shift]
Direction of reference position return

Limit switch å å
Deceleration dog Stopped Machine zero point

±
Grid point ³
Shifted by grid shift
To match the electrical stop position with the machine zero point, a grid
shift is set automatically. From the electrical stop position, the grid point
can be shifted by +1/2 of a grid point interval.
[After a grid shift us set]

Limit switch å å
Deceleration dog Stopped Machine zero point

±
Grid point ³
Furthermore, a software deceleration dog is automatically set (software

extension of the deceleration dog). The software deceleration dog can be
used to match the electrical stop position with the machine zero point by
turning off the deceleration dog 1/2 of grid point interval from the
machine zero point.
75
[After a grid shift and software deceleration dog are set]

Limit switch å å
Stopped
±
Software deceleration dog
Deceleration dog Machine zero point
Grid point ³
1/2 of the grid
point interval
6.7 The dog–less reference position setting function is used for cutting
machines equipped with an absolute–position detector. This function
DOG–LESS allows the operator to set the reference point without the deceleration
REFERENCE signal when manually moving the tool close to the reference point
POSITION SETTING specified for each axis in the reference point return mode. Using this
function, the reference point can be set at any desired position without
FUNCTION
using the reference point return deceleration signal.
76
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 7. COORDINATE SYSTEMS
7 COORDINATE SYSTEMS
77
7. COORDINATE SYSTEMS NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
7.1 Machine coordinate system is a coordinate system set with a zero point
proper to the machine system.
MACHINE A coordinate system in which the reference point becomes the
COORDINATE parameter-preset coordinate value when manual reference point return is
SYSTEM (G53) performed, is set.
With G53 command, the machine coordinate system is selected and the
axis is moved in rapid traverse to the position expressed by the machine
coordinates.
Format
G53 _ _ ;
7.2 A coordinate system in which the zero point is set to a fixed point on the
workpiece, to make programming simple. When actually machining,
WORKPIECE distance between machine coordinates’ zero point and work coordinates’
COORDINATE zero point is measured and set as workpiece zero point offset quantity via
SYSTEM (G54 TO G59) MDI. 6 type of workpiece coordinates can be set and selected with:
G54 – G59
Format
G54
G55 _ _ ;
:
G59
78
7.3 With G52 commanded, the local coordinate system with the commanded
position as zero point can be set. Coordinates once set is valid till a new
LOCAL COORDINATE G52 is commanded. This is used when, for example, programming of a
SYSTEM (G52) part of the workpiece becomes easier if there is a zero point besides the
workpice coordinates’ zero point.
Format
G52 _ ;
(Local
coordinate
system)
(Workpiece coordi- (Local coordinate system)

nate system1: G54)
(Workpiece coordi-
Workpiece zero nate system2: G55)
(Local
point offset value coordinate
system)
(Workpiece coordi-
Value set by nate system6: G59)
parameter
(Machine coordinate system)
Zero point of machine coordinate system
Reference poisition
Fig. 7.3
When local coordinate system is set, local coordinate system 1 - 6,

corresponding to workpiece coordinate system 1 - 6 is set. Distance
between zero points are all the same preset value.
If G52 IP0; is commanded, local coordinate system is canceled.
79
7.4 With the

G92 _ _ ;
WORKPIECE command, workpiece coordinate system can be changed so that current
COORDINATES position of the tool becomes the specified position.
SYSTEM CHANGE
(G92) Y Y’
160 100 Tool position
100
X
A 100
X
100 200
Fig. 7.4
If G92 X100 Z100 ; is commanded when the tool is positioned at (200,

160) in G54 mode, workpiece coordinate system 1 (X’ – Y’) displaced by
vector A is created. At the same time, workpiece coordinate system 2 to
6 shift by vector A.
When creating a new workpiece coordinate system with the G92
command, since it is determined so that a certain point of the tool becomes
a certain coordinate value, the new workpiece coordinate system can be
determined irrespective of the old workpiece coordinate system. If the
G92 command is used to determine a start point for machining based on
workpieces, a new coordinate system can be created even if there is an
error in the old workpiece coordinate system.
7.5 Six workpiece coordinate systems can be set. But, when that is still not
enough, or when workpiece origin offset value must be set by tape or
WORKPIECE ORIGIN changed, this G10 command is used to change workpiece origin offsets.
OFFSET VALUE When G10 is commanded in subsolute command (G90), the commanded
CHANGE workpiece origin offsets becomes the new workpiece origin offsets, and
when G10 is commanded in incremental command (G91), the currently
(PROGRAMMABLE
set workpiece origin offsets plus the commanded workpiece origin offset
DATA INPUT) (G10) becomes the new workpiece offsets.
Format
G10 L2 PP _ ;
where
PP : Specifiy workpiece coordinates to which offsetts are changed
P : 1 to 6
: Workpiece origin offset value
80
7.6 Forty-eight workpiece coordinate systems can be added when existing

six workpiece coordinate systems (G54 - G59) are not enough for the
ADDITIONAL operation. Make a command as follows for selection of workpiece
WORKPIECE coordinate system.
COORDINATE G54.1 PP .....;
SYSTEMS (G54.1) P: 1 – 48 Number of the additional workpiece coordinate system
The following are the methods of setting and changing of the workpiece
origin offset value as well as those used for the existing workpiece
coordinate systems of G54 to G59.
1) Method via CRT/MDI
2) Method via program
– G10L20Pp;
– Custom macro
3) Method of external workpiece coordinate system shift
The set workpiece origin offset value is displayed on the CRT. Also, the
set workpiece origin offset can be punched out.
WORK ZERO OFFSET O0001 N00100
P: 01 (G54.1) P: 03 (G54.1)
X 123.456 X –111.111
Y 234.567 Y 222.222
Z 345.678 Z –333.333
P: 02 (G54.1) P: 04 (G54.1)
X –123.456 X 111.111
Y 234.567 Y –222.222
Z –345.678 Z 333.333
(MM)
MDI *** STOP **** *** *** 09:53:47 LSK
INPUT +INPUT MEASURE TL_INP INP_NO.+
Fig. 7.6
81
7.7 The workpiece coordinate system with its zero position away by the
workpiece zero offset amount from the machine coordinate system zero
WORKPIECE position is set by returning the tool to the reference point by a manual
COORDINATE operation. Also, when the absolute position detector is provided, the
SYSTEM PRESET workpiece coordinate system is automatically set by reading the machine
coordinate value from the detector when power on without performing
(G92.1)
manual reference point return operation. The set workpiece coordinate
may shift by any of the following commands or operation:
a) When manual interruption is performed with the manual absolute
signal off
b) When the travel command is performed by the machine lock
c) When axis travel is performed by the handle interrupt or
auto/manual simultaneous operation
d) When operation is performed by mirror image
e) When the setting of local coordinate system is performed by the
G52 or change of workpiece coordinate system is performed by the
G92
f) When origin setting of workpiece coordinate system is performed
by the MDI operation
The workpiece coordinate system shifted by the above operation can be
preset by the G code instruction or MDI operation the same as
conventional manual reference point return.
1) Workpiece coordinate system preset by G code command
The workpiece coordinate system can be preset by commanding the
Format
G92.1 0 ;
0 : The axis address to be preset the workpiece coordinate system

Uncommanded axis is not preset.
2) Workpiece coordinate system preset by MDI operation

The workpiece coordinate system can be preset by the MDI operation
with soft keys.
82
7.8 This function switches a machining program created on the G17 plane in
the right–hand Cartesian coordinate system to programs for other planes
PLANE SWITCHING specified by G17.1Px commands, so that the same figure appears on each
FUNCTION plane when viewed from the directions indicated by arrows.
Machine
coordinate Z G17.1 P1 (G17)
system G17.1 P4
G17.1 P5 Y
G17.1 P3
X
G17.1 P2
83
8. COORDINATE VALUE AND
DIMENSION NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
8 COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION
84
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS DIMENSION
8.1 There are two ways to command travels to the axes; the absolute
command, and the incremental command. In the absolute command,
ABSOLUTE AND coordinate value of the end point is programmed; in the incremental
INCREMENTAL command, move distance of the axis itself is programmed.
PROGRAMMING G90 and G91 are used to command absolute or incremental command.
G90 : Absolute command
(G90, G91)
G91 : Incremental command
Y
End point
70.0
30.0 Start point
X
40.0 100.0
Fig. 8.1
For the above figure, incremental command programming results in:

G91X–60.0Y40.0 ;
while absolute command programming results in:
G90X40.0Y70.0 ;
85
DIMENSION NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
8.2 The end point coordinate value can be input in polar coordinates (radius
and angle). Use G15, G16 for polar coordinates command.
POLAR COORDINATE G15 : Polar coordinate system command cancel
COMMAND (G15, G16) G16 : Polar coordinate system command
Plane selection of the polar coordinates is done same as plane selection
in circular interpolation, using G17, G18, G19.
Command radius in the first axis of the selected plane, and angle in the
second axis. For example, when the X-Y plane is selected, command
radius with address X, and angle with address Y. The plus direction of the
angle is counter clockwise direction of the selected plane first axis +
direction, and the minus direction the clockwise direction.
Both radius and angle can be commanded in either absolute or
incremental command (G90, G91).
The center of the polar coordinates is the zero point of the local
coordinates.
Example) Bolt hole cycle

N1 G17 G90 G16; Polar coordinates command, X-Y plane
N2 G81 X100. Y30. Z-20. R-5. F200.; 100mm radius, 30° angle
N3 X100. Y150; 100mm radius, 150° angle
N4 X100. Y270; 100mm radius, 270° angle
N5 G15 G80; Polar coordinates cancel
Local coordinate
150° system
30°
270° X
100mm
Fig. 8.2
8.3 Conversion of inch and metric input can be commanded by the G code
command.
INCH/METRIC G20 : Inch input
CONVERSION G21 : Metric input
(G20, G21) Whether the output is in inch system or metric system is parameter-set
when the machine is installed.
Command G20, G21 at the head of the program.
Inch/metric conversation can also be done by MDI setting.
The contents of setting data differs depending on whether G20 or G21 is
commanded.
86
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS DIMENSION
8.4 Numerals can be input with decimal points. Decimal points can be used
basically in numerals with units of distance, speed, and angle. The
DECIMAL POINT position of the decimal point is at the mm, inch, deg position.
INPUT/POCKET Use parameters to select input method; whether to input by pocket
CALCULATOR TYPE calculator type input, or by the former decimal point input.
DECIMAL POINT Table 8.4
INPUT Pocket calculator type Format type decimal
Program command
decimal point input point input
X1000 1000 mm 1 mm
x1000 1000 mm 1000 mm
8.5 Since the work cross section is usually circular in latches, its dimensions
can be specified in two ways when performing a thing:
DIAMETER AND
RADIUS X axis
PROGRAMMING A
B R2
R1 Z axis
D1 D2
D1, D2 . . . . Diameter programming

R1, R2 . . . . Radius programming
When the diameter is specified, it is called diameter programming, and

when the radius is specified, it is called radius programming.
The diameter programming or radius programming can be selected by
parameter for each axis.
8.6 In diameter/radius programming, the DIAx bit (bit 3 of parameter 1006)

specifies whether to use diameter or radius programming for each
FUNCTION FOR controlled axis. With this function, the G code can switch between
SWITCHING diameter and radius programming for axis commands.
BETWEEN DIAMETER
AND RADIUS
PROGRAMMING
87
9. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
9 SPINDLE FUNCTIONS
88
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 9. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS
9.1 The spindle speed is commanded in a 8–digit numeral with sign after the
address S. The signed 8–digit numeral is output in 32–bit binary code.
S CODE OUTPUT Minus numbers are expressed in two’s complement. This code is kept till
the next S code is commanded. Maximum input digits and use of the
minus sign is commanded by parameters.
9.2 The commanded spindle speed is output in 16–bit binary code. For
constant surface speed control (CSSC), the spindle speed after the CSSC
SPINDLE SPEED is output.
BINARY CODE This code is kept till the next S code is commanded, if it is not under
OUTPUT constant surface speed control.
9.3 When output voltage to the spindle motor is input with sign + 13–bit
binary codes, analog voltage corresponding the input is output.
SPINDLE SPEED <Maximum output voltage> 10V
ANALOG OUTPUT
9.4 Command G96, and for constant surface speed control.
CONSTANT SURFACE
SPEED CONTROL Format
(G96, G97) G96 : Constant surface speed control on
G97 : Constant surface speed control off
When constant surface speed control is on, directly commanding surface

speed with the S code, spindle speed in which spindle speed makes
surface speed constant to change of tool position (when absolute
coordinate value in the work coordinates is regarded as the radius), is
output in binary code.
Command surface speed in m/min unit for metric input, and feet/min unit
for inch input. Commandable range is as follows:
– Without decimal point
1 – 999999 m/min or feet/min
– With decimal point
0.01 – 999999.99 m/min or feet/min
When constant surface speed control is off, spindle speed shall be
commanded with an S code.
When constant surface speed control is on, a constant surface speed
control on signal is output.
Command which axis to perform constant surface speed control with
address P in the G96 block. If P is omitted, P1 (X axis) is regarded to be
commanded.
P1 : X axis P2 : Y axis P3 : Z axis P4 : U axis
P5 : V axis P6 : W axis P7 : A axis P8 : B axis
P9 : C axis
89
9.5
SPINDLE SPEED
CLAMP (G92) Format
G92S _ _ ;
S_ _ : Maximum spindle speed (unit: rpm)
Maximum spindle speed is set with the above command. The maximum
spindle speed set is output in 16–bit binary code. It is necessary to clamp
to the spindle speed at the PMC side according to the maximum spindle
speed output.
9.6 Actual spindle speed calculated by the return pulses of the position coder
on the spindle is output in 16–bit binary code.
ACTUAL SPINDLE
SPEED OUTPUT
9.7 The spindle positioning can be done by the spindle motor, without adding
an extra servo motor for the C axis.
SPINDLE The spindle position is detected by the position coder attached to the
POSITIONING spindle for the per rotation feed and the thread cutting functions. The
spindle motor speed command is output from the spindle speed analog
output. It is not necessary to add new hardwares to the NC for spindle
positioning. Whether to use the spindle motor for spindle positioning
(spindle positioning mode) or to use the spindle motor for spindle rotation
(spindle rotation mode) is command by special M codes (set by
parameters).
1) Move command
When commanded:
G00 C_ _; ,
The spindle is positioned to the commanded position by rapid traverse.
Absolute (G90) and incremental (G91) command, as well as decimal
point input is possible.
2) Increment system
Least input increment: 0.001deg.
Detection unit: (360 N)/4096 deg.
N: Combination ratio of position coder and
spindle (N=1,2,4)
90
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 9. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS
9.8 This function monitor spindle speed, detects a higher level of fluctuation
than the commanded speed and signals an abnormality, if any, to the
SPINDLE SPEED machine side, using an alarm, thereby preventing the spindle from
FLUCTUATION seizure, for example. Whether the spindle speed fluctuation detection is
DETECTION done or not is specified by G code.
G25 : Spindle speed fluctuation detection is on.
(G25, G26)
G26 : Spindle speed fluctuation detection is off.
Format
G26 P_ Q_ R_ D_ ;
P_ : Time from the change of spindle speed to the start of the spindle
speed fluctuation detection (Unit: msec)
Q_ : The ratio of spindle speed to the specified spindle speed where
spindle speed fluctuation detection starts (Units: %)
R_ : Fluctuation ratio regarded as an alarm (Unit: %)
D_ : Fluctuation ratio which regarded as an alarm (Unit: rpm)
NOTE
1 The value of P, Q, R and D remains after the power off.
2 The actual spindle speed is calculated by the return pulses
generated from the position coder attached to the spindle.
91
There are two ways in generating an alarm:

An alarm is generated before the specified spindle speed reaches.
An alarm is generated after the specified spindle speed reaches.
1) When an alarm is generated after the spindle speed becomes the

commanded speed.
Spindle
speed
r
d
q Commanded
q d speed
r
Actual
speed
NO
CHECK CHECK CHECK
Time
Another speed Check Alarm Actual speed
is commanded start
Commanded speed : (Speed commanded by S) (Spindle override)

Actual speed : Speed detected by position coder
q : Allowable rate for starting checkup
r : Fluctuation rate in which an alarm is given
d : Fluctuation width in which an alarm is given
2) When an alarm is generated before the spindle speed becomes the

commanded speed.
Spindle
speed
r
q d Specified
q d speed
r
p Actual
spindle
NO speed
CHECK CHECK CHECK
Time
Another speed Check Alarm
is commanded start
p : Time between changes in commanded speed and check start.
92
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
10 TOOL FUNCTIONS
93
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
10.1 A tool is selected with a tool number commanded by a signed 8–digit

number after address T.
T CODE OUTPUT The signed 8–digit number is output in 32–bit binary code. The minus
numbers are expressed in two’s complement. This code is valid till the
next T code is commanded. Specify whether or not to use maximum input
digits and minus sign with parameters.
94
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
10.2 Tools are classified into groups, and tool life (hours and times of use) is
set for each group. When use of the tool exceeds the preset hours or times
TOOL LIFE of use, another tool in the same group which has not yet exceeded the
MANAGEMENT preset life time is selected. If all the tool in a group exceeds the preset life
time, a signal is output to inform the operator that the tools must be
changed to new tools. With setting the cutter radius compensation
number and the tool length compensation number of the tools,
compensation corresponding to each tool can also be done.
With use of this function Factory Automation (FA) comes to a reach.
This function has the following features:
1) Tool life can be set in hours or times of use.
2) New tool select signal output
This signal is output when a new tool is selected in a group. This can
also be used for automatic measurement in compensations of the new
tools.
3) Tool change signal
When all the tools of a group has exceeded their life time, this signal
is output to inform the operator.
4) Tool skip signal
By inputting this signal, tools still not exceeding their life time, can
also be changed.
5) Tool life management data is display/modification
All tool life management data is displayed on the CRT screen,
informing the operator of the condition of the tools at a single view.
If necessary, the data can be modified via the MDI panel.
Number of groups and number of tools per group is selected by
parameter from the following.
Number of groups Number of tools
16 16
32 8
64 4
128 2
The following selection is also possible.

Tool life management 512 groups Tool life management 1024 groups
Number of groups Number of tools Number of groups Number of tools
64 32 128 32
128 16 256 16
256 8 512 8
512 4 1024 4
NOTE
1 The part program storage length becomes shorter by 6m
when this function is provided.
2 In 15–MB, the expanded tool life management of the Series
10/11/12 is included in the tool life management.
95
11. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
11 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
96
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 11. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
11.1 When a signed 8–digit number after address M is commanded, a 32–bit

binary code is output. The minus number is expressed in a two’s
MISCELLANEOUS complement. This code is kept till the next M code is output. Specify
FUNCTIONS whether or not to use maximum input digits and minus sign with
parameters.
This function is used for on/off at the machine side. A single M code can
be commanded in one block. The following M codes are decoded and
output:
M00 : Program stop
M01 : Optional stop
M02 : End of program
M30 : End of program and tape rewind
The above M codes can also be output in binary codes.
M98 (sub program call) and M99(return from sub program) and always
processed in the NC so, signal will not be output.
11.2 When a signed 8–digit number after address B is commanded, a 32–bit

binary code is output. The minus number is expressed in a two’s
SECOND complement. This code is kept till the next B code is commanded.
MISCELLANEOUS Specify whether or not to use maximum input digits and minus sign with
FUNCTIONS parameters.
This function is used for on/off at the machine side. A single B code can
be commanded in one block. By parameter setting, A, C, U, V or W can
also be used in place of address B. However, the same address as the
control axes cannot be used.
97
11. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
11.3 The communication of execution command signal (strobe signal) and

completion signal is the M/S/T/B function were simplified to realize a
HIGH–SPEED M/S/T/B high-speed execution of M/S/T/B function.
INTERFACE
The time required for cutting can be minimized by speeding up the
execution time of M/S/T/B function.
The following describes an example of auxiliary function M code
command. The same applies to the T, S, and B (second auxiliary function)
functions.
If there is an M command, the NC side inverses the logic level of strobe
signal MF. Namely, LOW signal is converted to HIGH signal, while
HIGH signal is converted to LOW signal. After the NC side inverses the
signal MF, it is considered that the operation of PMC side has been
completed if the logic level of completion signal FIN from the PMC is the
same as that of the signal MF.
In the conventional system, if the leading edge (from LOW to HIGH) of
the completion signal FIN of M/S/T/B is received and then the trailing
edge (from HIGH to LOW) of the signal FIN is received, it is considered
that the operation has been completed. However, in this system, the
operation is considered to have been completed by a single change of
signal FIN.
Example) M10;
M20;
M10 M20
M command Mxx
Code signal
Strobe signal MF
Operation at PMC side
M function completion
signal MFIN
Fig. 11.3 (a) High–speed system time chart
M10 M20
M command Mxx
Code signal
Strobe signal MF
Operation at PMC side
Completion signal FIN
Fig. 11.3 (b) Conventional system time chart
98
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 11. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
NOTE
1 Either the conventional system or the high-speed system
can be selected for communication of strobe signal and
completion signal.
2 The high–speed system is valid only for the basic machine
interface (BMI). It cannot be used for the FS3 and FS6
interfaces.
3 In the conventional system, only one completion signal is
available for all functions of M/S/T/B. However, in the
high–speed system, one completion signal is available for
each of M/S/T/B functions.
11.4 Up to five M codes can be simultaneously specified in one block.

As these M codes are simultaneously sent to PMC side, the machining
1–BLOCK PLURAL M cycle time compared with the conventional 1-block single M command
COMMAND is reduced.
Example)
(i) 1–block single M command
M40;
M50;
M60;
G28G91X0Y0Z0;
:
(ii) 1–block plural M command
M40M50M60;
G28G91X0Y0Z0;
:
CAUTION
1 The maximum input value of the first M code is 99999999,
while the maximum input values of the M codes from the
second to fifth M codes are 9999.
2 A strobe signal is provided for each of the first to fifth M
codes (MF, MF2, MF3, MF4, and MF5).
When all the operations for the first to fifth M codes are
completed, completion signal FIN is output.
99
12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
12 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION
100
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION
12.1 A program number is given to each program to distinguish a program

from other programs. The program number is given at the head of each
PROGRAM NUMBER program, with a 4-digit number after the address O.
Program number of the program currently under execution is always
displayed on the CRT screen. Program search of programs registered in
the memory is done with the program number. The program number can
be used in various ways.
12.2 A program name can be given to the program to distinguish the program
from other programs when displaying all the registered program on a
PROGRAM NAME screen. Register the name between the control-out and the control-in.
Any codes usable in the NC can be used for the program name.
The program name is displayed with the program number in the directory
display of registered programs. Note that the program name displayed is
within 16 characters.
Example) O1234 (PROGRAM FOR ATC);
12.3 A program name can be expanded to 48 characters.

PROGRAM NAME 1) Directory display of program names
(48 CHARACTERS) Program names can be displayed on the directory screen of program
using a maximum of 48 characters.
DIRECTORY(MEMORY)
O1111 N00000
O0001 (ENGINE CYLINDER ROUGH–BORING PART1 PROG. A111B–0) : 87 PAGES
O0002 (ENGINE CYLINDER ROUGH–BORING PART2 PROG. A111B–2) : 84 PAGES
O1111 (ENGINE PISTON FINE CUTTING PART1 PROGRAM A112B–0) : 85 PAGES
O1112 (ENGINE PISTON FINE CUTTING PART2 PROGRAM A112B–2) : 85 PAGES
O9001 (ENGINE CYLINDER ROUGH–BORING SUB PROGRAM A211B–0) : 8 PAGES
O9101 (ENGINE PISTON FINE CUTTING SUB PROGRAM A212B–0) : 3 PAGES
FREE PAGES : 6487( 1186M) FREE FILES : 90

EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** 12:27:18 LSK
POSITI PRGRM OFFSET PRGRAM SETTIN SERUIC MESSAG CHAPTE

ON CHECK G E E R
Example of display for 14–inch CRT
2) Program search by program name from PMC

A program search can be made by program name through the PMC
window.
12.4 A program is divided into the main program and the sub program. The
NC normally operates according to the main program, but when a
MAIN PROGRAM command calling a sub program is encountered in the main program,
control is passed to the sub program. When a command indicating to
return to the main program is encountered in the sub program, control is
returned to the main program.
101
12.5 When there are sixed sequences or frequently repeated patterns in a

program, programming can be simplified by entering these pattern as sub
SUB PROGRAM programs to the memory. Sub program is called by M98, and M99
commands return from the sub program. The sub program can be nested
8 folds.
Format
Sub program call
M98 P_ _ L_ _ ;
P_ _ : Program number of sub program to be called
L__: How many times to repeat the sub program
Return from sub program
M99 ;
Main program Sub program Sub program Sub program Sub program
O0001 ; O1000 ; O2000 ; O3000 ; O4000 ;
M98P2000 ; M98P4000 ;
M78P1000 ; M98P3000 ;
M30 ; M99 ; M99 ; M99 ; M99 ;

1-loop nesting 2-loop nesting 3-loop nesting 4-loop nesting
12.6 Sequence number can be given in a 5-digit number after the address N at
the head of the program block.
SEQUENCE NUMBER The sequence number of the program under execution is always displayed
on the CRT screen. The sequence number can also be searched in the
program by the sequence number search function.
12.7 Either the EIA or the ISO code can be used as tape code. The input
program code is distinguished with the first end of block code (EIA: CR,
TAPE CODES ISO: LF). See the List of Tape Codes in Appendix C for tape codes used.
102
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION
12.8
BASIC ADDRESSES
AND COMMAND
VALUE RANGE
Table 12.8 Basic addresses and command value range
Function Address Metric input Inch input
Program number O 1 to 9999 1 to 9999

Sequence number N 1 to 99999 1 to 99999
Preparatory functions G 0 to 99 0 to 99
Coordinates X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A,
Input unit IS–A B C
B, C, II, JJ, K
K, R
R, Q 999999.99 mm or deg 99999.999 inch or deg
IS–B 99999.999 mm or deg 9999.9999 inch or deg
IS–C 9999.9999 mm or deg 999.99999 inch or deg
IS–D 9999.99999 mm or deg 999.999999 inch or deg
IS–E 999.999999 mm or deg 99.9999999 inch or deg
Feedrate per minute F
Input unit IS–A 0.0001 to 2400000.0 mm/min 0.0001 to 240000.00 inch/min
IS–B 0.0001 to 240000.00 mm/min 0.0001 to 24000.000 inch/min
IS–C 0.0001 to 24000.000 mm/min 0.0001 to 2400.0000 inch/min
IS–D 0.0001 to 2400.0000 mm/min 0.0001 to 240.00000 inch/min
IS–E 0.0001 to 240.00000 mm/min 0.0001 to 24.000000 inch/min
Feedrate per revolution F
Input unit IS–A 0.0001 to 5000.0000 mm/rev 0.00001 to 500.00000 inch/rev
IS–B 0.00001 to 500.00000 mm/rev 0.000001 to 50.000000 inch/rev
IS–C 0.000001 to 50.000000 mm/rev 0.0000001 to 5.0000000 inch/rev
IS–D 0.0000001 to 5.0000000 mm/rev 0.00000001 to 0.50000000
inch/rev
IS–E 0.00000001 to 0.50000000 0.000000001 to 0.050000000
mm/rev inch/rev
Thread cutting lead F Same as per revolution feed
Tool functions T 0 to 99999999 0 to 99999999
Spindle functions S 0 to 99999999 0 to 99999999
Miscellaneous functions M 0 to 99999999 0 to 99999999
2nd Miscellaneous functions B, A, C, U, V, W 0 to 99999999 0 to 99999999
Offset numbers D, H 0 to 200 0 to 200
Per second dwell P, X 0 to 99999.999 sec 0 to 99999.999 sec
Per rotation dwell P, X 0 to 99999.999 rev 0 to 99999.999 rev
Repeated times L 0 to 9999 0 to 9999
CAUTION
Coordinates maximum command value for inch input/metric output is limited to: 39370.078
inch/3937.0078 inch/ 393.70078 inch.
NOTE
“:” can be used for O in ISO Code.
103
12.9 The variable block word address format with decimal point is adopted as
command format. See List of Command Format in Appendix B for
COMMAND FORMAT details on command formats.
12.10 Label skip function is valid in the following cases, and “LSK” is
displayed on the CRT screen.
LABEL SKIP 1) When power is put on.
2) When the NC is reset.
When label skip function is in valid, all codes to the first encountered end
of block (EOB) code are ignored.
The ignored part is called “Reader part”, and section after the first end of
block (EOB) code, “significant information”.
12.11 Information between the control–in and the control–out are regarded as
notes and are ignored.
CONTROL–IN/ The reset codes (ISO code: %, EIA code: ER) cannot be used in this part.
CONTROL–OUT The ignored part is called “Notes”.
ISO code EIA code
Control–out ( Channel 2–4–5 on
Control–in ) Channel 2–4–7 on
12.12 When a slash and number ( /n) is programmed at the head of a program,
and when the machine is operated with the optional block skip switch n
OPTIONAL BLOCK on the machine operator’s panel on, information in the block commanded
SKIP with the /n corresponding to the switch number n is ignored.
If the optional block skip switch n is turned off, information in the /n
commanded block will not be ignored. The block with /n commanded can
be skipped by the operator’s selection.
1 can be used for n. The 1 to /1 can be omitted.
Example) /1 N12345 G00 X100.Y200.;
12.13 2 to 9 can also be used for the n of the /n.

ADDITIONAL
OPTIONAL BLOCK
SKIP
104
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING
13 FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING
105
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
13.1 Canned cycle is a function to simplify commands for machining (boring,

drilling, or tapping, etc ).
CANNED CYCLES The canned cycle has the positioning plane and the drilling axis. The
(G73, G74, G76, positioning plane is specified with the plane selection of G17, G18, and
G80–G89, G98, G99) G19. The drilling axis is the basic axis X, Y or Z (that does not compose
the positioning plane) or its parallel axis.
G code Positioning plane Drilling axis
G17 Xp–Yp plane Zp
G18 Zp–Xp plane Yp
G19 Yp–Zp plane Xp
Xp : X axis or its parallel axis

Yp : Y axis or its parallel axis
Zp : Z axis or its parallel axis
The drilling axis address commanded in the same block as the G codes,
G73 - G89, decides whether the drilling axis is the basic axis or its parallel
axis. If the drilling axis address was not commanded, the basic axis
becomes the drilling axis.
Axis other than the drilling axis becomes the positioning axis.
Example)
When U, V, W axes are set as parallel axes for X, Y, Z axes respectively.
G17 G81 . . . Z_ _ ; Drilling axis is Z axis.
G17 G81 . . . W_ _ ; Drilling axis is W axis.
G18 G81 . . . Y_ _ ; Drilling axis is Y axis.
G18 G81 . . . V_ _ ; Drilling axis is V axis.
G19 G81 . . . X_ _ ; Drilling axis is X axis.
G19 G81 . . . U_ _ ; Drilling axis is U axis.
It is not always necessary to command G17, G18, G19 in the same
block as G73 - G89.
NOTE
Z axis can always be appointed the drilling axis by
parameter setting.
Positioning can be commanded with optional axes other than the drilling
axis. The drilling cycle starts after the positioning.
The following explanations are done on the XY plane, and Z axis as the
drilling axis.
The following 12 types of canned cycles are available.
106
Table 13.1 Canned cycles (1/2)

Operation
G code F nction
Function
G98 mode G99 mode
I
I
R R
Q d Q d
Q Z1 Q Z1 Peck drilling cycle

G73 d d (Note)
Q Z2 Q Z2
Z3 Z3
Zn Zn
I I
ä
R R ä File boring cycle

G76 (for canned cycle II
only)
Z å Z å
P Q P Q
OSS OSS
I I
Drilling cycle
G81 R R (spot drilling)
Z Z
Drilling cycle
G82 R R (counter boring)
Z P Z P
I I
R R
Q d Q d
Peck drilling cycle
G83
Q (Note)
Q
Q
Q
Z
Z
I I
Spindle forward Tapping cycle
G84 Spindle
R R (G74 is CCW tap-
G74 forward ping cycle)
Z Spindle reverse Z Spindle reverse
107
Table 13.1 Canned cycles (2/2)

Operation
G code Function
G98 mode G99 mode
I I
G85 R R Boring cycle
Z Z
I I
Spindle
Spindle forward
G86 R forward R Boring cycle
Z Spindle stop Z Spindle stop

Canned I I
cycle I
Spindle
(Caution) R R Spindle
forward Boring cycle
forward
Z Spindle stop Z Spindle stop
Canned Q G99 mode cannot be used in canned

cycle II OSS cycle G87 (Canned cycle II)
G87 å
(Caution) ä
Back boring cycle

Z å
Spindle
R ä forward
I I
Spindle
G89 R forward R Boring cycle
Z Z
P Spindle stop P
I I
G89 R R Boring cycle
Z P Z P
. . . . Cutting feed OSS . . . . Oriented spindle stop

. . . . Rapid traverse (Spindle stops at constant rotation position)
. . . . Manual feed å . . . . Shift

p . . . . Dwell I . . . . Initial point
Z . . . . Z point (Hole bottom position) R . . . . R point
CAUTION
Set parameter whether to use signals (SRV, SSP) independent of the output signals from the NC
(canned cycle I), or to use the M code (canned cycle II) for spindle CCW rotation and spindle stop.
NOTE
“d” of G73 and G83 is set by parameters.
108
When the drilling axis is Z axis, machining data in the canned cycle is
commanded as follows:
Gff X_ _ Y_ _ Z_ _ R_ _ Q_ _ P_ _ L_ _ F_ _ ;
Drilling mode Gff . . . See previous table.
Drilling position data
X, Y . . . . . Command position of the hole.
Z . . . . . Specify hole end position shown in the table 13.1.
R . . . . . Specify R point position shown in the table 13.1.
Q . . . . . Specify cutting quantity with G73, G83, and shift
quantity with G76, G87.
P . . . . . Specify dwell time at the hole bottom.
L . . . . . Specify how may times to repeat.
When specified L0, drilling data will be set, but no
drilling will be done.
F . . . . . Specify feedrate for cutting.
1) R point level return (G99)

By specifying G99, return point in canned cycle is specified to R point.
The drilling starts from the end point of the previous block. If the
previous block has ended in the initial point, it begins from the initial
point and returns to the R point.
Example) When G81 was commanded under G99 mode
Initial point
R point Rapid traverse

Cutting feed
2) Initial level return (G98)

By specifying G98, return point in canned cycle is specified to the
initial level. The drilling starts from the end point of the previous
block. If the previous block has ended in the R point, it begins from
the R point and returns to the initial point.
Example) When G81 was commanded under G98 mode
Initial point
R point Rapid traverse

Cutting feed
109
13.2 In tapping, the feed amount of Z axis for one rotation of spindle should
be equal to the pitch of screw of tapper. Namely, the following conditions
RIGID TAPPING must be satisfied in the best tapping:
(G84.2, G84.3)
P= F/S, where
P: Pitch of screw of tapper (mm)
F: Feedrate of Z axis (mm/min)
S: Spindle speed (rpm)
The rotation of spindle and feed of Z axis are independently controlled in

the tapping cycle (G84) and left–handed tapping cycle (G74). Therefore,
the above conditions may not always be satisfied. Especially at the hole
bottom, both the rotation of spindle and feed of Z axis reduce the speed
and stop. After that, they move in the inverse direction while increasing
the speed. However, the above conditions may not be satisfied in general
since each acceleration/deceleration is performed independently.
Therefore, in general, the feed is compensated by mounting a spring to the
inside of holder of tapper to improve the accuracy of tap cutting.
The rotation of spindle and feed of Z axis are controlled so that they are
always synchronous each other in the rigid tapping cycle. Namely, in
other than rigid tapping, control for speed only is performed. In the rigid
tapping, however, position control is also performed during the rotation
of spindle, that is, the rotation of spindle and feed of Z axis are controlled
as linear interpolation of two axes.
This allows the following condition to be satisfied also during

acceleration/deceleration at the hole bottom and a tapping of improved
accuracy to be made.
P = F/S
The rigid tapping cycle and rigid left–handled tapping cycle are
commanded by G84.2 and G84.3, respectively.
Command format
G84.2 X_ _ Y_ _ Z_ _ R_ _ P_ _ F_ _ S_ _ L_ _ ;
G84.3
Number of
repetitions
Spindle speed rpm
Cutting feedrate
Dwell time on returning to points
Z and R (however, when P is
valid with parameter selection)
Coordinate value of point R
Coordinate value of point Z
Drilling position
When the G84.2 or G84.3 is commanded in the feed per revolution mode
(G95), the unit of cutting feedrate F_ _ becomes mm/rev or inch/rev.
Therefore, the pitch of screw tap can be directly specified.
110
Spindle control
(voltage calculation of
spindle speed rpm)
CMR
Distributed ×M D/A Spindle Spindle
pulse Error counter converter amplifier motor
+
–
Gear
ratio
n:m
DMR 1024pulse/rev
×4 Gear Spindle
Position
coder ratio
1:p
Gear ratio of spindle to Least command increment

position coder (1 : p) (detection unit) deg
1:1 0.088 (1x360/4096)

1:2 0.176 (2x360/4096)
1:4 0.352 (4x360/4096)
Fig. 13.2 The Control system of spindle during rigid tapping
Even use of the spindle motor incorporating the position coder enables
rigid tapping. In this case, the gear ratio of the spindle motor and the
spindle is set by the parameter. If, however, there are multiple gears
between the spindle motor and the spindle, i.e., if three speed gears (for
high, medium, and low speeds) are mounted between them, only one of
these gears enables rigid tapping.
In addition, use of the spindle motor incorporating the position coder
enables rigid tapping but disables threading and per revolution dwell.
13.3
EXTERNAL
OPERATION Format
FUNCTION (G80, G81)
G81 _ _ L_ _ ;
where
_ _ : Optional combination of axis address X, Y, Z, U, V, W. A, B, C
L_ _ : Times to repeat
With the above program, external operation signal is output after

positioning. G80 command cancels the external operation function.
111
13.4 By adding :
, R_ _
OPTIONAL ANGLE to the end of blocks commanding linear or circular interpolation, optional
CORNER ROUNDING angle corner rounding can be automatically inserted.
Example)
1 G91 G01 X100.0, R10.0 ; (200,100)
2 X100.0 Y100.0 ;
2
R
1
(0,0) (100,0)
Fig. 13.4
13.5 By adding :
, C_ _
OPTIONAL ANGLE to the end of blocks commanding linear or circular interpolation, optional
CHAMFERING angle chamfering can be automatically inserted.
Specify a numeral following address C, which indicates the distance
between the imaginary corner and start or end of chamfering.
Example)
1 G91 G01 X100.0, C10.0 ; (200,100)
2 X100.0 Y100.0 ;
2
1
10
(0,0)
10 (100,0)
Fig. 13.5
13.6 Radius value of an arc can be directly designated, instead of using I, J, K;

thus simplifying programming.
CIRCULAR For arc of 180° or more, designate a minus value to R. A whole circle
INTERPOLATION BY cannot be commanded.
RADIUS
PROGRAMMING End point Y
(x, y)
r Start point
X
G03X x Y y R r;
Fig. 13.6
112
13.7 Mirror image can be commanded on each axis by programming. Ordinary

mirror image (commanded by remote switch or setting) comes after the
PROGRAMMABLE programmable mirror image is applied.
MIRROR IMAGE 1) Setting of programmable mirror image
(G50.1, G51.1) G51.1 X_ _ Y_ _ Z_ _ ;
is commanded and mirror image is commanded to each axis (as if
mirror was set on the axis).
2) Programmable mirror image cancel
G50.1 X0 Y0 Z0_ _;
is commanded and the programmable mirror image is canceled.
When shape of the workpiece is symmetric to an axis, a program for
machining the whole part can be prepared by programming a part of
the workpiece using programmable mirror image and sub program.
Y
Main program
N10 G00 G90 ;
100
N20 M98 P9000 ;
N30 G51.1 X50.0 ;
N40 M98 P9000 ;
N50 G51.1 Y50.0 ;
N60 M98 P9000 ;
60 N70 G50.1 X0 ;
50 (Cancel only X–axis)
N80 M98 P9000 ;
N90 G50.1 Y0 ;
Sub program
O9000 ;
G00 G90 X60.0 Y60.0 ;
G01 X100.0 Y60.0 F100 ;
G01 X100.0 Y100.0 ;
G01 X60.0 Y60.0 ;
0 50 60 100 X M99
13.8 The index table on the machining center is indexed by setting up the axis
of indexing (arbitrary 1 axis).
INDEX TABLE To command for indexing, an indexing angle is only to be specified
INDEXING following a programmed axis (arbitrary 1 axis of X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V,
W) assigned for indexing. It is not necessary to command the exclusive
M code in order to clamp or unclamp the table and therefore programming
will become easy.
113
13.9 The repeat cutting can be made by the rotation or translation of a figure
commanded with a sub program.
FIGURE COPYING The plane for figure copying is selected by the plane selection commands
(G72.1, G72.2) of G17, G18, and G19.
1) Rotation Copy
The repeat cutting can be made by the rotation of a figure commanded
with a sub program using the following commands :
Format
G17 G72.1 P_ L_ Xp_ Yp_ R_ ; Xp–Yp plane
G18 G72.1 P_ L_ Zp_ Xp_ R_ ; Zp–Xp plane
G19 G72.1 P_ L_ Yp_ Zp_ R_ ; Yp–Zp plane
P : Sub program number

L : Number of repetitions
Xp : Xp axis center coordinate of rotation
(Xp : X axis or the axis which is parallel to X axis)
Yp : Yp axis center coordinate of rotation
(Yp : Y axis or the axis which is parallel to Y axis)
Zp : Zp axis center coordinate of rotation
(Zp : Z axis or the axis which is parallel to Z axis)
R : Rotation angle (+ = Counterclockwise direction)
2) Translation Copy
The repeat cutting can be made by the translation of a figure
commanded with a sub program using the following commands :
Select the plane of translation copy with the plane selection commands
G17, G18, and G19.
Format
G17 G72.2 P_ L_ I_ J_ ; Xp–Yp plane
G18 G72.2 P_ L_ K_ I_ ; Zp–Xp plane
G19 G72.2 P_ L_ J_ K_ ; Yp–Zp plane
P : Sub program number

L : Number of repetitions
I : Shift amount in Xp direction
J : Shift amount in Yp direction
K : Shift amount in Zp direction
The rotation copy cannot be commanded in the subprogram which

commanded a rotation copy. Similarly, the translation copy cannot be
further commanded in a subprogram which commanded a translation
copy.
However, the translation copy and rotation copy can be commanded in the
subprograms which commanded the rotation copy and translation copy,
respectively.
114
(Program example of rotation copy)
R10
P4 P3
Start point
P5 P2 P0
120° P1
P5
X
R30
Main program Sub program
O1000 ; O2000 G03 X_ Y_ R30.0 ; (P2)

N10 G92 X40.0 Y50.0 ; N100 G01 X_ Y_ ; (P3)
N20 G00 G90 X_ Y_ ; (P0) N200 G03 X_ Y_ R10.0 ; (P4)
N30 G01 G17 G41 X_ Y_ D01 F10 ; (P1) N300 G01 X_ Y_ ; (P5)
N40 G72.1 P2000 L3 X0 Y0 R120.0 ; N400 G03 X_ Y_ R30.0 ; (P6)
N50 G40 G01 X_ Y_ I_ J_ ; (P0) N500 M99 ;
N60 G00 X40.0 Y50.0 ;
N70 M30 ;
(Program example of translation copy)
P4 P5
Start P1 P2 P3 P6
P7
point P8 X
P0
70 70 70
Main program Sub program
O100 ; O2000 G90 G01 X_ ; (P3)

N10 G92 X–20.0 Y0 ; N100 Y_ ; (P4)
N20 G00 G90 X0 Y0; N200 G02 X_ I_ ; (P5)
N30 G01 G17 G41 X_ Y_ D01 F10 ; (P0) N300 G01 Y_ ; (P6)
N40 Y_ ; (P1) N400 X_ ; (P7)
N50 X_ ; (P2) N500 M99 ;
N60 G72.2 P2000 L3 170.0 J0 ;
N70 X_ Y_ ; (P8)
N80 X0 ;
N90 G00 G40 X–20.0 Y0 ;
N100 M30 ;
115
13.10 During circle cutting, the tool moves from the center of a circle and cuts
a workpiece along the circle as shown in Fig. 13.10. The tool first moves
CIRCLE CUTTING in a 45° direction, and then moves along an arc of a circle having half the
FUNCTION radius of the target circle. The tool then comes into contact with the
workpiece and starts cutting. The tool can cut the workpiece without
leaving any marks on it.
A single block of G code can specify the series of movements described
above. During circle cutting, cutter compensation can be performed.
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Y
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ (4)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ (2)
(1)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ 45°
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ X
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ (6) (5)
(3)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Fig. 13.10
116
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONS
14 COMPENSATION FUNCTIONS
117
14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
14.1 By setting the difference between tool length assumed when

programming and the actual tool length as offsets, workpieces can be
TOOL LENGTH machined according to the size commanded by the program, without
COMPENSATION changing the program.
(G43, G44, G49)
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
Standard
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ
tool
Difference set as offset value
Fig. 14.1
1) Tool length compensation and its cancellation (G43, G44, G49)

G43 : Tool length compensation +
G44 : Tool length compensation –
G49 : Tool length compensation cancel
In G43 mode, the tool is offset to the + direction for the preset tool
length offset amount. In G44 mode, it is offset to the - direction for
the preset tool length offset amount. G49 cancels tool length
compensation.
2) Tool length compensation axis
Whether to perform tool length compensation always on the Z axis or
on axis commanded in the G43, G44 block is selected by parameters.
Movement command of only a single axis can be done when
commanding tool length compensation axis in the G43, G44 block.
An alarm arises if multiple axes are commanded. When movement
command is omitted, tool length compensation is done on the Z axis.
Tool length compensation can be performed on another axis (during
tool length compensation on an axis). G49 cancels tool length
compensation on all axes.
Format
G43
α_ _ H_ _ ;
G44
where
α : One of X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C (optional axis address)
3) Assignment of offset amount (H code)

The offset amount can be set in the tool length compensation memory.
By setting a 3–digit number after address H as offset number, offset
amount loaded in corresponding tool length compensation memory is
used as tool length compensation amount.
118
14.2 The programmed tool movement can be expanded or reduced for offset
amount preset in the tool length compensation memory, by using this
TOOL OFFSET function.
(G45, G46, G47, G48) 1) G45, G46, G47, G48
G45: Tool offset expansion
G46: Tool offset reduction
G47: Tool offset double expansion
G48: Tool offset double reduction
By commanding G45 – G48, expansion, reduction, double expansion,
double reduction to axis move commanded in the program can be
performed for the offset amount preset in the tool length compensation
memory. The same offset amount is applied to all move command axes
in the same block as G45 – G48.
2) Assignment of offset amount (D code)
The offset amount can be set in the tool length compensation memory.
By commanding an offset number with a 3–digit number after address
D, offset amount corresponding to the number in the tool length
compensation memory is used as tool offset amount.
CAUTION
It is also possible to assign the offset amount in H code, for
common use with other NCs.
Table 14.2
G45 G46
Increase by set value Decrease by set value
Start End Start End

point point point point
12.34 3.67 8.67 3.67
16.01 12.34
G47 G48
Double increase of set value Double decrease of set value
Start End Start End

point point point point
12.34 7.34 5.00 7.34
19.68 12.34
Move command +12.34, offset value +3.67
119
14.3
CUTTER
COMPENSATION
14.3.1 With cutter compensation B, inside of the sharp angle cannot be cut. If
Cutter Compensation B commanded, an alarm arises. In this case, an arc larger that the cutter
radius can be commanded to the corner by programming. Other functions
(G40 – 42) are same as cutter radius compensation C.
14.3.2 With this function, the programmed tool path can be offset when actually
Cutter Compensation C machining, for value of the tool radius set in the NC.
By measuring cutting radius for actual cutting, and setting the value in the
(G40 – G42) NC as offset value, the tool can machine the programmed pattern, via the
offset path. There is no need to change the program even when tool radius
changes; just change the offset value.
Programmed path
Tool center path
Cross point
Fig. 14.3.2 (a)
Cross points of line and line, arc and arc, line and arc is automatically
calculated in the NC to obtain offset actual tool path. So, programming
becomes simple, because it is only necessary to program the machining
pattern.
1) Cutter compensation and its cancellation (G40, G41, G42)
G40 : Cutter radius compensation cancel
G41 : Cutter radius compensation left
G42 : Cutter radius compensation right
G41 and G42 are commands for cutter radius compensation mode.
The cutter is offset to the left forward in the cutter movement in G42
and right forward in G42. Cutter radius compensation is cancelled
with G40.
The offset amount can be set in the cutter radius compensation
memory. When a 3–digit number after address D is commanded as
offset number, corresponding offset amount in the tool compensation
memory is applied as the offset amount for cutter radius
compensation.
120
3) Plane selection (G17, G18, G19)

Cutter radius compensation is done on XY, ZX, YZ planes and on
parallel axes of X, Y, Z axes.
Plane to perform cutter radius compensation is selected with G17,
G18, G19.
G17 : Xp-Yp plane
G18 : Zp-Xp plane
G19 : Yp-Zp plane
where
Xp : X axis or its parallel axis
Parameters are used to set which parallel axis of the X, Y, Z axes is to
be the additional axis.
Plane to perform cutter radius compensation is decided in the axis
address commanded in the G17, G18, or G19 block.
Example)
(U, V, W axes are parallel axes of X, Y, Z axes respectively)
G17 X_ ; XY plane
G17 U_ V_ ; UV plane
G19 Y_ W_ ; YW plane
If axis address of Xp, Yp, or Zp was omitted, compensation plane is
decided regarding that X, Y, or Z was omitted.
4) Interference check
Tool overcutting is called ‘interference’. This function checks
whether interference occurs, if cutter radius compensation is
performed.
Tool center path nose
Programmed path
Overcutting Overcutting
Fig. 14.3.2 (b)
121
14.4 With this function, tool can be offset to the 3–dimensional direction for
the offset amount set in the tool compensation memory, when machining
3–DIMENSIONAL a 3–dimensional sculptured surface.
TOOL
COMPENSATION
(G40, G41)
Fig. 14.4
1) 3–dimensional tool compensation and its cancellation (G40, G41)

G40: 3–dimensional tool compensation cancel
G41: 3–dimensional tool compensation
G41 is for commanding 3–dimensional tool compensation mode, and
G40 for its cancellation.
Whether the tool compensation is 3–dimensional or not is
distinguished in the block which G41 was commanded (I, J, K must
all be commanded in the block). If all I, J, K are commanded in the
G41 block, it is regarded as 3–dimensional tool compensation.
Format
G41 Xp_ _ Yp_ _ Zp_ _ I_ _ J_ _ K_ _ D_ _ ;
where
I_ _ J_ _ K_ _ : Specifies offset direction
D_ _ : Specifies offset amount
2) 3–dimensional tool compensation space

3–dimensional tool compensation is not only possible in the XYZ
space, but also in additional axes parallel to X, Y, Z axes.
Space to perform 3–dimensional tool compensation is decided by the
axis address commanded in the G41 block.
Example) U, V, X, axes are parallel to X, Y, Z axes respectively.
G41 X_ _ I_ _ J_ _ K_ _ ; XYZ space
G41 U_ _ V_ _ W_ _ I_ _ J_ _ K_ _ ; UVW space
G41 W_ _ I_ _ J_ _ K_ _ ; XYW space
When axis address in Xp, Yp, or Zp axis was omitted, the
compensation space is decided regarding that the X, Y, or Z was
omitted.
The offset amount can be set in the tool compensation memory.
When a 3–digit number after address D is commanded as offset
number, corresponding offset amount in the tool compensation
memory is applied as the 3–dimensional tool compensation amount.
122
4) 3–dimensional tool compensation vector

Under the 3–dimensional tool compensation mode, a compensation
vector is produced to the direction command by I, J, K at the end of
each block to offset the tool by the compensation vector.
The compensation vector can be obtained by two methods, type A and
type B, which can be selected by parameters.
Compensation vector (type A) Compensation vector (type B)
VXp = r i/p VXp = r i/p
VYp = r j/p VYp = r j/p
VZp = r k/p VZp = r (1–k/p)
where
VXp : Compensation vector factor of X axis or its parallel axis
direction
VYp : Compensation vector factor of Y axis or its parallel axis
direction
VZp : Compensation vector factor of Z axis or its parallel axis
direction
r: Tool compensation amount selected by D code
i, j, k : Numeral commanded by I, J, K
p: Select by parameter whether to take SQRT (i2+j2+k2) or
constant preset by parameter.
If all I, J, K are not commanded, the same compensation vector as the
precious block is produced at the end of the block.
123
14.5 Cutter compensation value, tool length compensation value and tool pot
number can be set corresponding to the tool number (T code). When a tool
TOOL OFFSET BY number is specified, a pot number corresponding to the tool number is
TOOL NUMBER output to the PMC as a T code. When a cutter compensation or a tool
length compensation is specified, compensation is effected with the cutter
compensation value or tool length compensation value being set
corresponding to the tool number.
1) Setting tool data
The tool data can be set by MDI or by program.
Format of program
a) When registering the tool data after clearing the tool data currently
registered.
G10 L70 ;
T_ _ P_ _ R_ _ K_ _ ;
T_ _ P_ _ R_ _ K_ _ ;
_____
T_ _ P_ _ R_ _ K_ _ ;
G11 ;
G10 L70: Start of registration after clearing the tool data

registered up to now
T : Tool number (0 – 99999999)
P : Pot number (0 – 9999)
R : Cutter compensation value
K : Tool length compensation value
G11 : End of registration
b) When additionally registering the tool data after the tool data
currently registered.
G10 L71 ;
T_ _ P_ _ R_ _ K_ _ ;
T_ _ P_ _ R_ _ K_ _ ;
_____
T_ _ P_ _ R_ _ K_ _ ;
G11 ;
124
2) Displaying tool data

The tool data can be displayed on the CRT.
TOOL DATA O0000 N00000

E:001 S:002
NO. T_CODE POT# LENGTH RADIUS
001 1111 0010 10.000 20.000
002 3333 0020 11.000 21.000
003 5468 0021 12.000 22.000
004 5555 0033 13.000 23.000
005 3654 0051 14.000 24.000
006 2541 0014 15.000 25.000
007 6541 0024 16.000 26.000
008 1403 0015 17.000 27.000
009 7171 0061 18.000 28.000
010 6565 0034 19.000 29.000
(MM)
MDI *** STOP **** *** *** 10:19:28 LSK

POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG_CHK CHAPTER+
Fig. 14.5
3) Punching out tool data

The tool data being set can be punched out.
4) Outputting pot number
When a tool number is specified, the pot number corresponding to the
tool number is output to the PMC as a T code.
5) Compensation value
When an M code for tool change (parameter setting) is specified, the
offset value corresponding to the tool number being specified so far
becomes effective.
NOTE
1 Part program length shortens by 14m.
2 Tool length cannot be measured by tool length/work zero
point measured function B.
125
14.6 There are three tool compensation memories, A, B, and C. One of the
memories is selected according to the nature of the compensation.
TOOL
COMPENSATION The tool compensation amount can be set in the following range.
MEMORY The valid range of tool compensation amount can be selected using ORG
and OFN of parameter 6002, OUF of parameter 6004, and ONM of
parameter 6007.
Geometric Geometric Wear compensation Wear compensation
compensation compensation
ONM OUF OFN ORG
input in mm input in mm input in inches input in inches
0 0 0 1 999.99 mm 99.999 inch 99.99 mm 9.999 inch

(9999.99) (99.999) (999.99) (99.999)
0 0 0 0 999.999 mm 99.9999 inch 99.999 mm 9.9999 inch

(9999.999) (999.9999) (999.999) (99.9999)
0 0 1 0 999.9999 mm 99.99999 inch 99.9999 mm 9.99999 inch

(999.9999) (999.99999) (999.9999) (99.99999)
0 1 0 0 99.99999 mm 9.999999 inch 9.99999 mm 0.999999 inch

(99.99999) (999.999999) (999.99999) (99.999999)
1 0 0 0 9.999999 mm 0.9999999 inch 0.999999 mm 0.0999999 inch

(999.999999) (99.9999999) (999.999999) (9.9999999)
(The value enclosed in parentheses are used when the extended option for
the tool compensation amount is added.)
14.6.1 There is no difference between geometry compensation memory and tool

Tool Compensation wear compensation memory in this tool compensation memory A.
Therefore, amount of geometry offset and tool wear offset together is set
Memory A as the offset memory. There is also no differences between cutter radius
compensation (D code) and tool length compensation (H code).
Table 14.6.1 Example of setting
Offset number Compensation D code/H code common

(geometry+wear)
001 10.1 For D code

002 20.2 For D code
003 100.1 For H code
126
14.6.2 Memory for geometry compensation and tool wear compensation is

Tool Compensation prepared separately in tool compensation memory B. Geometry
compensation and tool wear compensation can thus be set separately.
Memory B There is no difference between cutter radius compensation (D code) and
tool length compensation (H code).
Reference point
OFSG OFSG : Geometric compensation

OFSW : Wear compensation
OFSW
Fig. 14.6.2
Table14.6.2 Example of setting
Offset number Geometry Wear D code/H code

compensation compensation common
001 10.0 0.1 For D code

002 20.0 0.2 For D code
003 100.0 0.1 For H code
14.6.3 Memory for geometry compensation as well as tool wear compensation

Tool Compensation is prepared separately in tool compensation memory C. Geometry
compensation and tool wear compensation can thus be set separately.
Memory C Separate memories are prepared for cutter radius compensation (for D
code) and for tool length compensation (for H code).
Table 14.6.3 Example of setting
For D code For H code

Offset
number Geometry Wear Geometry Wear
compensation compensation compensation compensation
001 10.0 0.1 100.0 0.1

002 20.0 0.2 300.0 0.3
127
14.7 1) 32 tool offsets

Offset numbers (D code/H code) 0 - 32 can be used.
NUMBER OF TOOL D00 - D32, or H00 - H32
OFFSETS 2) 99 tool offsets
D00 - D99, or H00 - H99
3) 200 tool offsets
D00 - D200, or H00 - H200
4) 499 tool offsets
D00 - D499, or H00 - H499
5) 999 tool offsets
D00 - D999 or H00 - H999
14.8 Tool offset amount can be set/changed with the G10 command.
When G10 is commanded in absolute input (G90), the commanded offset
CHANGING OF TOOL amount becomes the new tool offset amount. When G10 is commanded
OFFSET AMOUNT in incremental input (G91), the current tool offset amount plus the
(PROGRAMMABLE commanded offset amount is the new tool offset amount.
DATA INPUT) (G10)
Format
Tool compensation memory A
G10 L11 P_ R_ ;
where
P_ : Offset number
R_ : Tool offset amount
Tool compensation memory B

Setting/changing of geometry offset amount
G10 L10 P_ R_ ;
Setting/changing of tool wear offset amount
G10 L11 P_ R_ ;
Tool compensation memory C
Setting/changing of geometry offset amount for H code
G10 L10 P_ R_ ;
Setting/changing of geometry offset amount for D code
G10 L12 P_ R_ ;
Setting/changing of tool wear offset amount for H code
G10 L11 P_ R_ ;
Setting/changing of tool ware offset amount for D code
G10 L13 P_ R_ ;
NOTE
L1 may be used instead of L11 for the compatibility with the
conventional NC’s format.
128
14.9 The workpiece coordinate system is set after the position of a workpiece
placed on a rotary table is measured. In a conventional system, however,
ROTARY TABLE if the rotary table rotates before cutting is started, the position of the
DYNAMIC FIXTURE workpiece must be measured again and the workpiece coordinate system
OFFSET must be reset accordingly.
The rotary table dynamic fixture offset function saves the operator the
trouble of re–setting the workpiece coordinate system when the rotary
table rotates before cutting is started. With this function the operator
simply sets the position of a workpiece placed at a certain position on the
rotary table as a reference fixture offset. If the rotary table rotates, the
system automatically obtains a current fixture offset from the angular
displacement of the rotary table and creates a suitable workpiece
coordinate system. After the reference fixture offset is set, the workpiece
coordinate system is prepared dynamically, wherever the rotary table is
located.
The zero point of the workpiece coordinate system is obtained by adding
the fixture offset to the offset from the workpiece reference position.
129
14.10 The three–dimensional cutter compensation function is used with

machines that can control the direction of tool axis movement by using
THREE– rotation axes (such as the B– and C–axes). This function performs cutter
DIMENSIONAL compensation by calculating a tool vector from the positions of the
CUTTER rotation axes, then calculating a compensation vector in a plane
(compensation plane) that is perpendicular to the tool vector. This
COMPENSATION
function is also applicable to machines with inclined rotary heads.
There are two types of cutter compensation: Tool side compensation and
leading edge compensation. Which is used depends on the type of
machining.
Example) Tool side compensation
Cutter surface path
Tool vector
Programmed
Cutter compensation vector tool path
Tool center path

(after compensation)
Z
Cutter Compensation
Compensation compensation plane
amount Y X
plane
Leading edge compensation is performed when a workpiece is machined

by the edge of the tool. In leading edge compensation, the tool is shifted
automatically by the distance of the tool radius along the line where the
plane formed by the tool vector and the movement direction and a plane
perpendicular to the tool axis direction intersect.
Example) Leading edge compensation
Tool used Tool vector
Cutter compensation
Reference vector
tool
Tool center path
(after compensation)
Programmed
tool path
Cutter compensation
vector Cutter compensation
amount
130
14.11 In a five–axis machine tool having three basic axes and two rotation axes
for turning the tool, tool length compensation can be applied in the
DESIGNATION direction of the tool axis.
DIRECTION TOOL The tool axis direction is specified with I, J, and K; a move command for
LENGTH the rotation axes is not specified directly. When I, J, and K are specified
in designation direction tool length compensation mode, the following
COMPENSATION
opetation is performed automatically:
1. The basic three axes operate so that tool length compensation is
applied using the offset specified by the D code in the direction
specified by I, J, and K. (Compensation is applied in the same way as
for the three–dimensional tool compensation function).
2. The two rotation axes operate so that the tool axis is oriented in the
direction specified by I, J, and K. (This specifications manual explains
this operation.)
Machine configuration example
Rotation center
A and C axes or B and C axes
(the tool axis corresponds Tool
to the Z–axis.)
K
A&C, B&C
Z Workpiece
J Tool axis direction
I
C
B
Y
A X
131
15. ACCURACY COMPENSATION
FUNCTION NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
15 ACCURACY COMPENSATION FUNCTION
132
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS FUNCTION
15.1 The errors caused by machine position, as pitch error of the feed screw,
can be compensated. This function is for better machining precision.
STORED PITCH As the offset data are stored in the memory as parameters, compensations
ERROR of dogs and settings can be omitted. Offset intervals are set constant by
COMPENSATION parameters (for each axis).
Total offset points are:
Total offset points = 128 × controlled axes.
Optional distribution to each axis can be done by parameter setting. At
each position:
Compensation pulse = (-7 to +7) (magnification)
Where
Compensation pulse unit : same as detection unit
Magnification : 0 – 100 times, set by parameter
(for each axis)
15.2 The stored pitch error compensation function output all the compensation
pulses at each compensation point. The amount of output compensation
INTERPOLATION pulses at each point covers the interval specified with a parameter. The
TYPE PITCH ERROR interpolation type pitch error compensation function, however, outputs
COMPENSATION the compensation pulses evenly spaced between compensation points.
133
15.3 When the rotary table is rotated using gears, pitch error can occur at two
different intervals: one coinciding with the rotation of the rotary table and
THE SECOND the other coinciding with the rotation of the gears that are rotating the
CYLINDRICAL PITCH table. To correct the pitch error occurring in this type of device,
ERROR compensation is performed for both the table and the gears. This
compensation method is know as the second cylindrical pitch error
COMPENSATION
compensation.
METHOD
When a single gear is mounted between the rotary table and the servo
motor, as in Fig. 15.3 (a), pitch error compensation for wheel A is
performed in the conventional manner, and compensation for wheel B is
performed using the second cylindrical pitch error compensation method.
When multiple gears are mounted, as in Fig. 15.3 (b), compensation for
pitch error caused by wheel A is performed in the conventional manner,
and the second cylindrical pitch error compensation method is used to
correct cyclic pitch errors occurring during the wheel A compensation
interval.
Rotary table
Motor
Wheel A Wheel B
Fig. 15.3 (a) Application of second cylindrical pitch error compensation

when a single gear in mounted
Rotary table
Wheel A
Motor
Fig. 15.3 (b) Application of second cylindrical pitch error compensation

when multiple gears are mounted
134
Though the text in this manual cites the case where a rotary table is used,
the second cylindrical pitch error compensation method can also be
applied to error compensation for a gear–operated linear axis.
Fig. 15.3 (c) shows an example of such a linear axis. In this example, error
compensation for the ball screw is performed in the conventional manner,
and compensation for wheel A is performed using the second cylindrical
pitch error compensation method.
Table
Ball screw
Wheel A
Motor
Fig. 15.3 (c) Application of second cylindrical pitch error compensation

for a linear axis
15.4 Error caused by machine position, as pitch error of the feed screw, can be
compensated by making an approximate value of three lines. The stored
INCLINATION pitch error compensation is used over sections where inclination
COMPENSATION compensation is not enough.
A smooth and high–precision compensation can be done with the
inclination compensation. This compensation is also useful in decreasing
setting points in the stored pitch error compensation data, so setting in
stored pitch error compensation becomes easier. The three lines for
inclination compensation can be set by parameters (for each axis).
Compensation
value
B
D
A
C
Compensation data is approximated by lines
AB, BC and CD.
All that is necessary is to set A, B, C and D.
135
15.5 To compensate straightness of the machine, other axes can be

compensated according to the move of a certain axis. For example, the
STRAIGHTNESS Z axis can be compensated according to the move of the X axis.
COMPENSATION
Machine position
of Y axis
Machine position of X axis

Compensation the Y axis
according to the machine
position of X axis
15.6 This function is used to compensate lost motions proper to the machine
system. Offset amounts come in a range of 0 to "9999 pulses per axis,
BACKLASH and is set as parameter in detection units.
COMPENSATION
15.7 Parameters and pitch errors data can be set by tape commands. Therefore,
following uses can be done for example.
PROGRAMMABLE
1) Parameter setting such as pitch errors compensation data, etc. when
PARAMETER ENTRY the attachment is replaced.
(G10, G11) 2) Parameters such as max. cutting speed and cutting feed time constant
can be changed according to the machining conditions.
This function can be applied for various purposes.
COMMAND FORMAT
G10 L50 ;
N_ _ R_ _ ;
N_ _ P_ _ R_ _ ;
L
N_ _ R_ _ ;
G11 ;
where
G10 L50 ; Parameter input mode
G11 ; Parameter input mode cancel
N_ _ ; Parameter No. (or pitch errors data No. plus 10000)
P_ _ ; Axis NO. (in the case of axis type parameter)
R_ _ ; Parameter setting value (or pitch errors data)
NOTE
Some parameters cannot be set.
136
15.8 The conventional straightness compensation function compensates for

the non–straightness of a machine by outputting the entire compensation
INTERPOLATION–TYPE amount for the interval of a pitch error compensation point, specified in
STRAIGHTNESS a parameter, at one time. Unlike the conventional function, the
COMPENSATION interpolation–type straightness compensation function distributes the
amount of compensation equally throughout the interval of a pitch error
compensation point and outputs it as compensation pulses.
Compensation data can be set for 128 points and can range between –7
and +7.
15.9 The conventional straightness compensation function compensates for

the non–straightness of a machine by specifying compensation data for
STRAIGHTNESS four arbitrary points, using a parameter, and by obtaining compensation
COMPENSATION AT data for up to 128 points along an approximate line connecting those four
128–POINT points. Unlike the conventional function, the 128–point straightness
compensation function enables the specification of compensation data for
up to 128 equally spaced points, in much the same way as the usual pitch
error compensation function. By means of this method, the straightness
compensation function assures precise compensation. In addition, this
method supports up to five combinations of move and compensation axes
for the straightness compensation function.
15.10 This function enables the setting of a pitch error compensation amount for
each of the positive and negative movement directions and compensates
BI–DIRECTIONAL for pitch errors in each direction. When the direction of axis movement
PITCH ERROR is inverted, the required amount of compensation is automatically
COMPENSATION calculated from the pitch error compensation data and used to perform
compensation similar to the conventional backlash compensation. This
FUNCTION
method can further reduce any difference between a route in the positive
direction and a route in the negative direction.
137
16. COORDINATE SYSTEM
CONVERSION NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
16 COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVERSION
138
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS CONVERSION
16.1 The actual machine axes, x, y, and z that correspond to the axis addresses,
X, Y, and Z specified in program command can be switched one another.
AXIS SWITCHING Switching is made in six type by CRT/MDI setting or the external axis
switching signal.
Table 16.1
Programmed axis–addresses
X Y Z
Machine axes correspond with x y z

rogrammed axes X,
programmed X Y and Z
x z y
y x z
y z x
z x y
z y x
Axis switching can not be made at manual operation and reference point
return (G28, G29 and G30).
139
16.2 Scaling can be commanded to figures commanded in the machining

programs.
SCALING (G50, G51) G51 _ _ P_ _ ;
where
: Combination of addresses of axes
P : Magnification
By this command, scaling of the magnification specified by P is
commanded with the point commanded by I, J, K as its center. G50
cancels to scaling mode.
G50 : Scaling mode cancel
G51 : Scaling mode command
Commandable magnification is as follows :
0.00001 to 9.99999 times or 0.001 to 999.999 (whether to use
magnification 0.00001 or 0.001 is according to parameter selection)
Y P3
P4
P4’ P3’ P1 to P4 : Pattern of machining program
P1’ to P4’ : Pattern after scaling
P1’ P2’ P0 : Center of scaling
P1 P2
X
Fig. 16.2
If P was not commanded, the magnification set by the CRT/MDI is

applied. A different scaling magnification can be set for each axis. Which
of a different scaling magnification for each axis or the same
magnification for all the axes can be selected by setting data. The scaling
magnification can be set from the CRT/MDI but it cannot be set by a
program command. Note that correct circular interpolation cannot be
done between axes of different scaling magnifications.
When I, J, K are omitted, the point where G51 was commanded becomes
the center of scaling.
Scaling cannot be done to offset amounts such as tool length
compensation, cutter radius compensation, or tool offset.
140
16.3 Parameters commanded by the program can be rotated. For example, by

using this function, when the attached workpiece comes in a position
COORDINATE which is somewhat rotated from the machine coordinates, a rotation can
SYSTEM ROTATION be performed to compensate the position.
(G68, G69)
Y
Rotation angle
Rotation center
Fig. 16.3
Format
Command format
G17
G18 G68 α_ _ β_ _ R_ _ :
G19
α, β : Specify two axes from X, Y, Z axes of plane G17, G18, G19.

(G90/91 modes are recommended)
R : Rotation (+ for the counter clockwise direction. Commanded in
absolute value.)
By this command, commands thereafter are rotated in the angle

commanded by R, with the point commanded by α, β as the rotation
center. Rotation angle is commanded in 0.00001° units in a range of :
0 x R x 360.00000
The rotation plane is the plane selected (G17, G18, G19) when G68 was
commanded.
G17, G18 and G19 may not be commanded in the same block as G68.
When a, β is omitted, the point where G68 was commanded becomes the
rotation center.
G69; Cancels the coordinate system rotation.
141
16.4 The coordinate system can be rotated about an axis by specifying the
center of rotation, direction of the axis of rotation, and angular
THREE–DIMENSIONAL displacement. This coordinate conversion function is quite useful for
COORDINATE three–dimensional machining using a diesinking machine. By applying
CONVERSION three–dimensional coordinate conversion to a program generated for
machining on the XY plane, identical machining can be executed on a
desired plane.
Y
Three–dimensional coordinate conversion
X
y
z
G68 selects the three–dimensional coordinate conversion mode and G69

cancels it.
N1 G68 X x1 Y y1 Z z1 I i1 J j1 K k1 Rα ;
N2 G68 X x2 Y y2 Z z2 I i2 J j2 K k2 Rβ ;
X,Y,Z : Center of rotation (absolute)
I,J,K : Direction of the axis of rotation
R : Angular displacement
The center, axis, and angle of the first rotation are specified in the N1
block. The N1 block produces a new coordinate system, X’, Y’, Z’.
Viewed from the original workpiece coordinate system, the new
coordinate system is created by shifting the origin of the original
coordinate system by (X1, Y1, Z1) and rotating the original coordinate
system about vector (i1, j1, k1) by an angle α . In the N2 block, the center,
axis, and angle of the second rotation are specified. The X, Y, Z, I, J, K,
and R values specified in the N2 block indicate the values and angle on
the coordinate system produced after coordinate conversion of the N1
block. The N2 block produces coordinate system X”, Y”, Z”. Viewed
from X’ Y’ Z’, new coordinate system X”, Y”,Z” is created by shifting
the center of X’, Y’, Z’ by (X2, Y2, Z2) and rotating X’, Y’, Z’ about
vector (i2, j2, k2) by an angle β . The X, Y, and Z values specified in the
N3 block are coordinates on X”, Y”, Z”. X’’, Y’’, Z’’ is called the program
coordinate system.
142
If the X, Y, and Z values are not specified in the N2 block, the X, Y, and
Z values specified in the N1 block are used as the center of the second
rotation. This means that the N1 and N2 blocks have a common center
of rotation. When only one rotation is required, the N2 block need not be
specified. In the G68 block, specify X, Y, and Z using absolute values.
Angular displacement R is positive when the coordinate system is rotated
clockwise like a right–hand screw advancing in the direction of the axis
of rotation. Bit RTR of parameter No. 6400 determines the unit of R.
– Bit 4 of parameter No. 6400 can specify that only the G69 command
cancels the three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode (G68).
With such a specification, a system reset, the ERS, ESP, or RRW input
signal from the PMC does not cancel the three-dimensional coordinate
conversion mode (G68).
– In the three- dimensional coordinate conversion mode (G68), making
the M3R input signal from the PMC (address G031.3) high moves the
tool in the direction of an axis selected in the coordinate system
submitted to three-dimensional conversion (program coordinate
system) during manual jog feed, manual incremental feed, or manual
handle feed.
When the M3R signal is low, three- dimensional conversion is not
effective for the above three manual operations even in the three-
dimensional coordinate conversion mode (G68).
Z’
Y Y’
X’
X– Y– Z : Coordinate system before conversion

(Workpiece coordinate system)
X’– Y’– Z’ : Coordinate system after conversion
(Program coordinate system)
Example) When the M3R signal is made high during the

three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode, manual
feed with the Z-axis selected causes a movement in the
Z’-axis direction shown above.
143
– When the current tool position in the workpiece coordinate system is

read using the custom macro system variables #5041 to #5055
(ABSOT), conventionally, the coordinates that are read are those in the
coordinate system that has not be converted by coordinate conversion
even in the three- dimensional coordinate conversion mode (G68).
However, bit 5 of parameter No.6400 can specify that the coordinates
that are read be those in the workpiece coordinate system that has been
converted by three-dimensional coordinate conversion.
X, Y, Z Coordinate system before 3D conversion

x, y, z Coordinate system after 3D conversion
When reading point A using a system variableof
custom macro, the following positions areread:
A (AX, AY, AZ) when parameter 6400#5=1
A ( 0, 0, Az) when parameter 6400#5=0
Z z
Point A
AZ
AY
Y
AX
x
– The 3DROT output signal (address F159.3) informs the PMC that the
system is in the three- dimensional coordinate conversion mode
(G68). The 3DROT output signal is high during the three- dimensional
coordinate conversion mode (G68).
– A status display on the CRT screen indicates that the system is in the
three-dimensional conversion mode (G68).
144
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 17. MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS
17 MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS
145
17. MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
17.1 By commanding axis move after G31, linear interpolation can be

commanded like in G01. If an external skip signal is input during this
SKIP FUNCTION (G31) command, the remainder of this command is cancelled, and program
skips to the next block.
G31 is a one-shot command and is valid for the commanded block only.
Actual movement
With no skip signals
Skip signal was
input here 50.0
100.0
The following two feed speed for the G31 block can be selected by
parameter setting.
1) Feed speed commanded by F
2) Feed speed set by parameter
Coordinate value when skip signal is on, is stored in the system variables
#5061 - #5066 of the customer macro, so this function can also be read
with the customer macro function.
#5061 . . . . X axis coordinate value
#5062 . . . . Y axis coordinate value
#5063 . . . . Z axis coordinate value
#5064 . . . . Fourth axis coordinate value
#5065 . . . . Fifth axis coordinate value
#5066 . . . . Sixth axis coordinate value
As the skip function can be used when move amount is not clear, this
function can be used for:
1) Constant feed in grinding machines
2) Tool measurement with tactile sensor.
146
17.2 In blocks with either G31.1, G31.2, or G31.3 commanded, the coordinate
value where skip signals (3 types) were input is stored in the custom
MULTI–STEP SKIP macro variables, and at the same time, the remaining movement of the
FUNCTION block is skipped. It is also possible to skip the remaining dwell with the
(G31.1 – G31.3) skip signal by parameter, in a block where: G04 is commanded (dwell).
Parameters decide which G code is valid to which of the three skip signals.
The skip signal is not necessarily unique to a single G code; it is also
possible to set a skip signal to multiple G codes.
Example)
In grinding, end point of machining is not commanded in the program,
but is skipped by machining conditions signals from the machine side,
and proceded to the next block.
Machining is done in the following procedure:
1. Feed in feedrate of 10mm/min, till machining condition 1 is
satisfied.
2. Feed in feedrate of 3mm/min, till machining condition 2 is
satisfied.
3. Dwell till machining condition 3 is satisfied.
Machining conditions, skip signals, and G codes in this case
correspond as follows:
Machining condition 1 – Skip signal 1 – G31.1
Machining condition 2 – Skip signal 2 – G31.1, G31.2
Machining condition 3 – Skip signal 3 – G31.1, G31.2, G04
N1 G31.1 X100.0 F10.0 ; (Feed)
N2 G31.2 X100.0 F3.0 ; (Feed)
N3 G04 X100.0 ; (Dwell)
In cases when machining condition 2 is already satisfied, machining
is done actually from the N3 block (dwell).
17.3 Delay and error of skip signal input is 0 – 2 msec at the NC side (not
considering those at the PMC side).
HIGH–SPEED SKIP This high-speed skip signal input function keeps this value to 0.1 msec
SIGNAL INPUT or less, thus allowing high precision measurement. This signal is
connected directly to the NC; not via the PMC.
147
17.4 Move commands can be specified for several axes at one time in a G31
block. If an external skip signal is input during such commands, the
SKIPPING THE command is canceled for all specified axes and the next block is executed.
COMMANDS FOR The position for each specified axis where a skip signal is input is set in
SEVERAL AXES the macro variable for the axis (#5061 to #5066).
Example G31 G90 X100.0 Y100.0 Z100.0 ;
X50.0 Y50.0 Z100.0 ;
Actual movement
Z
When no skip signal is input
(100,100,100)
(50,50,100)
A skip signal is input

at this point.
17.5 By Commanding:
G37Z_ _ ;
AUTOMATIC TOOL The tool starts moving to the measurement position, and keeps on moving
LENGTH till the measuring position reach signal from the measurement device is
MEASUREMENT output. Moving of the tool is stopped when the tool head reaches the
measurement position.
(G37)
Difference between coordinate values when tool has reached the
measurement position and coordinate value commanded by G37 is added
to the tool length compensation amount currently used.
148
17.6 Delay and error of measuring position reach signal input is 0 – 2 msec at
the NC side (not considering those at the PMC side).
HIGH–SPEED This high–speed measuring position reach signal input function keeps
MEASURING this value to 0.1 msec or less, thus allowing high precision measurement.
POSITION REACH This signal is connected directly to the NC; not via the PMC.
SIGNAL INPUT
17.7 Call offset value display screen on the CRT. Relative positions are also
displayed on this screen. Reset the displayed relative position to zero.
TOOL LENGTH Set the tool for measurement at the same fixed point on the machine by
MEASUREMENT hand. The relative position display at this point shows difference between
the reference tool and the tool measured and the relative position display
value is then set as offset amounts.
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
Reference tool
This difference is set
ÇÇ as offset amount
Fig. 17.7
149
17.8 Tool length can be measured only by touching the tool on the outer plane
of workpiece or on the sensor, by a manual feed. The tool length is
TOOL LENGTH/ measured along any axis.
WORKPIECE ZERO The center of reference hole can be made as the zero point of the
POINT workpiece coordinate system by applying a tool or touch probe to three
points of the reference hole freely selected by a manual feed. Workpiece
MEASUREMENT B
zero point of the axes X and Y is the center of the reference hole. Also,
zero point of the workpiece coordinate system can be set by applying them
to the edge of the workpiece instead of the reference hole. Workpiece zero
point of freely selected axis can be measured.
The machining set up is done in short time securely because of an easy
operation.
Example of tool length measurement

Reference
Tool 1 Tool 2 Tool 3
Machine zero tool
point
Reference tool
tip position OFS1 OFS2
OFS3
L Zm1 Zm2
Zm3
Measuring
place
Reference block Hm
Reference
measuring
place Machine table
L: Travel distance of the reference tool from machine zero point to the reference measuring plane (Parameter)
Hm: Distance from the reference measuring plane to the actual measuring plane (Setting)
Zm: Travel distance of the measuring tool from the machine zero point to the measuring plane
Tool length compensation value (OFSi) = Zmi – Hm – L
Example of workpiece zero point measurement

In case of reference hole In case of reference plane
Touch sensor
Y
X, Y Machine
Zero Point
Y axis
shift
value
X
X axis
shift
value
Workpiece zero point
Reference hole X, Y shift value
Fig. 17.8
150
17.9 With this function, an axis moves with a torque limit applied for the feed
motor. A skip operation is performed if the motor reaches the torque limit
TORQUE LIMIT SKIP such as, for example, when the axis runs into the stopper.
G31 P99 α [amount of movement] F [speed]; where α is an axis address
G31 P98 α [amount of movement] F [speed]; where α is an axis address
A cutting feed command like G01 can be realized by issuing a move
command after G31 P99 (or G31 P98) with the motor torque limited (by,
for example, executing a torque limit command in the PMC window). In
this case, however, the move command is effective only for one axis at a
time. When the motor torque reaches the limit, or if a skip signal (or
high–speed skip signal) is received while G31 P99 is being executed, the
rest of the command is skipped, and the next block is executed.
151
18. CUSTOM MACRO NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
18 CUSTOM MACRO
152
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 18. CUSTOM MACRO
18.1 A function covering a group of instructions is stored in the memory like

the sub program. The stored function is represented by one instruction
CUSTOM MACRO and is executed by simply writing the represented instruction. The group
of instructions registered is called the custom macro body, and the
representative instruction, the custom macro instruction.
Ordinary program
Custom macro body
A group of
instructions
Custom macro instruction for a certain
function
The programmer need not remember all the instructions in the custom
macro body. He needs only to remember the representative, custom
macro instruction.
The greatest feature in custom macro is that variables can be used in the
custom macro body. Operation between the variables can be done, and
actual values can be set in the variables by custom macro instructions.
O9011 ;
G65 P9011 A10 I5;

X#1 Z#4 ;
Call custom macro body

9011, and set variables Variables, #1, #4 can be used
#1=10, #4=5. instead of unknown move amount.
r b
a
153
Bolt hole circle as shown above can be programmed easily. Program a

custom macro body of a bolt hole circle; once the custom macro body is
stored, operation can be performed as if the NC itself has a bolt hole circle
function. The programmer need only to remember the following
command, and the bolt hole circle can be called any time.
G65P p R r A a B b K k ;
P: Macro number of the bolt hole circle
r: Radius
a: Initial angle
b: Angle between holes
k: Number of holes
With this function, the NC can be graded up by the user himself. Custom
macro bodies may be offered to the users by the machine tool builder, but
the users still can make custom macro himself.
The following functions can be used for programming the custom macro
body.
1) Use of variables
Variables: #i (i=1, 2, 3,.......)
Quotation of variables: F#33 (#33: speed expressed by variables)
2) Operation between variables
Various operation can be done between variables and constants.
The following operands, and functions can be used:
+ (sum), – (difference), * (product), / (quotient), OR (logical sum),
XOR (exclusive logical sum), AND (logical product), SIN (sine),
COS (cosine), TAN (tangent), ATAN (arc tangent), SQRT (square
roots), ABS (absolute value), BIN (conversion from BCD to binary),
BCD (conversion from binary to BCD), FIX (truncation below
decimal point), FUP (raise fractions below decimal point), ROUND
(round)
Example : #5 = SIN [[#2 + #4] : 3.14 + #4] : ABS (#10)
3) Variable naming
A name with 8 characters or less can be given to variable (#500 to
#519). Confirmation and setting of variables are made easier by
naming variables, as these names are displayed on the CRT screen with
the value of the variable.
154
4) Control command
Program flow in the custom macro body is controlled by the following
command.
i) If [<conditional expression>]GOTO n (n = sequence number)
When <conditional expression> is satisfied, the next execution is
done from block with sequence number n.
When <conditional expression> is not satisfied, the next block is
executed.
When the [<IF conditional expression>] is committed, it executes
from block with n unconditionally.
The following <conditional expressions> are available:
#j EQ #k whether #j = #k
#j NE #k whether #j = #k
#j GT #k whether #j > #k
#j LT #k whether #j < #k
#j GE #k whether #j y #k
#j LE #k whether #j x #k
ii) WHILE (<conditional expression>) DO m (m = 1, 2, 3)
to
END m
While <conditional expression> is satisfied, blocks from DO m to
END m is repeated.
When <conditional expression> is no more satisfied, it is executed
from the block next to
END m block.
Example)
#120 = 1 ;
WHILE [#120 LE 10] DO 1 ;
Repeated 10 times.
#120=#120+1 ;
END 1 ;
5) Format of custom macro body

The format is the same as the sub program.
O Macro number ;
Custom macro body
M99 ;
155
6) Custom macro instruction

i) Simple call
G65 P (macro number) L (times to repeat)<argument assignment>;
A value is set to a variable by <argument assignment>.
Write the actual value after the address.
Example A5.0 E3.2 M13.4
There is a regulation on which address (A to Z) corresponds to
which variable number.
ii) Modal call A
G66 P (macro number) L (times to repeat)<argument assignment>;
Each time a move command is executed, the specified custom
macro body is called. This can be cancelled by G67.
This function is useful when drilling cycles are programmed as
custom macro bodies.
iii) Modal call B
G66.1 P (macro number);
In this macro call mode, command values of each block are all
regarded as arguments, and custom macro commanded by G66.1
is called without any execution. It can be regarded that G65P
(macro number) is commanded at the head of each block.
This status is cancelled by G67.
In modal call B, command value of each block is once sent to the
custom macro as arguments, so execution can be performed after
various decisions and processes in the custom macro.
This function is useful, for example when automatically
controlling the grind in the grinding machine rectangurally to the
forward direction.
iv) Macro call by G codes
The macro can also be called by the parameter-set G codes. Instead
of commanding:
N_ _ G65 P∆∆∆∆ <argument assignment> ;
macro can be called just by commanding:
N_ _ G <argument assignment> ;.
G code for calling the macro, and macro program number **** to
be called, are coupled together and set as parameter.
Maximum ten G codes from G01 to G999 can be used for macro
call (G00 cannot be used).
The G code macro call cannot be used in the macro which was
called by a G code. It also cannot be used in sub programs called
by sub program call with M codes or T codes.
156
v) Custom macro call by M code

Custom macros can be called by pre-determined M codes which are
set by parameters.
The following command
N_ _ G65 P∆∆∆∆ <Argument assignment> ;
is equivalent to the following command:
N_ _ M <Argument assignment> ;
The correspondence between M codes (Mxx) and program number
(∆∆∆∆) of a macro shall be set by a parameter.
Signal MF and M code are not sent out the same as the subprogram
call by M code.
Also when this M code is specified in a program called by a macro
calling G code or a subprogram calling M, S, T or B code, the M
code is regarded as a normal M code.
Up to ten M codes from M01 to M97 can be used for custom macro
calling M codes.
vi) Sub program call by M code
An M code can be set by parameter to call a sub program. Instead
of commanding:
N_ _ G_ _ X_ _ Y_ _ … M98 P∆∆∆∆ ; ,
the same operation can be performed simply by commanding:
N_ _ G_ _ X_ _ Y_ _ … M ;.
As for M98, M codes are not transmitted.
The M code for calling the sub program and the sub program
number ∆∆∆∆ to be called are coupled together and set by
parameter.
Maximum nine M codes from M03 to M97 can be used for macro
call (M30 cannot be used).
Arguments cannot be transmitted. It also cannot be commanded in
the same block as the block with M98 command.
When these M codes are commanded in macro called by G code or
in subprogram called by M code or T code, they are regarded as
ordinary M codes.
vii) Sub program call by T code
By setting parameter, sub program can be called by T codes. When
commanded:
N_ _ G_ _ X_ _ Y_ _ … Tt ; ,
the same operation is done as when commanded:
#149 = t;
N_ _ G_ _ X_ _ Y_ _ … M98 P9000; .
The T code t is stored as arguments of common variable #149.
This command cannot be done in the same block with a sub
program calling M code, or with M98 command.
When T code is commanded in macros called by G code, or in sub
programs called by M codes or T codes, the T code is treated as
ordinary T codes.
157
viii) Sub–program call with S code

An S code can be set by a parameter to call a subprogram.
N_ _ G_ _ X_ _Z_ _ Ss; is equivalent tot the following two blocks.
#147 = s:
N_ _ G_ _ X_ _ Z_ _ M98 P9029;
S code s is stored as an argument in common variables #147.
The S code is not transmitted.
When this S code is specified in a macro called with a G code, or
in a subprogram called with an M, S, T, or a B code, the subprogram
is not called; but this S code is treated as ordinary code.
ix) Subprogram call with 2nd auxiliary function
A specified code dedicated for 2nd auxiliary function can be set by
a parameter to call a subprogram.
N_ _ G_ _ X_ _ Z_ _ Bb; (where B is a 2nd auxiliary function code)
is equivalent to the following two blocks.
#146 = b:
N_ _ G_ _ X_ _ Z_ _ M98 P9028;
B code b is stored as an argument in common variables #146.
2nd auxiliary function code is not transmitted.
When this 2nd function code is specified in a macro called with a
G code, or a 2nd auxiliary function code, the subprogram is not
called; but this 2nd auxiliary function code is treated as ordinary
2nd auxiliary function code.
7) Types of variables
Variables are divided into local variables, common variables, and
system variables, according to their variable numbers. Each type has
different use and nature.
i) Local variables #1 – #33
Local variables are variables used locally in the macro.
Accordingly, in case of multiples calls (calling macro B from
macro A), the local variable used in macro A is never destroyed by
being used in macro B.
ii) Common variables #100 – #149, #500 – #549
Compared with local variables used locally in a macro, common
variables are common throughout the main program, each sub
program called from the main program, and each macro. The
common variable #i used in a certain macro is the same as the
common variable #i used in other macros. Therefore, a common
variable #i calculated in a macro can be used in any other macros.
Common variables #100 to #149 are cleared when power is turned
off, but common variables #500 to #549 are not cleared after power
is turned off.
NOTE
1 It is possible to increase number of common variables. For
details, see “Number of common variables”.
2 It is possible to apply write protection for the common
variables set by the parameter. Writing by the macro
program and setting is prohibited.
158
iii) System variables

A variable with a certain variable number has a certain value. If the
variable number is changed, the certain value is also changed.
The certain value are the following:
a) 128 points DI (for read only)
b) 128 points DO (for output only)
c) Tool offset amount, workpiece zero point offset amount
d) Position information (actual position, skip position, block end
position, etc.)
e) Modal information (F code, G code for each group, etc.)
f) Alarm message (Set alarm number and alarm message, and the
NC is set in an alarm status. The alarm number and message is
displayed on the CRT.)
g) Operator’s message (A message can be displayed on the CRT
screen by setting an operator’s message.)
Kanji, Katakana and Hiragana can be displayed in addition to
usual alphanumeric character and special character as an
operator message or an alarm message made by custom macro.
h) Clock (Time can be known. A time can also be preset.)
i) Single block stop, Miscellaneous function end wait hold
j) Feed hold, Feedrate override, Exact stop inhibition
k) Mirror image status
8) External output commands
Value of variables or characters can be output to external devices via
the reader/puncher interface with custom macro command. Results in
measurement is output using custom macro.
9) Limitations
i) Usable variables
#1 – #33, #100 – #149, #500 – #549, and system variables.
ii) Usable variable values
–1038 to –10–38
10–38 to 1038
iii) Constants usable in <expression>
–99999999 to –0.0000001
0.0000001 to 99999999
iv) Arithmetic precision
8-digit decimal number (in trigonometrical functions, some value
may cause fall in precision).
v) Custom macro body call nesting
Maximum 4 folds.
vi) ( ) nesting
Maximum 5 folds.
vii) Repeated ID numbers
1-3
159
10) Example of custom macro

Pocket machining
Custom macro call command
G65 P9802 X x Y y Z z R r Q q I i J j K k T t D d F f E e ;
x, y : Start point (lower left of the pocket) absolute position of X, Y
axes
z, r : Z point, R point absolute positions (R point must be at the plus
side of the Z point)
q: Cut amount per cycle (a positive number)
i, j : X, Y direction length of the pocket (efficient when both is
positive, and i y j.)
k: Finishing allowance (a positive number)
t: Machining is performed with constant cutting width less than
max. cutting width (cutter diameter t%)
d: Cutter radius compensation number (01 – 99)
f: Feedrate on XY plane
e: Feedrate for cutting. Feedrate up to 1mm above the cutting
surface is 8 x e.
Rapid feed
Feedrate 8xe
Feedrate e
Start point (x, y) p z
160
Custom macro body
O9802;
#27 = #[2000 + #7];
#28 = #6 + #27;
#29 = #5 – 2 * #28;
#30 = 2 * #27 * #20/100;
#31 = FUP [#29/#30]; (Fix up below decimal point)
#32 = #29/#31;
#10 = #24 + #28
#11 = #25 + #28;
#12 = #24 + #4 – #28;
#13 = #26 + #6;
G00X#10 Y#11;
Z#18;
#14 = #18;
DO 1;
#14 = #14 – #17;
IF [#14 GE #13] GOTO 1;
#14 = #13;
N1 G01 Z #14 F#8;
X#12F#9;
#15 = 1;
WHILE [#15LE #31] DO 2;
Y [#11 + #15*#32];
IF [#15 AND 1 EQ 0] GOTO 2;
X#10;
GOTO 3;
N2X#12;
N3#15 = #15 + 1;
END 2;
G00 Z#18;
X#10 Y#11;
IF [#14LE#13] GOTO 4;
G01 Z[#14 + 1] F[8 *#8];
END 1;
N4 M99;
161
18.2 Select common variables from the following:

NUMBER OF 1) Common variables A
Common variables #100 – #149, #500 – #549 can be used.
COMMON #100 – #149 will be cleared when power is turned off, but #500 – #549
VARIABLES will be kept after power off.
2) Common variables B
#100 – #199 will be cleared when power is turned off, but #500 – #599
will be kept after power off.
3) Common variables C
NOTE
Part program storage length will become short by 2.2m.
4) Common variables D
NOTE
Part program storage length will become short by 7.4m.
18.3 The values and names of the common variables (#200 to #999) retained
after the power is disconnected can be output to an output device in
READ/PUNCH custom macro statement form.
FUNCTION FOR As shown in the following example, output is in program format. Variable
CUSTOM MACRO data can be set by executing this program.
COMMON Example) %
VARIABLES ;
#500=25600*65536/16777216; . For a normal value
#501=#0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When the value is empty
#502=0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When the value is 0
#503 =.............;
.............;
SETVN500[ABC,DEF,,,...] ; . . . For variable names
M2;
%
When this custom macro statement program is executed, values and

names are set for the common variables.
As shown in #500 in the above example, the values of variables are
generally expressed as mathematical expressions. Since macro variables
are handled in floating–point form in the control unit, such mathematical
expressions are used to accurately express the values stored internally.
The user need not by concerned with this format.
162
18.4 When custom macro interruption signal is input during automatic

operation, the block currently under execution is interrupted and the
INTERRUPTION TYPE specified custom macro is activated. After execution of this custom
CUSTOM MACRO macro, it returns to the interrupted block and continues execution of the
remaining commands.
⋅
⋅
⋅
M96P_ _ _ ; When custom macro interruption signal is input
between M96 block and M97 block, custom macro
specified by P is activated.
⋅
⋅
⋅
M97;
⋅
⋅
⋅
With this function, custom macro interruption signal can be input on
detection of tool break, tool change cycle can be executed by custom
macro, and machining is continued.
18.5 To protect programs as custom macro developed uniquely by the users,

the following functions are available.
KEY AND PROGRAM
– The registered programs can be locked in.
ENCRYPTION
– The registered programs can be coded and punched.
– The coded and punched tapes (programs) can be registered.
1) Key
For locked programs:
– Part program editing cannot be done to prevent unauthorized
access to knowhow.
– Punching of the program cannot be done.
– Display of the program cannot be done.
– Uncoded programs cannot be registered.
– Program umber search cannot be done.
2) Program Encryption
– The registered programs can be encrypted and punched.
– The coded and punched tapes (programs) can be registered.
By coding the program, contents of the program can be kept secret.
The coded tape can be attached to the NC.
The first program number in the tape will not be coded, but characters
thereafter will be punched in codes. A “%” will be punched at the end
of the tape.
163
19. FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED
CUTTING NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
19 FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED CUTTING
164
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS CUTTING
19.1 The high–speed machining function allows the machining program,

which is to be pre–processed and stored in the memory before the
HIGH SPEED execution, to be called and executed at a high speed.
MACHINING By this function, an interruption of the execution of blocks, in which
(G10.3, G11.3, G65.3) blocks of minute move commands continue like in a three dimensional
machining, is eliminated.
(Registration)
G10.3L1PpQq;
⋅
⋅
⋅
(NC commands)
⋅
⋅
⋅
G11.3
p: High speed machining data number
q: Cluster ID number
(Call)
G65.3PpQq;
19.2 Normally the CNC calculates the next one block while executing a certain
block and transforms it into executable data (execution format).
MULTI–BUFFER This is called buffering. By using the multi–buffer function, it is possible
(G05.1) to increase the number of such buffering blocks up to fifteen.
This prevents stoppage between very small, consecutive blocks.
In other words, if the number of consecutive minute move blocks is 15
or less, the interruption of the execution between these blocks is
eliminated.
Command Format
G05.1; Multi–buffer mode ON
⋅
⋅
⋅
(CNC command)
⋅
⋅
⋅
G05.1P1; Multi–buffer mode OFF
165
19.3 Need of deceleration is automatically judged in order to prevent the large

sag caused by the acceleration/deceleration and the servo delay on the
AUTOMATIC CORNER junction of two blocks in cutting mode (G64). When the difference of
DECELERATION speed component of each axis between two blocks is greater than the
parameter setting value, deceleration is automatically made at the end
point of the block, and move of the following block is started when the
speed gets slower than the parameter setting value.
(Example)
Block B Y
Block A
Speed
X axis Y axis
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
Speed set by parameter
t Time
Fig. 19.3
166
19.4 The machine is accelerated/decelerated automatically when the

movement is started/stopped, so that the machine system should not be
FEEDRATE CLAMP applied with any shock. When programming, therefore, no consideration
BY CIRCULAR needs to be made for acceleration/deceleration.
RADIUS Especially when performing the high-speed arc cutting, however, the
actual tool passage may bring about some error against the designated arc
during circular interpolation due to this automatic acceleration/
deceleration.
This error can approximately be given by the following formula;
Y ∆r
Command path
r Actual path
2
r + 1 (T 1 ) T 2 ) Vr
2 2
. . . . . . . (Formula 1)
2
∆r : Maximum value of radius error (mm)

v : Feedrate (mm/sec)
r : Circular radius (mm)
T1 : Acceleration/deceleration time constant (sec)
T2 : Time constant of servo motor (sec)
When performing the actual machining, the actual arc machining radius
(r) and tolerance (∆r) are given, therefore, the maximum permissible
speed v (mm/min.) can be given by the formula-(1).
“Feedrate clamp by circular radius” is such function that the circular
cutting feed is automatically clamped when the feedrate designated may
exceed the permissible tolerance to radial direction against the circular arc
having optional radius designated by the program.
19.5 The advanced preview control function has been designed for
high–speed, high–precision machining. This function reduces
ADVANCED PREVIEW acceleration/deceleration delay and servo delay, which increase as the
CONTROL FUNCTION feedrate increases. When this function is used, the tool is moved as
specified, and the machining error in circular or corner machining is
reduced.
The advanced preview control function is implemented by the following
functions:
1. Look–ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
(including advance feed–forward)
2. Multibuffer
3. Feedrate clamp by circular radius
4. Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
167
19.6 The high–precision contour control function allows precise high–speed

machining when a free sculptured surface, such as a metal die, is
HIGH–PRECISION machined using linear interpolation. To achieve greater speed and
CONTOUR CONTROL precision, the function calculates and controls the appropriate feedrate
(automatic feedrate control) according to the machining profile.
This function includes the option multibuffer (J986).
To enter the automatic feedrate control mode, specify the following:
G05.1 Q1 ;
The feedrate is automatically controlled in automatic feedrate control
mode by buffering the next 15 blocks (the next 60 blocks when the
optional multi–buffer function for 60 blocks is provided). The feedrate is
determined by the following conditions. If the specified feedrate exceeds
the value determined by the conditions, acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation is performed to reach the determined feedrate.
1) Change in speed on each axis at corners and specified allowable
speed change
2) Expected acceleration on each axis and specified allowable
acceleration
3) Expected variations in cutting load from movement along the
Z–axis
If an appropriate feedrate is determined and acceleration/deceleration is
performed according to these conditions, the impact on the machine and
the machining errors liable to be produced when the direction in which
the tool moves changes substantially are decreased. As a result, precise
high–speed machining is enabled.
The feature of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used for
automatic feedrate control. Since extending the time constant does not
produce a machining error, machining can be done with small impact and
high precision.
A specific time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
is provided for the automatic feedrate control mode. By setting the time
constant for the automatic feedrate control mode to a small value, the
machining error due to acceleration/deceleration delay is reduced.
Specified tool path

Tool path when feedrate control is not used
Tool path when feedrate control is used
Deceleration based on the

difference in speed reduces
inpact on the machine and
machining errors.
Deceleration based on acceleration

reduces inpact on the machine and
machining errors.
168
19.7 To reduce the machine shape error caused by the servo follow–up error
(delay), the position loop gain (Kp) of the servo may be as high as
FEED FORWARD possible. If, however, the position loop gain is too high, the servo system
CONTROL will oscillate.
The feed forward control enables reduction of the servo follow–up error
without increasing the position loop gain.
a⋅S
Position loop cable

+
+ 1 Pascal coder
Command position K S
– +
Position deviation
Feed control unit

and servo motor
Fig. 19.7 Feed forward control
169
19.8 A high–speed distribution can be executed by DNC operation using a

remote buffer for the CNC with sub CPU.
HIGH–SPEED After reading one block of data, the CNC first calculates the block data,
DISTRIBUTION BY generates the distribution pulse for each axis, and transfers it to the servo
DNC OPERATION system to revolve the motor. In general, if the time required for generating
distribution pulses for one block is shorter than the motor revolving time
USING REMOTE
for one block, the pulse distribution intervals will be generated between
BUFFER blocks. That is, to execute the program having a series of minute blocks,
the CNC may stop between blocks because generation of distribution
pulses cannot catch up with the program execution speed. Therefore, the
time for generating distribution pulses of one block (Block processing
time) is one of the important factors to indicate the performance of the
CNC.
The high–speed DNC operation (using the remote buffer in Series 15)
allows the time required for generating distribution pulses for one block
can be greatly reduced.
This function enables generation of the distribution pulses for one block
in a short time, thus enabling execution of the program having a series of
minute blocks at high speed without any stop between these blocks. For
example, the program with a series of 1–mm blocks (for 3 axes
simultaneous linear interpolation) can be executed at 15 m/minute during
DNC operation.
HOST CPU Series 15

RS–422
or RS–232–C Remote buffer
High speed
distribution
preparation circuit
Distribution pluse output
Axis control circuit
170
19.9 A high–speed distribution can be executed by DNC operation using a

remote buffer. Command the “G05;” by the normal NC command format
BINARY DATA INPUT without any other NC commands in the block, and then command the
OPERATION BY move data and auxiliary function using the following format to perform
REMOTE BUFFER the binary input operation function. Set the “0” to both the move distance
of all axes and auxiliary functions to return to the normal NC command
format thereafter.
S Binary input operation On : G05;
S Binary input operation Off : Sets the move distance of all axes
and auxiliary functions to “0”.
CNC
(Series 15)
Remote buffer
((RS232C))
Host computer
or ((RS422))
S Data format for binary input operation (All the data are binary)
byte
High byte
1st axis
Low byte
High byte
Order 2nd axis
of Low byte
data
⋅
⋅
High byte
Nth axis
Low byte
4th byte
Auxiliary
⋅ functions
⋅
1st byte
Check byte
171
The binary input operation data is in the format consisting of the move
distance per unit time for each axis set in order.
The unit time can be selected from the following:
Unit time
2 ms
4 ms
8 ms
16 ms
NOTE
1 The following is required when performing binary input
operation in units of “2 msec”:
S Number of all controlled axes should be 3 or less.
S The system should be provided with the SUB CPU.
2 The following is required when performing binary input
operation in units of “4 msec”:
S Number of all controlled axes should be 6 or less.
172
19.10 The distribution process is used to convert the NC program received from
the host computer to the distribution data at the remote buffer side and to
DISTRIBUTION supply the converted distribution data to the CNC side. Use of this
PROCESS BY function allows the NC program where an extreme short move distance
REMOTE BUFFER continues to be operated at high speed. The distribution process by the
remote buffer is up to 3 axes.
The NC program format is the same as normal NC program. However,
there are two sections, namely the one for performing distribution process
and the one for passing to the CNC.
The section for performing distribution process is hereafter called the
high–speed machining section.
The definition of high–speed machining section is commanded as in the
followings:
Command Meaning
G05 P1; Start of high–speed machining section
G05 P0; End of high–speed machining section
Commands which can be described in high–speed machining section are

shown in the following table. The address not listed in the table is ignored
during distribution process (distribution section) even if it is specified.
Command address Meaning
G00 Interruption of distribution process (Note 1)
G01 Distribution process restart
First axis address Move distance of first axis
Second axis address Move distance of second axis
: :
n–th axis address Move distance of n–th axis (nx3)

(nx3)
F Cutting feedrate (Note 2)
NOTE
1 If the G00 is commanded even in the high–speed machining
section, the distribution process is interrupted until the G01
is commanded.
2 F x 15000 mm/min or F x 600 inch/min
The number below the decimal point is ignored.
173
19.11 Machining error by acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is partly

responsible for machining errors caused by the CNC. To eliminate this
HIGH–PRECISION machining error, a RISC processor is used to enable the high–speed
CONTOUR CONTROL execution of the following functions.
USING 64–BIT (1) Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation based on the advance
RISC PROCESSOR loading of multiple blocks, which are free of machining errors caused
by acceleration/deceleration
(2) Automatic speed control function, which assures smooth
acceleration/deceleration, where changes in the figure and feedrate
and the maximum allowable machine speed are processed correctly by
loading multiple blocks in advance
(3) NURBS interpolation
The smooth acceleration/deceleration achieved in this way increases the
feed forward coefficient, thereby reducing servo–system follow–up
control errors.
174
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 20. AXES CONTROL
20 AXES CONTROL
175
20. AXES CONTROL NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
20.1 Normally, the machine is controlled to move to a commanded position.

However, when the follow up function is applied, actual position in the
FOLLOW UP NC is revised according to the move of the machine.
FUNCTION Follow up function is activated when:
– Emergency stop is on
– Servo alarm is on
Follow up is carried out and machine movement during the emergency
stop and servo alarm is followed up in the NC, so actual position of the
machine is reflected in the NC. Therefore, machining can be resumed
after the emergency stop or the servo alarm has been deactivated, without
performing the reference point return again.
However, when a trouble has generated in the position detection system,
the system cannot follow up correctly. So present position in NC does not
become correct value.
By parameter setting, follow up function can also be applied to:
– Servo off
status . It is also valid in cases when the machine is moved with a
mechanical handle.
20.2 The conventional follow–up function performs follow–up for all the axes
during the servo off state if parameter No.1800#2 (FVF) is set to 1.
FOLLOW–UP FOR The new follow–up function performs follow up for all the axes when
EACH AXIS parameter No.1800#2 (FVF) is set to 1. When the parameter is set to 0,
however, it allows the operator to specify for each axis whether follow up
is performed.
Parameter No.1802#3 is used to specify whether follow–up is performed
during the servo off state. When the parameter is set to 0, follow–up is
not performed. When it is set to 1, follow up is performed.
20.3 It is possible to move the machine by hand, using the mechanical handle
installed on the machine; not by the NC (servo motor).
MECHANICAL Move distance by the mechanical handle is followed up and actual
HANDLE FEED position in the NC is revised. The mechanical handle feed is done by
inputting the servo off signal of the axis fed. Parameter setting is
necessary to command follow up function when servo off signal is on.
20.4 Servo on/off control per axis is possible by signals from machine side.
This function is generally used with the machine clamp.
SERVO OFF
20.5 The MDI-commanded or the program-commanded move direction of

each axis can be reversed and executed.
MIRROR IMAGE Mirror image is set by MDI setting or by the switch on the machine side.
Mirror image can be applied to all axes.
176
20.6 It is possible to detach or attach rotary tables and attachments with this
function. Switch control axis detach signal according to whether the
CONTROL AXIS rotary tables and attachments are attached or detached. When this signal
DETACH is on, the corresponding axis is excluded from the control axes, so the
servo alarm applied to the axis are ignored. The axis is automatically
regarded as being interlocked. This signal is not only accepted when
power turned is on, so automatic change of attachments is possible any
time with this function.
The same switching as with this signal can also be performed with the
MDI setting.
20.7 The traveling command of master axis is given to two motors of master
and slave axes in a simple synchronous control. However, no
SIMPLE synchronous error compensation or synchronous error alarm is detected
SYNCHRONOUS for constantly detecting the position deviation of the master and slave
CONTROL axes to compensate the deviation.
In the manual reference point return, the master and slave axes similarly
move until the deceleration operation is performed. After that, the
detection of grid is performed independently.
The pitch error and backlash compensation are independently performed

for the master and slave axes.
An input signal from the machine side can be select whether the axis
traveling is carried out based on the travelling command for that axis as
in normal case or whether the axis travelling is carried out while
synchronizing with the travelling of any other axis.
Simple synchronous operation is allowed in the automatic operation by

tape command, manual data input, or memory command and in the
manual operation such as manual continuous feed, manual handle feed,
incremental feed, or manual reference position return.
177
20.8 This function usually checks position deviation amount during motion.
If the amount exceeds the parameter set “feed stop position deviation
FEED STOP amount”, pulse distribution and acceleration/deceleration control is
stopped for the while exceeding, and move command to the positioning
control circuit is stopped.
The overshoot at rapid feed acceleration is thus kept to a minimum.
Speed
Commanded speed
Actual speed
Time
Feed stop
20.9 Arbitrary command multiply is used in case the detection unit is a special
kind of value.
ARBITRARY Range of the arbitrary command multiply is as follows.
COMMAND MULTIPLY 1/1 – 1/27 (multiplication: 1/n, provided that n: 1 – 27)
(CMR) 1 – 48 (multiplication: n, provided that n: 1 – 48)
The following is the range of the standard command multiply.
Multiplication of 0.5 to 10 (multiplication unit: 0.25)
178
20.10 The synchronous operation, independent operation, and normal operation

for two or more specified axes can be switched by an input signal from
TWIN TABLE the machine side.
CONTROL
The following operations can be performed in the machine which has two
tables which can be independently driven (for example Y and V axes):
1) Synchronous control
It is used for cutting a large workpiece which requires two tables.
The synchronous control of master and slave axes (V axis) is
performed based on the travelling command of master axis (Y axis).
The synchronous control gives the travelling command of master axis
to two servo motors of master and slave axes. No synchronous error
compensation is carried out for constantly detecting the deviation of
two servo motors and for giving compensation for the servo motor of
slave axis to minimize the deviation. Also, no synchronous error
alarm can also be detected.
Synchronous control of automatic operation, manual continuous feed,
manual handle feed, and incremental feed can be made. However, no
synchronous control of manual reference point return can be made.
2) Independent control
It is used for cutting a small workpiece on one of two tables.
It is the travelling command of master axis and is used for performing
the travelling of master axis only or slave axis only.
Even in the independent operation of slave axis, the program
command may be the same command as in the master axis. Therefore,
the same command program can be used when the workpiece is placed
on either table.
Independent control of automatic operation can be made. Manual
operation is carried out the same as that of normal control.
3) Normal operation
It is used for cutting separate workpieces on each table.
This control is the same as the normal CNC control. The master and
slave axes are travelled by independent axis addresses (Y and V).
The travelling commands of master and slave axes can be commanded
in the same block. Both the automatic and manual operations are the
same as the normal CNC control.
The assignment of the master and slave axes to any axis is carried out
by setting parameters.
179
Y V
20.11 During simple synchronization, an OT alarm is issued when the

difference between the positional deviations for the synchronized axes
SIMPLE (error counter value) is greater than the value set in a parameter. If this
SYNCHRONIZATION occurs in automatic operation, the movement is decelerated and stopped
CONTROL along all the axes. If this occurs in manual operation, the movement is
decelerated and stopped only along the axes subject to simple
POSITIONAL
synchronization. A signal is also issued in this case.
DEVIATION CHECK
FUNCTION
180
20.12 The rotation axis (C axis) can be controlled by commanding the G41.1 or
G42.1 so that the tool constantly faces the direction perpendicular to the
NORMAL DIRECTION advancing direction during cutting.
CONTROL G40.1: Normal direction control cancellation mode
(G41.1, G42.1) (No normal direction control can be performed.)
G41.1: Normal direction control left side on
(Control is made to allow facing perpendicular to advancing
direction to the left)
G42.1: Normal direction control right side on
(Control is made to allow facing perpendicular to advancing
direction to the right)
In the normal direction control, control is made so that the tool may be
perpendicular to the advancing direction on the X-Y plane.
With the angle of C axis, the +X direction is defined to be 0 degrees
viewed from the rotation center of C axis. Then, the +Y direction, –X
direction, and –Y direction are defined to be 90, 180, and 270 degrees,
respectively.
When shifting to the normal direction control mode from the cancellation
mode, the C axis becomes perpendicular to the advancing direction where
the G41.1 or G42.1 is at the starting point of commanded block.
+Y
90°
180° 0° +X
270°
Center of
rotation
Between blocks, the travelling of C axis is automatically inserted so that

the C axis faces the normal direction at the starting point of each block
according to the change of travelling direction.
Normal direction control is performed for the path after compensation
during the cutter compensation mode. The feedrate of rotation of C axis
inserted at the starting point of each block becomes the fede rate set by
parameters.
However, when dry run is valid, the feedrate is set to the dry run rate.
Also, in the case of rapid traverse (G00), it becomes the rapid traverse rate.
In the case of circular command, the C axis is allowed to be rotated first
so that the C axis faces perpendicular to the circular starting point.
At this time, the C axis is controlled so that it constantly faces the normal
direction along with the move of circular command.
CAUTION
The rotation of C axis during normal direction control is
controlled at short distance so that 180 degrees or less may
result.
181
20.13 When contour grinding is performed, the side face of workpiece can be
grinded by executing the contour program at other axes while the grinding
CHOPPING axis (axis with a whetstone) is moved up and down. Chopping is
FUNCTION (G81.1) commanded by the command of G81.1 and is inputted programming.
(1) Chopping by the program command
G80;
G80: Chopping mode command cancellation
G81.1 Z. . . Q. . . R. . . F. . . ;
Z: Top dead center position (Applicable to axes other than the Z
axis.)
Q: Distance between the top and bottom dead center
(Set by the incremental value based on the top dead point.)
R: Distance from the top dead center to the R point
(Set by the incremental value based on the top dead point.)
F: Chopping feedrate
(1) The positioning to the point R can be performed
(2) After that, the reciprocating motion continues at the commanded
rate between the upper and lower dead points. Override can be
applied to, the shopping rate by the override signal for chopping.
(3) The chopping operation is cancelled, returning to the point R by
G80 command
R point (1)
Top dead
center
(2) (3)
Bottom dead
center
Time
Through the travelling command of chopping axis and canned

cycle cannot be commanded during chopping mode, other NC
commands can be commanded. Chopping operation continues in
both manual mode and feed hold status. The chopping operation
is suspended, returning to the point R by reset
(2) Chopping by the input signal
To start by the chopping start signal CHPST, previously set the data
for the chopping axis, reference position, top dead point, bottom dead
point and chopping rate. When the chopping start signal CHPST is
operated from LOW to HIGH, the chopping operation is started. This
chopping operation is independent of the operation mode selected. If
the chopping axis is in the axis movement, the chopping operation is
ignored.
182
(3) Servo delay compensation

When the grinding axis is operated at high–speed chopping operation,
actual tool cannot reach the position commanded by program due to
the servo delay and the delay on acceleration/deceleration.
The difference between the position commanded by programs and that
of actual tool is measured. Then, this difference is automatically
compensated. In order to compensate the shortage, increase the move
command amount between the upper dead point and lower dead point
and then perform chopping command at the rate where the number of
choppings per unit time is equal to that commanded by programs.
20.14 Any axis can be released from the control of CNC and directly controlled
from PMC. That is, input of commands such as moving distance and
AXIS CONTROL WITH feedrate commands from PMC allows the axis to move independently of
PMC other axes moving under control of CNC. Therfore, use of an axis of CNC
enables control of peripheral devices such as a turret, pallet, and index
table. Which of CNC and PMC controls each axis can be selected by the
input signal.
The following operations can be directly controlled from PMC:
(i) Rapid feed with the specified moving distance.
(ii) Cutting feed with the specified moving distance.
S The feedrate and override can also be specified.
S The cutting feed can be started simultaneously with and other
PMC control axis.
(iii) Reference position return.
(iv) Positioning on a machine coordinate point.
(v) Dwell
PMC CNC
BMI
1st axis Pulse Servo
management control Motor
distribution
1st axis
PMC axis
control data
2nd axis Pulse Servo
management distribution control Motor
2nd axis
Command PMC axis
control data
3rd axis Pulse Servo
management distribution Motor
control
3rd axis
PMC axis
control data : : :
: : :
:
:
183
20.15 (1) Specifying the coordinates

The 5–axis control functions automatically calculate the direction of
UPGRADED 5–AXIS the tool axis, which varies as the rotation axis (AC–axis, BC–axis, or
CONTROL AB–axis) moves, in order to manually move the tool with a handle or
COMPENSATION apply tool length compensation. The coordinates for the axis, which
determine the direction of the tool axis, can be set in parameters
PARAMETER
No.7546 and 7547. The following 5–axis control functions can be
used when the rotation axis is only mechanically operated an not an
NC axis:
S Three–dimensional handle feed
S Tool length compensation along the tool axis (G43.1)
NOTE
The AC–axis means the A–axis and C–axis. The BC–axis
and AB–axis also conform to this notation.
When the coordinates for the rotation axis are set in parameters for the
above functions, the A–, B–, or C–axis can be used as an axis
independent of the 5–axis control functions. For an axis independent
of the 5–axis control functions, coordinates are updates as the axis
moves but are not used for the functions.
(2) Display
The absolute coordinates are displayed by subtracting the tool length
compensations along the tool axis.
(3) Display for three–dimensional coordinate conversion
The remaining distance the tool must be moved for three–dimensional
coordinate conversion can be displayed about the program coordinate
system and about the workpiece coordinate system.
20.16 The roll–over function for a rotation axis prevents a coordinate overflow
for the corresponding rotation axis.
ROLL–OVER The improved roll–over function for a rotation axis can be enabled or
FUNCTION FOR A disabled by using programmable parameter input (G10).
ROTATION AXIS When the roll–over function for a rotation axis is executed, each absolute
coordinate is kept within the range of 0 to 359.999 degrees.
In the incremental mode, a specified value directly indicates an angular
displacement. In the absolute mode, the specified value is converted to
the remainder obtained by dividing the specified value by 360 degrees.
The difference between the converted value and the current value
indicates the angular displacement. The movement by angular
displacement is always made in the shorter direction. That is, if the
difference between the converted value and the current value is greater
than 180 degrees, the movement to the specified position is made in the
opposite direction. If the difference is 180 degrees, the movement is made
in the normal direction.
184
20.17 This function rotates a workpiece in synchronization with a rotating tool,

or moves a tool in synchronization with a rotating workpiece to produce
TWO AXES high–precision gears, screws, and so forth. A desired synchronization
ELECTRONIC GEAR ratio can be programmed. This function can implement an electronic gear
BOX box (EGB) that enables the user to reprogram the synchronization ratio
between a workpiece and tool.
When the two axes electronic gear box option is selected, up to two groups
of axes can be specified for synchronization. This means that on a gear
grinder, for example, the user can use one axis to rotate a workpiece in
synchronization with the tool, and can use the other axis to move the
dressing axis in synchronization with the tool.
[Example of controlled axis configuration (gear grinder using the two

axes electronic gear box)]
Spindle : EGB master axis: Tool axis
First axis : X
Second axis : Y
Third axis : C–axis (EGB slave axis: Workpiece axis)
Fourth axis : C–axis (EGB dummy axis: Not usable as an ordinary
controlled axis)
Fifth axis : V–axis (EGB slave axis: Dressing axis)
Sixth axis : V–axis (EGB dummy axis: Not usable as an ordinary
controlled axis)
CNC
Spindle (master axis) Spindle Motor Spindle Detector
amplifier
Tool axis
First axis X (omitted)
Second axis Y (omitted)
Third axis
Slave axis – Position Speed/current Servo
amplifier Motor C–axis Detector
C + control control
EGB Detector Workpiece axis
K1
Fourth axis Synchronization
Dummy axis switch
Follow–up – K1: Synchronization factor
Error
+ counter
Fifth axis
Slave axis – Position Speed/current Servo
amplifier Motor V–axis Detector
V + control control
Detector Dressing axis
EGB
Sixth axis K2
Dummy axis Synchronization
Follow–up switch K2: Synchronization factor
– Error
+ counter
185
20.18 This function provides a skip or high–speed skip signal for an electronic
gearbox (EGB) axis in synchronization mode under the control of the
SKIP FUNCTION FOR EGB function. Its main features are as follows:
EGB AXIS 1. If a skip signal is input while an EGB axis skip command block is
being executed, the block will not end until the skip signal has been
input a specified number of times.
2. Movement based on EGB is not stopped by a skip signal.
3. The machine coordinates when a skip signal was input, and the number
of times that the skip signal has been input, are stored into specified
custom macro variables.
186
20.19 When a request is made to start or cancel synchronization, acceleration/

deceleration can be performed before executing the request.
ELECTRONIC Synchronization can be started or canceled while the spindle is rotating.
GEARBOX When synchronization is applied, automatic phase synchronization can
AUTOMATIC PHASE be performed so that the position of the C–axis when synchronization was
started coincides with the position of the spindle one–rotation signal.
SYNCHRONIZATION
This enables an operation similar to the one–rotation signal–based start
operation of hob synchronization for the conventional hobbing machine
functions.
(1) Acceleration/deceleration type
Spindle
speed
Synchronization Synchronization
start command cancel command
Workpiece
axis speed
Acceleration Synchronized state Deceleration
(2) Acceleration/deceleration and automatic phase matching type
Spindle
speed
Synchronization Synchronization
start command cancel command
Workpiece
axis speed
Auto-
Acceleration Synchronized state Deceleration
matic
phase
synchro-
nization
187
21. AUTOMATIC OPERATION NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
21 AUTOMATIC OPERATION
188
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 21. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
21.1
OPERATION MODE
21.1.1 The part program can be read and executed block by block from the
Tape Operation control unit integral type tape reader or from the input device connected
to the reader/puncher interface.
21.1.2 Program registered in the memory can be executed.

Memory Operation
21.1.3 Multiple blocks can be input and executed by the CRT/MDI unit.
MDI Operation
21.2
SELECTION OF
EXECUTION
PROGRAMS
21.2.1 Program number currently in need can be searched from the programs
Program Number registered in memory operating the CRT/MDI.
Search
21.2.2 The name of a program among the programs registered in memory can be
Program Search with specified from the CRT/MDI to search and select the program.
Program Names
21.2.3 The sequence number of the currently selected program can be searched
Sequence Number using the CRT/MDI unit.
When executing the program from half-way (not from the head) of the
Search program, specify the sequence number of the half-way program, and the
program can be executed from the half-way block by sequence number
search.
The sequence number search function can be done on memory operation
programs, and tape operation programs.
21.2.4 After program execution has ended, the program in the memory or the
Rewind tape reader can be rewinded to the program head, with this reset & rewind
signal on.
189
21.3
ACTIVATION OF
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION
21.3.1 Set operation mode to memory operation, MDI operation, or tape

Cycle Start operation, press the cycle start button, and automatic operation starts.
21.4
EXECUTION OF
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION
21.4.1 Buffer register equivalent to one block is available for program read and
Buffer Register control of NC command operation intervals caused by preprocess time.
The buffer register can be made for two blocks by selecting parameters.
190
21.5
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION STOP
21.5.1 Automatic operation is stopped after executing the M00 (program stop)
Program Stop commanded block. When the optional stop switch on the operator’s panel
is turned on, the M01 (optional stop) commanded block is executed and
(M00, M01) the automatic operation stops.
The automatic operation can be restarted by the cycle start button.
21.5.2 The NC is reset after executing the M02 (end of program) or M30 (end
Program End of tape) commanded block.
(M02, M30)
21.5.3 During program operation, when the block with a preset sequence number
Sequence Number appears, operation stops after execution of the block, to a single block stop
status. The sequence number can be set by the operator through the
Comparison and Stop CRT/MDI panel.
This function is useful for program check, etc., because program can be
stopped at optional block without changing the program.
21.5.4 The NC can be brought to an automatic operation hold status by pressing

Feed Hold the feed hold button on the operator’s panel. When feed hold is
commanded during motion, it decelerates to a stop.
Automatic operation can be restarted by the cycle start button.
21.5.5 The automatic operation can be ended in a reset status by the reset button
Reset on the CRT/MDI panel or by the external reset signal, etc. When reset is
commanded during motion, it decelerates to a stop.
191
21.6
RESTART OF
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION
21.6.1 This function allows program restart by specifying the desired sequence
Program Restart number, for example after tool break and change, or when machining is
restarted after holidays. The NC memorizes the modal status from the
beginning of the program to the sequence number.
If there are M codes necessary to be output, output the M code by the MDI,
press the start button, the tool automatically moves to the start position,
and the program execution restarts.
CNC counts the number of blocks from the beginning of the program and
displays it on the CRT screen. This number of blocks also includes the
blocks made by CNC (such as the block to perform the operation of each
fixed cycle).
Specifying the block counter value enables restart of the operation from
the block with no sequence number or from the midpoint of the cycle
operation.
21.6.2 The program restart function enables the following operations after
Program Reset searching for the block to be restarted:
Function and Output of (1) Before moving the tool to the machining restart position
M, S, T, and B, Codes (a) The program restart function automatically outputs the last M, S,
T, and B codes to the PMC.
If the last S code is the S code (maximum spindle speed) specified
in the block containing G92, the program restart function outputs
this S code as the maximum spindle speed signal (MR0 to MR15).
If the S code is the other S code (specified spindle speed), it is
output as the specified spindle speed signal (R0 to R15).
Only the S code specified last is displayed on the program restart
screen regardless of whether it is in the same block as a G92.
(b) While searching for the block to be restarted, the program restart
function automatically outputs all the sampled M codes and the last
S, T, and B codes to the PMC. The function can sample up to 35
M codes. When the number of M codes sampled exceeds 35, the
function outputs the latest 35 M codes to the PMC.
Specify whether the function performs operation (a) or (b) with the
MOAL bot (bit 6 of parameter 7620).
(2) Before the machining restart position is reached.
On the program restart screen, M, S, and B codes can be specified from
the MDI for output to the PMC while the system is still in the MEM
or TAPE mode.
192
21.6.3 Machining can be stopped half–way a block by feed hold, when for
Restart of Block example tool breaks. The tool is then taken away from the workpiece for
tool change, offsets of the new tool is set, and machining with the new tool
is restarted from the point where machining was interrupted.
(1) Interruption position

(2) Tool change position
(3) Restart position
(2)
(3)
(1)
End
Start point
point
Fig. 21.6.3
21.6.4 These functions are used for replacing tools damaged retraction of tools
Tool Retract & Recover for confirming the cutting conditions, and recovering the tools efficiently
to restart the cutting.
Also, the escape operation can be performed with the tool retract signal
by previously setting the escape amount (position) with a program. This
can be used for retraction for detecting tool damage.
1) Input the tool retract signal during executing the automatic operation.
Then, the escape operation (retraction) is performed to the escape
position commanded by the program.
2) Input the tool retract signal to initiate the retract mode.
3) After that, switch the automatic mode to the manual mode to move
tools with manual operation such as the jog feed, incremental feed,
handle feed, and manual numeric command. A maximum of 10 points
can be automatically memorized as travel path.
4) Input the tool recovery signal to return the tool to the retraction
position in the opposite direction along the path moved by manual
operation automatically (recovery operation).
5) Perform the cycle start to return the tool to the position where the tool
retract signal was entered (repositioning).
193
: Position where the tool retract signal was input

: Programmed escape position
: Position memorized by manual operation
: Retraction path
: Manual operation
: Returning operation
: Repositioning
Command the escape amount using the G10.6.
G10.6 _ _ ; ;
The escape data sorted by G10.6 is valid until the next G10.6 is
commanded. Command the following to cancel the escape amount:
G10.6; (Signal command)

where
The G10.6 is the one-shot G code.
The tool can be retracted to a special location of workpiece coordinate

system when the escape amount is command by the ABSOLUTE (G90).
When the escape amount is commanded by the INCREMENTAL (G91),
the tool can retract by only the commanded escape amount.
Also, it can always be regarded as the incremental command regardless

of the Absolute/Incremental commands (G90/G91) by parameter setting.
1) Thread cutting and retract
The chamfering direction and distance are to be commanded as escape
amount during thread cutting.
When the retract signal is input, chamfering is performed in the
commanded direction of 45 degrees by the commanded distance. After
chamfering is completed, thread cutting continues and stops when it
is completed.
194
45
F
C
The operation after stop is the same as that of normal retract.

2) Command cycle and retract
The following tool retract is performed during the canned cycle for
drilling (canned cycle) :
Operation 1 . . . . . Positioning of X and Y axes

Operation 2 . . . . . Rapid traverse to point R
Operation 3 . . . . . Drilling
Operation 4 . . . . . Operation at the hole bottom
position
Operation 5 . . . . . Escape to point R
Operation 6 . . . . . Rapid traverse to initial point
Operation 1
Initial point
Operation 2 Operation 6
Point R
Operation 3 Operation 5
Operation 4
The following retract is performed by inputting retract signal

during the canned cycle:
a) During operation 1
Retract is executed in the similar manner as in the normal retract
function. (Traveling is carried out by the escape amount (position)
set by the G10.6.)
b) During operation 2
The operation 2 is suspended, travelling to the initial point and then
it stops.
195
c) During operation 3
The operation 3 is suspended, the remaining cycle operations d),
e), and f) are executed, travelling to the initial point is made, and
then it stops.
d) During operation 4, 5, or 6
The operation 4, 5, or 6 continues and then it stops after travelling
to the initial point.
The travelling by G10.6 is not performed even if the retract signal is
input between the cases b) to d) above.
Also, the retract mode is initiated after travelling to the initial point.
21.7
MANUAL
INTERRUPTION
DURING AUTOMATIC
OPERATION
21.7.1 During automatic operation, tool can be adjusted by the manual pulse
Handle Interruption generator without changing the mode. The pulse from the manual pulse
generator is added to the automatic operation command and the tool is
moved for the recommended pulses.
The workpiece coordinate system thereafter is shifted for the pulse
commanded value. Movement commanded by handle interruption can be
displayed on the CRT screen.
21.7.2 When auto/manual simultaneous operation selection signal is set on,

Automatic/Manual automatic operation (tape, MDI, memory, or tape editing) and manual
operation (manual feed, incremental feed, or manual handle feed) are
Simultaneous simultaneously performed.
Operation This function allows, for example, staging of the next workpiece during
automatic operation.
196
21.8 By turning on retract signal, it is possible to retract the tool path which
so far has been passed. By turning off trace signal, it is possible to advance
RETRACE along the retraced path. When the path up to the position where retrace
was started is traced again, cutting continues according to program
commands.
Retrace ends, Reverse

reprogress signal is
starts Reverse turned on Retrace
signal is starts
turned off
Fig. 21.8 Retrace and reprogress
When retrace signal is turned on and the path so far passed is traced back,
it is called “retrace”. When retrace signal is turned off and the retraced
path is progressed again up to the point where retrace was started, it is
called “readvance”.
Approximately 40 to 80 blocks which were previously executed in the

automatic operation mode such as memory, tape, and MDI operations can
be retraces.
A block created inside the CNC is also counted as one block on retracing.
When all 40 to 80 blocks are retraced or there are no blocks to be retraced,

the tool retraces the last block, and the tool stops.
It is possible to select whether the feedrate on retracing is set to the

commanded rate or to the rate set by a parameter.
197
NOTE
1 When the following functions are added, no reverse
function can be mounted:
d FS3/6 interface
d Interrupt–type custom macro
d Multi–buffer
2 The blocks including the following commands cannot be
retraced:
d Inch/metric conversion
d Reference position return function
d Thread cutting
d Remote buffer
3 No retrace can be performed during execution of the
following functions:
d Circular thread cutting B
d Polar coordinate interpolation
d Cylindrical interpolation
d High–speed cutting
d Exponential function interpolation
4 The M, S, T and the second auxiliary functions are also
output during retrace.
When these functions are executed, some sort of
countermeasures are required at the machine side.
21.9 Automatic operation can be stopped by inputting signal BCAN to the

control unit. After the automatic operation enters the STOP state, output
ACTIVE BLOCK signals STL and OP go low. All modal data is maintained.
CANCEL Automatic operation is restarted the block after stopped block by cycle
start.
21.10 If an absolute coordinate value exceeds a transverse inhibit limit value

(specified in setting parameter No. 5251) during automatic operation, the
TRANSVERSE movement of the axis is stopped, but automatic operation continues, and
INHIBIT LIMIT the absolute coordinate value is updated. In other words, the machine
FUNCTION behaves as if a machine lock were in effect. When the absolute coordinate
value returns to within the transverse inhibit limit, movement of the axis
is resumed. Also, during manual operation, if an absolute coordinate
value exceeds a transverse inhibit limit value, movement of the axis is
stopped. In other words, the machine behaves as if a machine lock were
in effect. When the absolute coordinate value returns to within the
transverse inhibit limit, movement of the axis is resumed.
198
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 22. MANUAL OPERATION
22 MANUAL OPERATION
199
22. MANUAL OPERATION NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
22.1 1) Jog feed

Each axis can be moved in the + or - direction for the time the button
MANUAL FEED is pressed. Feedrate is the parameter set speed with override of:
0 - 655.34%, 0.01% step.
The parameter set speed can be set to each axis.
2) Manual rapid feed
Each axis can be fed in a rapid feed to the + or - direction for the time
the button is pressed.
Rapid traverse override is also possible.
22.2 Specified move amount can be positioned to the + or - direction with the
button. Move amount of:
INCREMENTAL FEED 0 – (least command increment) × 99999999
can be specified. The feed rate is that of manual feed.
It is also possible to specify (least command increment) × (magnification)
(not optional move amount) by selecting parameters:
The possible magnifications to be specified are as follows.
×1, ×10, ×100, ×1000 ×10000, ×100000.
Table 22.2
Increment system Metric input Inch input
IS–A 0.01, 0.1, 1.0, 10.0, 100.0, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1.0, 10.0,
1000.0 mm 100.0 inch
IS–B 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1.0, 10.0, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1,
100.0 mm 1.0, 10.0 inch
IS–C 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001,
1.0, 10.0 mm 0.01, 0.1, 1.0 inch
IS–D 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.000001, 0.00001, 0.0001,
0.01, 0.1, 1.0 mm 0.001,,0.01, 0.1 inch
22.3 By rotating the manual pulse generator, the axis can be moved for the
equivalent distance. Manual handle feed is controlled 1 axis at a time.
MANUAL HANDLE The manual pulse generator generates 100 pulses per rotation. Move
FEED (1ST) amount per pulse can be specified from the following magnifications:
×1, ×10, ×M.
M is parameter set value of 1 - 1000. Move distance is :
(Least command increment) × (magnification)
Table 22.3
Increment
Metric input Inch input
system
IS–A 0.01, 0.1, M/100 mm 0.001, 0.01, M/1000 inch
IS–B 0.001, 0.01,M/1000 mm 0.0001, 0.01, M/10000 inch
IS–C 0.0001, 0.001, M/10000 mm 0.00001, 0.0001, M/100000 inch
IS–D 0.00001, 0.0001, M/100000 0.000001, 0.00001, M/100000
mm inch
It is also possible to specify the following magnifications by selecting

parameter.
×1, ×10, ×100, ×M
200
22.4 A 2nd, as well as 3rd manual pulse generator can be rotated to move the
axis for the equivalent distance. Manual handle feed of 3 axes can be done
MANUAL HANDLE at a time. Multiplier is common to 1st, 2nd and 3rd manual pulse
FEED (2ND, 3RD) generators.
22.5 The tool can be moved to an optional direction on an optional plane by

manual operation. Simple plane cutting can be performed with this
MANUAL ARBITRARY function because feedrate, feed direction, feed plane can always be
ANGLE FEED changed.
1) Plane selection
Specify 1st and 2nd axis of the plane to perform manual optional angle
feed by external signals.
2) Feed direction assignment
Specify feed direction of manual arbitrary angle feed by external
signals. Every 1/16 degrees between 0° – 360° can be specified.
The angles are as follows.
Angles of 360° or more can be specified, for the NC can convert the
angle. Feed direction can be optionally changed during manual
arbitrary angle feed. Inposition check will not be performed even
when feed direction changes, and move command to the new direction
is immediately executed.
Second axis
+ direction
90°
180° 0°
First axis
+ direction
270°
3) Feedrate assignment
Feedrate of manual arbitrary angle feed (tangential direction speed) is
specified with the jogging speed set dial. Feedrate can be freely
changed during manual arbitrary angle feed.
4) Manual arbitrary angle feed start, stop command
Manual arbitrary angle feed is performed while manual arbitrary angle
feed signals is on.
Manual arbitrary angle feed signal for forward direction feed and
reverse direction (180° reversed direction) feed are available.
201
22. MANUAL OPERATION NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
22.6 Program format data commanded via the MDI can be executed in JOG
feed mode.
MANUAL NUMERIC Manual numerical command can be executed any time the JOG feed is
COMMAND available.
The following commands can be executed:
– Positioning (G00)
– Linear interpolation (G01)
– Automatic reference position return (G28)
– 2nd/3rd/4th reference position return (G30)
– M, S, T, B (2nd miscellaneous function)
Activation of the commanded data is the same as cycle start in automatic
operation.
When feed hold is commanded during manual numeric command
execution, the move command will stop but execution will continue till
the M, S, T, B (2nd miscellaneous function) ends.
Move command once stopped cannot be continued.
22.7 When tool is moved by manual operation when input signal ABS is on,
the move distance is added to the absolute coordinate value.
MANUAL ABSOLUTE When tool is moved by manual operation when input signal ABS is off,
ON/OFF the move distance is ignored, and is not added to the absolute coordinate
value. In this case, the workpiece coordinates is shifted for the amount
that the tool was move by manual operation.
202
22.8 When the handle of the manual pulse generator is rotated in the
three–dimensional coordinate system conversion mode, this function
MANUAL adds the travel distance specified by the manual pulse generator to the
INTERRUPTION travel distance during automatic operation.
FUNCTION FOR
THREE–DIMENSIONAL Z Z
Z’
COORDINATE SYSTEM
CONVERSION
Y Y
X’ Y’
X X
Coordinate system Converted coordinate system
to be converted (When the Z–axis is selected, the
travel distance is added to the Z’–
axis as shown in the figure above.)
22.9 If a request is made to move an axis beyond stored stroke limit 1 during
a manual operation (manual rapid traverse, jog feed, handle feed, or
STORED STROKE incremental feed), the request is rejected, and a warning message, rather
LIMIT CHECK IN than an alarm, is displayed. The warning message appears just before the
MANUAL OPERATION axis enters the forbidden area set for stored stroke limit 1, and is cleared
automatically when the axis starts moving in the other direction.
203
23. PROGRAM TEST FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
23 PROGRAM TEST FUNCTIONS
204
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 23. PROGRAM TEST FUNCTIONS
23.1 In machine lock condition, the machine does not move, but the position
display is updated as if the machine were moving. Machine lock is valid
ALL AXES MACHINE even in the middle of a block.
LOCK
23.2 Machine lock can be commanded per axis.
Not only the Z axis, but also optional axis command can be cancelled.
MACHINE LOCK ON
EACH AXIS (Z AXIS
COMMAND CANCEL)
23.3 This function inhibits transmitting of M, S, T, B function code signals and

strode signals to the machine side. The decoded DM00, DM01, DM02,
AUXILIARY and DM30 signals can be transmitted under this miscellaneous function
FUNCTION LOCK lock.
23.4 In this dry run mode, commanded cutting feedrate is ignored and axis is
fed at feedrate specified with the jogging rate dial. Rapid feed command
DRY RUN (G00) is done in rapid feedrate, and rapid traverse override is valid.
Dry run can also be commanded to rapid feed command (G00) by
parameter setting.
23.5 The program can be executed block by block under automatic operation.
SINGLE BLOCK
205
23. PROGRAM TEST FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
23.6 This function checks a machining program while executing it in the test
mode. If it finds an error in the program, the error can be corrected the
RETRACE PROGRAM error at that time and the corrected program can be executed immediately.
EDITING FUNCTION It can be used to check and correct a machining program without stopping
operation.
1. While the tool was moving according to the N03 block, an error was
found in the tool path.
PROGRAM(MEMORY) N02
N01 G90 G00 X20. Y20. ; 20

Forward N03
N02 G01 X0. Y20. F500 ;
N03 G02 X–20. Y0. R20. ; operation
–20 0
N04 G01 X–20. Y–10. ; X
N04
2. The tool is stopped and reverse operation is started immediately.
PROGRAM(MEMORY) N02
N01 G90 G00 X20. Y20. ; 20

Reverse N03
N02 G01 X0. Y20. F500 ;
–20 0
N04 G01 X–20. Y–10. ; X
N04
3. After the N03 block to be corrected is executed in reverse, the tool is

stopped and the program is edited.
PROGRAM(MEMORY) N02
N01 G90 G00 X20. Y20. ; 20

N03
N02 G01 X0. Y20. F500 ;
N03 G03 X–20. Y0. R20. ; –20
N04 G01 X–20. Y–10. ; X
N04
206
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 23. PROGRAM TEST FUNCTIONS
4. When operation is restarted, the corrected program is executed.
PROGRAM(MEMORY) N02
N01 G90 G00 X20. Y20. ; 20

Second forward N03
N02 G01 X0. Y20. F500 ;
–20 0
N04 G01 X–20. Y–10. ; X
N04
207
24. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
24

208
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 24. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT
24.1 The following Setting and Display units are available.

SETTING AND 9″ Monochrome CRT/MDI (Small Type)
DISPLAY UNIT 9″ Monochrome CRT/MDI (Standard Type)
9″ Monochrome PDP/MDI (Standard Type)
9″ Monochrome CRT (Separate Type)
9″ Monochrome PDP (Separate Type)
9.5″ Color LCD/MDI (Horizontal Type)
9.5″ Color LCD/MDI (Vertical Type)
14″ Color CRT/MDI (Horizontal Type)
14″ Color CRT/MDI (Vertical Type)
10.4″ Color LCD (Separate Type)
Separate Type MDI for 9″ CRT/PDP
Separate Type MDI for Intelligent Terminal
Separate Type MDI for 10.4″ LCD (Vertical Type)
Separate Type MDI for 10.4″ LCD (Horizontal Type)
NOTE
The examples in this chapter use the 9″ CRT/MDI unit
(standard type) for displaying set values.
209
24.2
EXPLANATION OF
THE KEYBOARD
(23)OTHERS key
(2)RESET key (6)Address key (19)P–CHECK key
RESET A B C D E F G* H
! ” / # $ % &
POWER I J ’
K: L M N O P< Q>
; SP ?
R S T U_ V [ W] X Y Z
O ( )
ON (17)PROG key (22)MESSAGE key
(21)SERVICE key (18)OFFSET
(20)SETTING key
(16)POS key key
EOB
7 8 9 HELP
SHIFT POS PROG OFFSET P–CHECK
4 5 6 DELETE CAN SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE OTHERS
OFF
ALTER PMC ↑
1 2 3 CALC CNC PAGE ↑
← →
0= ⋅
INPUT
– INSERT
AUX
PAGE
↓ ↓
+ ’
(26)AUX (12)Cursor move

key key
(4)Function menu key (3)Soft keys (5)Operation menu key (8)INPUT/

INSERT key
(6)Numerical keys (13)Page change keys
(1)POWER on/off buttons (9)Alter key (7)Shift key
(25)CALC key (11)CAN key
(10)Delete key
(14)PMC/CNC key
(24)EOB/HELP key
Fig. 24.2 (a) 9″ CRT/MDI unit
Fig. 24.2 (b) Key arrangement (with pictorial indications)
210
Table 24.2 MDI Keyboard functions (1/3)
No. Name Functions
(1) <Power> ON/OFF button Press this button to turn CNC power ON and OFF.
(2) <RESET> key Press this key to reset the CNC, to cancel an alarm, etc.
(3) Soft key The soft key has various functions, according to the Applications. The soft key func-
tions are displayed at the bottom of the CRT screen.
(4) Function menu key Pressing this key when the soft keys are not function selection keys returns the soft
keys to the states of the function selection keys. Pressing the key when the soft keys
are function selection keys changes the soft keys to the function selection keys that do
not fit on the screen. (The 9″ CRT/MDI panel has five soft keys. The 14″ CRT/MDI
panel has ten soft keys. However, these soft keys are not sufficient for some applica-
tions. In this case, a plus sign (+) is displayed at the extreme right of the bottom line on
the CRT. The plus sign indicates that some soft keys do not fit on the screen.)
(5) Operation menu key The functions of the soft keys vary according to the applications. Pressing this key
when the soft keys are not operation selection keys changes the soft keys to the op-
eration selection keys that are effective on the selected CRT screen. Pressing this key
when the soft keys are operation selection keys changes the soft keys to the operation
selection keys that do not fit on the screen. (The 9″ CRT/MDI panel has five soft keys.
The 14″ CRT/MDI panel has ten soft keys. However, these soft keys are not sufficient
for some applications. In this case, a plus sign (+) is displayed in the rightmost frame
of the bottom line on the CRT. The plus sign indicates that some soft keys do not fit on
the screen.)
(6) Address/numerical key Press these keys to input alphabetic, numeric, and other characters.
(7) <SHIFT> key Some address keys are marked with two characters. To enter the lower right character,
press the shift key first. When the shift key is pressed, ^ is displayed in the key input
buffer. This indicates that pressing the address key enters the lower right character.
!, ”, $, \, –, <, >, :, ;, %, ’
These characters can be used on the MMC screen.
(8) <INPUT/INSERT> key When an address or numeric key is pressed, the data is entered in the key input buffer,
then displayed on the CRT. Press the input key to store the data entered in the key
input buffer in the offset register.
The input key is equivalent to an <INPUT> soft key. Either may be used.
Pressing this key on the program editing screen inserts the contents of the key input
buffer after the position where the cursor is located. The INSERT soft key has the
equivalent function. Either key can be used.
(9) <ALTER>key Pressing this key on the program editing screen replaces the word where the cursor is
located with the contents of the key input buffer. The ALTER soft key has the equiva-
lent function. Either key can be used.
(10) <DELETE>key Pressing this key on the program editing screen deletes the word where the cursor is
located. The DELETE WORD soft key has the equivalent function. Either key can be
used.
(11) Cancel <CAN> key Pressing this key deletes a character or symbol input to the key input buffer.
The contents of the buffer are displayed on the CRT. The position where a new entry is
to be input is displayed with an underscore (_). Pressing the CAN (cancel) key deletes
the character immediately before the underscore.
Example) When the contents of the key input buffer are displayed as shown below,
>N001X100Z_
pressing the CAN key deletes Z and the displayed contents change as follows:
>N001Z100_
211
No. Name Functions
(12) Cursor move keys The following four cursor keys are provided:
→ :This key moves the cursor forward in small increments.
The cursor is moved in the direction of order.
← :This key moves the cursor backward in small increments.
The cursor is moved to the opposite direction.
↓ : This key moves the cursor for the key input buffer forward when a character is en-
tered in the key input buffer. The position of the cursor for the key input buffer is
indicated by an underscore. Pressing an address or numeric key enters an ad-
dress or number at the cursor position. Pressing the cancel <CAN> key deletes the
character before the cursor position.
This key moves the cursor on the CRT screen forward in large increments when no
data is entered in the key input buffer.
The cursor is moved in the direction of order.
↑ : This cursor key moves the cursor for the key input buffer backward. This key
moves the cursor on the CRT screen backward in large increments when no data is
entered in the key input buffer.
The cursor is moved to the opposite direction.
(13) Page change keys Two kinds of page change keys are described below.
< ↓ >: This key is used to changeover the page on the CRT screen in the forward
direction.
< ↑ >: This key is used to changeover the page on the CRT screen in the reverse
direction.
The small 9″ monochrome CRT/MDI panel is not provided with page keys. Pressing
the → and ↓ cursor keys simultaneously is equivalent to pressing the ↓ page key.
Pressing the ← and ↑ cursor keys simultaneously is equivalent to pressing the ↑ page
key.
(14) <PMC/CNC>switch key This key is used to determine whether the CRT/MDI panel is used for the CNC or PMC.
(15) <MMC>key Pressing this key enables the CRT/MDI to be used in the MMC. This key is valid only
when a CNC having the MMC is used.
(16) <POS>key Pressing this key selects the current position display screen. The POSITION soft key
has the equivalent function. Either key can be used.
(17) <PROG>key Pressing this key selects the part program display screen. The PROGRAM soft key
has the equivalent function. Either key can be used.
(18) <OFFSET>key Pressing this key selects the tool offset display screen or the screen displaying offset
from the workpiece reference position. The OFFSET soft key has the equivalent func-
tion. Either key can be used.
(19) <P–CHECK>key Pressing this key selects the program check screen. The P CHECK soft key has the
equivalent function. Either key can be used.
(20) <SETTING>key Pressing this key selects the setting screen. The SETTING soft key has the equivalent
function. Either key can be used.
(21) <SERVICE>key Pressing this key selects the parameter and diagnosis screen. The MAINTENANCE
soft key has the equivalent function. Either key can be used.
(22) <MESSAGE>key Pressing this key selects the screen for alarm messages and operator messages. The
MESSAGE soft key has the equivalent function. Either key can be used.
(23) <OTHERS>key Pressing this key selects and displays the screen specified with parameter No. 2215.
212
No. Name Functions
(24) <HELP>key Pressing this key displays the help window on a screen. Alarm help, soft key help, and
(SHIFT/EOB) G code guide can be displayed. For details, see Help Functions.
(25) Arithmetic <CALC> key Press this key to execute operation commands in the key input buffer.
<SHIFT>+<ALTER> Example) When the data in the key input buffer is [10 + 20 x 30 + 400/8], the arithmetic
key is pressed. Then, the data in the key input buffer is changed to 660.
The arithmetic key is standard.
(26) <AUX> key Auxiliary key
213
24.3
SOFT KEYS AND
CALCULATION KEYS
Soft keys The 14–inch CRT has 10+2 keys (10 soft keys and a “Function Menu” key
and a “Operation Menu” key at both sides of the 10 keys) . The “Function
Menu” and “Operation Menu” keys are used to select functions in the soft
keys.
The 9–inch CRT has 5+2 soft keys.
These soft keys can be assigned with various functions, according to the
needs.
Calculation key (CALC) Characters input via keys are once input in the key–input buffer and
displayed on the lower part of the CRT screen.
When the CALC key is pressed, operation command in the buffer is
executed.
The following operator and formula can be used.
(i) Operator
+ (Sum), * (Difference) * (Product), / (Quotient)
(ii)Function
SIN (Sine), COS(cosine), TAN(tangent), ATAN (arc tangent), SQRT
(square root), ABS (absolute value), ACOS (arc cosine), ASIN (arc
sine), LN (natural logarithm), EXP (exponent)
Example 1
Key–in buffer data
X [100*5 + 200/5]
When the CALC key is pressed, the key–input buffer data becomes
as: X540.
Example 2
Key–input buffer data
[10 + 20 * 30 +400/8]
When the CALC key is pressed, the key–input buffer data becomes
as: 660
The following functions at are mainly available via the CRT/MDI panel:
1) Actual position display and actual position presetting
2) Contents of program display, program directory display (display of
program number, program name, part program storage length left,
number of programs left)
3) Program editing
4) Offset amount display and setting
5) Commanded value display, MDI input
6) Parameter setting and display
7) Alarm message/operator message display
8) Custom macro variables display and setting
9) Tool life management data display and setting
10)Diagnosis
11)Others
214
24.4 The following data can be input via the MDI panel.
MANUAL DATA INPUT a) Program input (multiple–block command is possible)
(MDI) b) Setting data input (for tool compensation data, etc.)
c) Parameter input (rapid traverse rate, acceleration/deceleration time
constants, etc.)
d) Diagnosis data input
e) Tape storage and editing operation
f) Other operations
215
24.5 The following data are displayed on the CRT screen. One 9″ CRT screen
can display maximum 680 characters (40 17 lines) and one 14″ CRT
DISPLAY screen can display maximum 1998 (74 27 lines).
1) Status display
Status of the control unit (alarm, editing) is displayed.
Status display can be seen one line above the soft key display on the
CRT screen.

16 TAPE JOG STOP READ MIN FIN 16:52:13 @ ALM
17
(Soft keys)
1 40
The above figure is the 9″ CRT. The same display is done on the 14″
CRT (second line from the bottom, from the right).
The display has ten fields from to , and the following is
displayed in all types of FANUC NCs.
Automatic operation mode selection (MEM, MDI, TAPE, EDIT,
or ****)
The currently selected automatic operation mode is displayed.
When automatic operation is not selected, the “****” is
displayed.
Manual operation mode selection (JOG, HND, INC, AGJ, J+H,
REF, or ***)
The currently selected manual operation mode is displayed.
When manual operation is not selected, the “***” is displayed.
Automatic operation status (RSET, STOP, HOLD, STRT, MSTR,
or SRCH)
Displays what status the automatic operation is.
RSET – Resetting
STOP – Automatic operation stop
HOLD – Automatic operation hold
STRT – Automatic operation start
MSTR – Manual numeric command start
SRCH – Sequence number searching
Program editing status (READ, PNCH, VRFY, SRCH, COND,
EDIT, or ****)
Displays what status the program editing is.
READ – Registering
PNCH – Punching
VRFY – Verifying
SRCH – Searching
COND – Arranging memory
EDIT – Other editing operation (INSERT, ALTER, etc.)
**** – No editing done
216
Axis move, dwell status (MTN, DWL, or ****)

“MTN” is displayed when axis in moving, “DWL” when
dwelling, and “***” in other cases.
M, S, T, B, functions’ status (FIN or ****)
When miscellaneous function as M, S, T, B, functions are under
execution (waiting for end signal from the PMC), “FIN” is
displayed, and “***” in other cases.
’ ’ Emergency stop status (EMG)
When emergency stop status commanded, display of and
escapes but “– –EMG– –” is displayed with inverted.

Current time display
The current time is displayed in units of hour, minute and second.
Example) 16 : 52 : 13
Non–volatile memory write status (@ or space)
“@” is displayed when data is being written in the non–volatile
memory for parameter, tool offset and NC part program etc..
Alarm or label skip status (ALM, BAT, WRN, LSK or ***)
“ALM (inverted blinking display)” is displayed when an alarm
occurs.
“WRN (blinking display)” is displayed when a warning message
is issued on the CRT.
“BAT” is displayed when a signal predicting battery down is sent
out. After changing the battery and pushing the RESET key,
“BAT” is erased.
“LSK” is displayed when tape reader is under label skip status,
and when all of alarm warning and battery alarm does not occur.
“***” is displayed in other cases :
2) Key input display
Data input via the address keys or the numerical keys are displayed
at the left lower part of the screen.
3) Program number, sequence number display
Program number, sequence number is displayed on the right upper
part of the screen.
4) Alarm display
Alarm number and its contents are displayed briefly.
5) Alarm message display
Alarm message contents are displayed.
6) Present position display
Relative position and position in the workpiece coordinates are
displayed in 3–times magnified characters.
7) Total position display
Relative position, position in the workpiece coordinates, position in
the machine coordinate, and remaining move distance are displayed
in one screen.
8) Command value display
The following two displays are performed.
i) Previously commanded modal value (LAST)
ii) Command value to be executed (ACTIVE)
217
9) Setting (parameter set by the operator) display

Displays setting value.
10) Tool offset amount display
Displays offset value. Relative position is also displayed at the same
time.
11) Program display
i) Display of program for editing.
ii) Display of program currently under execution.
iii) Display of program list.
A list of program number, program name, and size of programs
stored in the memory is displayed.
Remaining memory size is also displayed.
12) Parameter display
13) Self diagnosis result display
14) Custom macro variables display
15) Operator message, external operator message, external alarm
message display
16) Actual speed display
i) Actual feedrate per minute (mm/min or inch/min)
ii) Actual spindle speed (rpm)
17) Program check screen
The following are displayed on one screen.
i) Program number on execution
ii) Sequence number on execution
iii) Program text on execution
iv) Current position
v) Modal G codes
vi) Modal M codes
vii) T code
viii) Actual feedrate and spindle speed
ix) Status
Fig. 24.5
218
24.6 The Japanese, English, German, French, Italian, Spanish and Swedish are
prepared as display languages. Select the language to be displayed by
LANGUAGE parameters.
SELECTION
English Japanese
German French
Italian Spanish
Swedish
219
24.7 Series 15 incorporates a clock to display the time in the

hour/minute/second format on each display screen. Some screens allows
CLOCK FUNCTION display of the year, month, and day.
The custom macro system variable can be used to read the time. The time
will be told through the window at PMC side.
24.8 This function displays the integrated power–on time, the integrated cycle
operation time, the integrated cutting time and timer on the CRT display
RUN HOUR & PARTS screen. The integrated cycle operation time, the integrated cutting time
NUMBER DISPLAY and timer can be altered and preset, using the MDI.
In addition to the above, this function displays the count of the total
number of parts machined, the number of parts required and the number
of parts on the CRT screen. Each time M02, M30 or a parameter set M
code is executed, the count of the total in memory is incremented by 1.
If a program is prepared so as to execute M02, M30 or a parameter set M
code each time one part machining is completed, the number of parts
machined can be counted automatically.
If the count of the number of parts reaches the number of parts required,
a signal is output to the PMC side.
It is possible to change and preset the number of parts required and the
number of parts counted, using MDI. The number of parts required and
the number of parts counted can be read and written, using external data
input/output function and custom macro variables.
Fig. 24.8
220
24.9 The load values (torque values) of spindle motor and servo motor are
displayed in bar chart on the CRT. When the 14–inch CRT is used,
LOAD METER fluctuation waveform of load value is also graphically displayed.
DISPLAY
The most recent sampling values and fluctuation status (for one minute)
are displayed in bar chart display and waveform display, respectively. Set
the rated load value of motor corresponding to each load meter to
parameters. The load meter displays 100% when the load value is the
rated load value.
The load meter, position in the workpiece coordinate system, command

rate, real rate, override value, number of cutting parts, and run hour are
displayed on the load meter display screen.
The load meter can be displayed up to three servo motor axes and a
parameter can be used to select any one of three axes.
It is required that the load current of spindle motor should be informed to

the A/D converter of CNC to display the load of spindle motor.
Fig. 24.9 In case of 14″ CRT
221
24.10 Instead of the switches on the machine operator’s panel, on/off commands
of the functions will be made possible via setting on the CRT/MDI. This
MENU SWITCH function will vastly decrease number of switches on the machine
operator’s panel.
On/off commands of the following function are available on the CRT
screen.
1) Single block (SBK)
2) Machine lock (MLK)
3) Display lock (DLK)
4) Auxiliary functions lock (AFL)
5) Dry run (DRN)
6) Optional block skip (BDT 1 – 9)
7) Mirror image (MIX, MIY, MIZ, ...)
8) Z axis ignore (ZNG)
9) Absolute switching (ABS)
Signals from the machine side is still valid with this function. When
corresponding sign commanded “1”, the function will be “on”.
222
24.11 In this function, functions of switches on the machine operator’s panel is

done by operation on the CRT/MDI panel. Mode selection and jogging
SOFTWARE override, etc. can be operated by setting operation via the CRT/MDI panel
OPERATOR’S PANEL with this function, thus allowing commitance of corresponding switches
on the machine operator’s panel.
This function is valid only when the screen is displayed with operator’s
panel. Mode cursor with the cursor operation keys, and select various
operations, viewing the screen.
The following operations can be done via the CRT/MDI panel :
A Mode selection
Manual pulse generator feed axis selection
B Move distance selection per pulse of manual pulse generator
Rapid traverse override
C Jog feedrate speed override
Feedrate override
Optional block skip (Block delete)
Single block
D
Machine block
Dry run
E Memory protect
F Feed hole
Jog/incremental feed axis direction selection
G Manual rapid traverse selection
selection
General–purpose switch : Eight general–purpose switches are
H provided and each of these switches can be named by up to eight
alphanumeric characters.
There is a parameter per groups A – G shown above, which decides

validity of operation function by CRT/MDI panel.
It is possible to disable the display of a switch which is disabled by this
parameter (by parameter setting).
NOTE
With system using two manual pulse generators, axis
selection via the software operator’s panel cannot be
performed.
223
24.12 This function allows display of tool path on the CRT screen, making
program check easier. The following functions are offered.
GRAPHIC DISPLAY
1) Tool path of the machining program can be displayed. Machining
FUNCTION process can be checked just by viewing the tool path drawing on the
CRT screen.
Program check before machining can be done by displaying the
programmed locus on the CRT screen.
2) Display is possible with the XY plane, YZ plane, ZX plane, or
isometric ; scaling of the screen is also possible.
NOTE
14″color CRT/MDI is required.
24.13 A guidance for programming with NC format.

NC FORMAT i) List of G code.
GUIDANCE ii) Standard format of 1 block for G code.
Above guidance can be displayed on the CRT screen. In case if you have
forgotten the G code or G code format, for example, by referring to this
guidance, it eliminates the trouble of referring to the operator’s manual.
Thus, it reduces the programming time.
224
24.14 Standard format of 1 block for G code guidance can be displayed on CRT
screen with figure.
NC FORMAT
GUIDANCE WITH
PICTURE
NOTE
This function is only available for 14″CRT/MDI.
225
24.15 The NC cycle program can be created by selecting the menu displayed on
the CRT or inputting data according to the menu instead of programming
SIMPLE by using the NC format. Namely the programmer selects in the
CONVERSATIONAL processing order those required for the actual cycle from among the
AUTOMATIC menus each representing such turning processes for example drilling
processes as boring, tapping, etc. Furthermore, the data required for each
PROGRAMMING
process, for example the hole position, the hole depth, etc. is asked in the
FUNCTION menu. The programmer can create the program by simply inputting
numeric values in response to these questions.
Basically this function is realized by the custom macro to be created by
each machine tool builder. Since the machine tool builder can freely
decide on the menu of which processes to prepare or how to prepare the
menu of the data required for each cycle, he can utilize a function
incorporating his original processing know–how.
NOTE
1 To order this function, it is also necessary to order the
following options:
i) Custom macro
ii) 80 m of part program storage length
Of the part program storage length, 35 m are used for the
simple conversational programming program
registration area, etc.
Therefore, the part program storage length of a normal
NC format is 35m less than the total length. As these
require the part program storage length of the custom
macro for the cycle which was created by the machine
tool builder, the part program storage length which the
end user can program in the NC format is obtained by
subtracting such a part program storage length.
2 This function is applicable only to the 9″ CRT/MDI. It is not
applicable to the 14″ CRT/MDI.
226
24.16 A data protection key can be installed on the machine side for protection
of various NC data. The following three input signals are offered,
DATA PROTECTION according to type of data to be protected.
KEY 1) KEY 1
Allows input of tool compensation amount and workpiece zero point
offset amount.
2) KEY 2
Allows setting data input, and absolute coordinate value preset.
3) KEY 3
Allows part program input and editing.
24.17 File names in the floppy cassette (FANUC CASSETTE F1) and program
file (FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate can be listed on the CRT display
DIRECTORY (directory display). Each file name of up to 17 letters can be displayed
DISPLAY OF FLOPPY in directory display.
CASSETTE/ Files in the floppy cassette are :
PROGRAM FILE NC command program, NC parameter/pitch error compensation
data, tool compensation data, and etc.
When NC program in part program memory is written into the floppy
cassette, program number can be given to it as a file name. When NC
parameter/pitch error compensation data is written into the floppy
cassette, “PARAM AND PITCH” is given them as a fixed name. When
tool compensation data is written into the floppy cassette, “OFFSET” is
given to it as a fixed name.
227
24.18 Up to 10 machining times counted each main program are displayed on

the program machining time display screen in time, minute, and second.
MACHINING TIME When more than ten programs are operated, programs are discarded in the
STAMP FUNCTION order of older ones.
In the memory operation mode, the time from the initial start to the next
reset or to the M02/M30 can be counted after reset. The execution time
for M, S, T and B functions are added, but the time during operation stop
is not added.
The machining time being displayed can be inserted (stamped) in the

program stored into the memory as comments. The machining time is
inserted after the program number as a comment.
The machining time inserted after the program number can be displayed
instead of the tape length of program (amount of used memory) on the
program directory screen. The display between machining time and tape
length can be selected by the setting.
Since the machining time for each program can be known, it becomes a
valid reference data on process planning at factories.
Machining time display screen
Program directory screen
228
24.19 Programs can be classified and display in each groups such as in

workpiece unit in addition to conventional program directory display
DIRECTORY DISPLAY (directory display) which shows the program numbers and names of all
AND PUNCHING ON registered programs.
EACH GROUP
It is required that the program name of the same group should begin with
the same character string.
With the directory display on each group, when a group name (character
string) to be directory displayed is specified from the MDI, only the
programs whose program names start with the specified group are
directory displayed.
Also, when a group name to be punched is specified from the MDI, the
programs which start with the specified group name are collectively
punched.
Fig. 24.19 (a) Directory display of registered programs
When the program as Fig. 24.19 (a) are registered, if “SHAFT” is set, a
directory shown in Fig. 24.19 (b) is displayed.
Fig. 24.19 (b) Directory display on each group
229
24.20 At times, the operator may want to see the data of two or more CNC
screens at a time. For example :
FUNCTION FOR
D When the operator wants to check the current position simultaneously
DISPLAYING on both the screen for cutter compensation and the screen for the offset
MULTIPLE from the workpiece reference point
SUBSCREENS D When the operator wants to check the current program on the graphic
screen
This function displays subscreens on the main screen.
The current position, current program, cutter compensation value, alarm,
and other data can be displayed on a subscreen. There are very few
restrictions on the data items that can be displayed on a subscreen and on
the position and size of the subscreen. Simple input and editing are
permitted for data on a subscreen. (On the position subscreen, for
example, the origin/preset operation is permitted. On the cutter
compensation subscreen, a compensation value can be input. Program
editing and other complicated operations are not allowed.)
Multiple subscreens are displayed as shown below :
On a single main screen, up to five subscreens can be displayed.

Information describing a displayed subscreen (data items, displayed
position, and size) is stored. These items need not be specified each time
the power is turned on. (Information on subscreens for up to all 30 main
screens can be stored.)
230
24.21 The help function displays detained information about the alarm state of
the CNC unit and soft key operation in a window on the CRT screen. This
HELP FUNCTION function can display the following:
(1) Alarm help
Alarms are issued when the operator makes an error in operating the
CNC unit or a failure occurs in the CNC unit. The help function
explains the cause and location of the error in detail. It also explains
action to be taken to cancel the alarm condition.
(2) Soft key help
The soft keys displayed on the CRT screen depend on the operating
state of the CNC unit. The help function explains in detail the function
of each soft key that is currently displayed. It describes when a soft
key needs to be pressed and what happens to the CNC unit when the
key is pressed.
While operating the CNC unit, the operator can obtain necessary
information from the window on the CRT screen without referring to
the manuals.
24.22 It is possible to specify the parameters for the RS–232–C interface,

remote buffer, and RS–422 interface the same screen.
PARAMETER
SETTING (RS–232–C)
SCREEN
24.23 The parameter for high–speed and high–precision machining can be

specified on this screen. Since data entered in the parameter fields
SCREEN FOR according to the units of measurement displayed on the screen, it is
SPECIFYING unnecessary to specify the units used for each parameter.
HIGH–SPEED AND These parameters can be easily specified using the automatic setting
function and automatic tuning function.
HIGH–PRECISION
Up to three different patterns can be set for these parameters: finishing,
MACHINING medium, and roughing. The pattern to be used for actual machining can
be specified by a program.
231
24.24 This function always collects history data for keys pressed by the NC
operator, the states of signals set by the NC operator, and alarms that
OPERATION HISTORY occurred. In addition, this function enables the operator to monitor
history data when necessary.
The main features of this function are:
(1) Collecting the following history data items:
1. Procedures in which the NC operator presses MDI keys
2. Changes in the states (on or off) of the input/output signals
3. Alarm data
4. Time stamp (time and date)
(2) Searching for the following data items:
1. Input/output signals
2. Alarm data
3. Time and date
(3) Outputting the following data items (punch–out):
1. All history data items
2. A selected range of history data items
(4) Selecting signals
Up to 20 input/output signals can be selected for history data
collection.
(5) Alarm history data check
Details of alarm history data, including the time and date of alarm
occurrence, can be checked.
232
24.25 Waveform diagnosis functions are classified into the following two types:
WAVEFORM (1) Single–shot type
DIAGNOSIS This type of waveform diagnosis function enables graphic display of
waveforms that represent variations in the following data items.
FUNCTION This function can generate triggers for sampling data when a machine
control signal rises or falls. This facilitates the adjustment of servo and
spindle motors.
The collected data can be output via a reader/punch interface.
[Data items for servos]
Servo errors, number of pulses to be generated, torque, electric
current commands, heat simulation, and composite speed for all
axes
[Data items for spindles]
The speed of each spindle and the value of the load meter for each
spindle
[Data items for signals]
On or off states of machine control signals specified by signal
addresses
(2) Servo–alarm type
This type of waveform diagnosis function triggers terminating data
sampling when a servo alarm occurs or when the specified machine
signal rises or falls. The termination of data sampling can be delayed
by a specified time since the trigger is generated, thus facilitating
detection of faults.
Recorded data items can be input or output to or from an external
device using the reader/punch interface.
[Data items for servos]
Servo errors, number of pulses to be generated, torque, electric
current commands, heat simulation, and composite velocity for all
axes
[Data items for spindles]
None
[Data items for signals]
None
233
24.26 The CRT screen saving function clears all data items on the CRT screen
when the power is on and the CRT has not used within a certain period
CRT SCREEN SAVING of time. This function is effective for extending the life of the screen.
FUNCTION (1) Small CRT/MDI Panel
To clear all data items on the CRT screen, press the <SHIFT> and
<CAN> keys simultaneously. To subsequently redisplay data items
on the CRT screen, press any key.
(2) Panels Other than the Small CRT/MDI Panel
To clear all data items on the CRT screen, press any function key and
the <CAN> key simultaneously. To subsequently redisplay data items
on the CRT screen, press any key.
The following function keys can be used.
POS PROG OFFSET P–CHECK
SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE OTHERS
24.27 M codes that have been executed, or which are being executed, are
displayed in groups by specifying the group number (up to 127) for each
M–CODE GROUP M code and their function name, either on the M–code group setting
FUNCTION screen or in a program. This function enables the display, on the screen,
of the M function being used by the machine. In addition, the last M code
is output for each group by the program restart M, S, T, and B code output
function. The M–code group function also checks the validity of a
combination of up to five M codes, specified in a block.
24.28 A workpiece origin offset value can be specified on the workpiece origin
offset screen, so that the current position becomes a new workpiece origin
WORKPIECE ZERO or a specified position.
POINT MANUAL
SETTING FUNCTION
234
24.29 If the operator does not enter anything from the keyboard for a preset
period, the screen saver function automatically erases the current display
SCREEN SAVER and calls the saver screen. The previous screen is retrieved if:
FUNCTION – The operator presses a key on the keyboard or on the PMC.
– An alarm is newly issued.
– An operator message is newly issued.
– The operation mode is switched.
– The saver return signal goes high.
Saver screen
The screen that appears when the screen saver function operates (saver
screen) is shown below. The display of the current time moves from
left to right and from top to bottom, after erasing the current screen,
which remains unupdated.
<< 11:22:33 >>
235
25. PART PROGRAM STORAGE
AND EDITING NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
25 PART PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING
236
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS AND EDITING
25.1 The following part program storage and editing is possible

FOREGROUND 1) Program tape registration to the memory
S Single program registration
EDITING S Multi program tape registration
S Additional program registration to registered program
2) Program input via MDI
3) Program deletion
S Single program deletion
S All programs deletion
4) Program punching
S Single program punching
S All programs punching
5) Program editing
a) Change
S Word change
S Change of 1-word to multi-words
b) Insertion
S Word insertion
S Multi words, and multi blocks insertion
c) Deletion
S Word deletion
S Deletion to EOB
S Deletion to the specified word
6) Part program collation
Collation of program stored in the memory and program on the tape
can be done.
25.2 Part program storage and editing can be done during machining. The
same functions as foreground editing can be performed.
BACKGROUND
EDITING
237
25.3 The following editing is possible.

EXPANDED PART 1) Conversion
PROGRAM EDITING a) Address conversion
An address in the program can be converted to another address. For
example address X in the program can be converted to address Y.
b) Word conversion
A word in the program can be converted to another word. For
example, a programmed M03 can be converted to M04.
2) Program copy
A program can be copied to make a new program.
a) Copy of all the program
b) Copy of part of a program
3) Program move
A program can be moved to make a new program.
4) Program merge
A new program can be created by merging two programs.
5) Copy and move to the key–in buffer
A part of a program can be copied or moved to the key–in buffer.
6) Sequence number automatic insertion
The sequence number, where a certain increment value is added to the
sequence number of the previous block can be automatically inserted
at the head of each block in preparation of programs by the part
program editing.
25.4 Number of registered programs can be selected from the following:

100/400/1000
NUMBER OF
REGISTERED
PROGRAMS
238
25.5 The following part program storage length can be selected:

80/160/320/640/1280/2560/5120m
PART PROGRAM
STORAGE LENGTH NOTE
Part program storage length may decrease according to
options selected.
1) Custom macro common variables

Table 25.5 (a) Common variables and
shortened part program length
Shortened part
Common variable Remarks
program length
Common variable A 0m #100 to #149, #500 to #549
Common variable B 0m #100 to #199, #500 to #599
Common variable C 2.2m #100 to #199, #500 to #699
Common variable D 7.4m #100 to #199, #500 to #599
2) Number of offset pairs

Table 25.5 (b) Offset pairs and shortened part program length
Shortened
Offset
Offset pairs part program Notes
memory
length
A 32 0m No differences between
geometry/wear
99 0m No differences between
cutter diameter/tool
200 1.5m length
499 4.4m
999 10.3m
B 32 0m Differences between
geometry/wear
99 1.5m No differences between
cutter diameter/tool
200 3.7m length
499 10.3m
999 22.0m
C 32 0m Differences between
geometry/wear
99 3.7m Differences between cut-
ter diameter/tool length
200 8.1m
499 22.0m
999 44.7m
239
3) Tool life management

– Part program length shortens by 5.9m. In case of 512 groups of tool
life management, the part program length shortens by 45m.
4) Tool offset by tool number
The part program length shortens by 14m.
5) Additional workpiece coordinate system
The part program storage length shortens by 4.4m.
25.6 Program can be prepared by storing machine position obtained by manual

operation in the memory as program position. Data other than the
PLAY BACK coordinate value (M codes, G codes, feedrates, etc.) are registered in the
memory by the same operation as part program storage and editing.
240
25.7 It is possible to memorize the cutting feedrate override and spindle speed
override effected during execution of a program and to operate the
OVERRIDE FANUC 10/11/12 according to the override memorized.
PLAY BACK
The storage of override is called teaching and the operation with
memorized override is called playback.
The teaching can be made during memory operation only. When the
teaching of override is commanded during memory operation, the
override value in the following format can be stored after the command
of block which is currently being executed in memory.
(Command of block which is currently executed)
––––––––––––––, LIF ––– R –––, LIS ––– ;
or
––––––––––––––, LIF ––– R ––– S ––– ;
, where
, L1 : Command of override value
F –––: Cutting feed rate override value (0 to 254, unit of 1%)
R–––: Distance of long axis to the end point for linear line
unit: Least input increment of standard axis unit
Center angle to the end point of an arc Unit: angle (standard axis
unit IS–A: 0.01 deg, IS–B: 0.001 deg, IS–C: 0.0001 deg)
If the remaining distance of the long axis or the remaining center
angle of a circular arc becomes the value commanded by R or less
during the playback operation, the commanded feedrate override
value become valid.
S–––: Spindle speed override value (50 to 120, unit of 1%)
During the playback operation, the spindle override value
commanded from the start of the block become valid.
When the override is memorized for several times during executing one
block, the last override value is memorized.
The override value added to the last of block can be edited by the part
program edit operation in the similar manner as other commands.
When the memorized (teaching) program is operated by override, the
operation (playback) can be performed by the memorized feedrate
override and spindle speed override. The memorized override value is
valid immediately until the next override is received. In the override
playback operation, set the override switch on the operator’s panel to
100%.
In other setting, the override value commanded by the program is
multiplied by the override value of the switch on the operator panel.
The override playback can be performed in all automatic (MEMORY,
MDI, TAPE) operations.
The teaching can be performed using the MDI keys or using the switches
and buttons added to the machine operator’s panel. When it is performed
on the machine operator’s panel, it is required that the BMI interface be
used.
The spindle speed binary output or analog output function is required to
perform the teaching/playback of spindle speed override.
241
25.8 Part program registration and punch can be commanded externally.

EXTERNAL I/O 1) Program registration
A part program can be registered in memory through the input device
DEVICE CONTROL selected for foreground editing (in case of part program edit mode) or
through the input device selected for background editing (in case of
other than part program edit mode) using the external read start signal.
2) Program punch
A part program can be punched through the output device selected for
foreground editing (in case of part program edit mode) or through the
output device selected for background editing (in case of other than
part program edit mode) using the external punch start signal.
25.9 This function speeds up the registration of part programs in the

foreground mode (EDIT mode). In the background mode, part programs
HIGH–SPEED PART are registered at normal speed.
PROGRAM
REGISTRATION
FUNCTION
25.10 Function selection can be performed with not only soft keys, but also with
the following hard keys:
FUNCTION
SELECTION WITH
HARD KEYS POS PROG OFFSET P–CHECK
SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE OTHERS
These hard keys correspond to the following function selection items:

POS : Current position
PROG : Program
OFFSET : Offset
P–CHECK : Program check
SETTING : Setting
SERVICE : Service
MESSAGE : Message
OTHERS : Screen selected by parameter No.2215
25.11 The multi–edit function allows two programs to be edited at the same time
by displaying them in the left right halves of the program text screen.
MULTI–EDIT
FUNCTION
242
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 26. DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
26

243
26. DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
26.1 The NC checks the following itself.

SELF DIAGNOSIS 1) Abnormality of detection system
2) Abnormality of position control unit
FUNCTIONS
3) Abnormality of servo system
4) Overheat
5) Abnormality of CPU
6) Abnormality of ROM
7) Abnormality of RAM
8) Abnormality in data transfer between CRT/MDI
9) Abnormality of part program storage memory
10) Abnormality in tape reader read function
11) Abnormality in data transfer between PMC
Signals from position coder, input/output signals, and inner status of the
NC can be displayed on the CRT screen.
26.2 As computer technology has developed, research and development of

Artificial Intelligence (AI) has greatly progressed in various fields. There
TROUBLE are many AI applications such as automatic translation, picture
DIAGNOSIS recognition, audio recognition, and intelligent robots. Among these
GUIDANCE applications, expert systems have already reached the most practical
level.
Series 15 introduced this expert system as a numeric controller for the first
time in the world. This expert system is used for trouble diagnosis of the
CNC machining tool. The trouble diagnosis guidance function of Series
15 has various features as shown below.
1) By storing know–how of experts who master troubleshooting and
measures against various troubles occurring in the machine in the
CNC memory, the reasoning engine built into the CNC troubleshoots
the trouble cause of the machine based on the stored know–how in the
same process used by the experts.
2) The operator may only perform simple conversational operations such
as inputting the trouble phenomena through the CRT/MDI unit and
answering questions given from the CNC if necessary, while the CNC
diagnoses the trouble instead of an expert.
3) The functions for reading data in the control unit which are the
parameter contents and the command values such as the feedrate and
G code and the data transferred between the machine and the control
unit, can be built into the know–how data base to allow establishment
of the advanced and realtime trouble diagnosis.
4) Various commands for graphic display can also be built into the
know–how data base. The questions and the instruction of the trouble
cause given to the operator can be made easy to understand by
illustrating the machine parts on the screen with these graphic display
commands.
5) The expert know–how can be programmed in easy descriptions using
the FANUC MMC. The rule for expressing the know–how is
prescribed in an easy–to–understand format called a production rule
“If...THEN...” The know–how described in the program is stored in
the CNC know–how data base after being converted into the object
format on the FANUC MMC.
244
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 26. DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
6) Each know–how can be handled as an independent module to allow

easy addition, correction, and deletion of know–how.
7) The trouble diagnosis contents can be changed by changing the
know–how data base contents only to enable construction of the
original trouble diagnosis experts system meeting the needs of each
machine.
Series 15
Machine
tools
CRT/MDI Reasoning engine
Operator
D Backward
reasoning
Know–how data base
D Production tool
(IF – THEN ...)
D Functions to
retrieve internal
status (such as
I/O signals,
parameters, and
command values)
FANUC MMC
D Programming the expert Experts

know–how in simple
descriptions.
D Converting the program
into the object know–how
Floppy disk data base object program
245
27. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
27 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
The NC has the following input/output data.

These data are input/output via various input/output devices as
CRT/MDI, tape reader, etc.
1) Input data
The NC has the following input data.
– Part program
– Tool compensation amount, Workpiece zero point offset amount
– Tool life management data
– Setting data
– Parameters
2) Output data
The NC has the following output data.
– Part program
– Tool compensation amount, Workpiece zero point offset amount
– Setting data
– Parameters
246
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 27. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
27.1
TAPE READER
27.1.1
Tape Reader without 1) Reading speed 300 ch/sec (60Hz) or 250 ch/sec (50Hz)
Reels 2) Reading method Opto–electrical (LED)
3) Tape capacity 20m
(When installed inside the control unit cabinet)
27.1.2
Tape Reader with Reels 1) Reading speed 300 ch/sec "10% (50/60Hz)
2) Winding speed 600 ch/sec "10% (50/60Hz)
3) Read method Opto–electrical (LED)
4) Reel capacity Reel radius 187mm dia.
150m of tape (tape thickness 0.108mm) windable
5) Tape capacity 20m
(When installed inside the control unit cabinet)
6) Tape rewinding function
Automatically rewinds up to % (ISO code) or ER
(EIA code) by M30 command.
(This feature is effective with reels.)
In case of free standing type cabinet or built–in type 2 cabinet, a tape

reader can be mounted in the cabinet.
In case of built–in type 1, unbundled type or panel mount type cabinet,
it must be installed on the machine side.
The following tape can be used in this NC.
Table 27. 1. 2 Specification of paper tapes used in the CNC
Item Tape reader with/without reels
1 Kind of tape 8–channel paper tape (Mylar tape cannot

be used)
2 Light transmission rate 40% or less

(Transmission light)
100%
(including light)
3 Color of tape Any color is usable as long as light trans-

mission percentage is 40% or less (black,
grey, blue, pink, white).
4 Standard Material JIS C 6243 or EIA RS–227–A or ISO 1729

(Provided that light transmission rate of
item 2 is satisfied).
Dimensions and JIS C 6246 or EIA RS–227–A or ISO 1154

locations of hole
247
27. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
27.2 The following can be input/output via the reader/puncher interface.

READER/PUNCHER a) Part program registration
INTERFACES b) Tool offset amount, workpiece zero point offset amount, tool life
management data input
c) Parameter input
d) Part program punch
e) Tool offset amount punch
f) Parameter punch
27.3 The following Input/Output devices are prepared, which are connectable
to the reader/puncher interface.
INPUT/OUTPUT
DEVICES
27.3.1 Data can be stored in this floppy cassette. NC data can also be input from
FANUC FLOPPY this cassette. Used with FANUC Cassette Adaptor 3.
CASSETTE Outer dimensions : 90 94 33 (mm)
Weight : 24g
Memory Capacity : Equivalent to 770m of tape length
27.3.2 The portable tape reader is a carrying type paper tape reader. Used to load
Portable Tape Reader program, data, and parameter to the NC. The main feature of the portable
tape reader is as follows: For the outline dimensions, refer to Appendix
F.
Read speed : 300 ch/sec (60Hz), 250 ch/sec (50Hz)
Read method : Opto–electrical (LED)
Interface with the NC : Reader/puncher interface
27.3.3 The built–in hard disk enables data to be stored and it can be connected
FANUC PROGRAM to the reader/puncher interface to input data to CNC. This hard disk has
a large storage capacity of approximately 50,000m of paper tape data, so
FILE Mate it can register maximum 1024 command programs.
It can be connected to the remote buffer to achieve high–speed transfer of
maximum 86.4 kbps.
The hard disk is sealed to be continuously used under the factory
environment.
27.3.4 The FANUC Handy File is a compact multifunctional input/output floppy

FANUC Handy File disk unit for use with various types of FA equipment. Programs can be
transferred or edited through operations performed directly on the Handy
file or through remote operation from connected equipment.
Compared with media such as paper tape, a 3.5″ floppy disk is both
compact and durable, and eliminates noise during input/output.
Programs with a total capacity of up to 1.44 MB (equivalent to about 3600
m paper tape) can be saved on a single floppy dick.
248
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 28. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
28 SAFETY FUNCTIONS
249
28. SAFEYT FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
28.1 With the emergency stop, all commands stops, and the machine stops
immediately. Connect the “emergency stop” signal both to the control
EMERGENCY STOP unit and to the servo unit side.
When emergency stop is commanded, servo excitation is also reset, and
servo ready signal will also turn off. Move distance of the machine will
still be reflected in the actual position and machine position will not be
lost (Follow up function). After resetting the emergency stop, operation
can thus be continued without need of another reference point return.
Whether to reset the NC by emergency stop or to rise an alarm without
resetting, is selected by parameter.
250
28.2
OVERTRAVEL
FUNCTIONS
28.2.1 When the movable section has gone beyond the stroke end, a signal is
Overtravel output, the axis decelerates to a stop, and overtravel alarm is displayed.
All directions on all axes has overtravel signals.
28.2.2 The movable section of the machine is parameter set in machine

Stored Stroke Check 1 coordinates value. If the machine moves beyond the preset range, it
decelerates to a stop and alarm is displayed. (This function is valid after
manual reference position return at power on.)
This function can be used instead of hardware overtravel limit switch.
When both is equipped with, both are valid.
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(X1, Y1, Z1, ...)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
The shaded part is
the inhibition area.
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(X2, Y2, Z2, ...)
This function can be used instead of hardware overtravel limit switch.

When both is equipped with, both are valid.
28.2.3 An inhibition area can be specified inside or outside an area set by setting
Stored Stroke Check 2 data or by program. Command distance from the machine coordinates
zero point for limit positions. This function is valid after manual
(G22, G23) (M Series) reference position return right after the power on. When specifying the
limits with program, limits or axes X, Y, Z can be set.
The inhibition area can be changed according to the workpiece. The
parameter decides whether the inhibition area is outside or inside the
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
specified area.
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ (X, Y, Z)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ (X, Y, Z)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(I, J, K)
Inhibition area outside

(I, J, K)
Inhibition area inside
On/off of stored stroke check 2 is commanded by program as follows:

G22: Stored stroke check function on
G23: Stored stroke check function off
Format
G22 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ ;
251
28.2.4 Before starting block move, end point coordinate value is checked
Stroke Check before according to actual position of the machine and commanded move
distance, to check whether machine will move in the inhibition area of
Move stored stroke check 1 or 2. If machine will invade the inhibition area, the
machine is stopped right after move in the block starts and an alarm is
displayed.
This function checks whether the end point of the block invades the
inhibition area, but checking of the whole path is not done. When the
machine enters the inhibition area in the half way, an alarm will arise by
stored stroke check 1 or 2.
Example 1)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
End
point
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Stored stroke
check 2 inhibition
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
area
Start
point
Stop at point (a) by stored stroke check 2
Example 2)
Stored stroke
check 2 inhibition
area
End
point
Start Stopped right after move started,

point by input range checking.
Fig. 28.2.4
252
28.3
INTERLOCK
28.3.1 Axis feed commanded to each axis can be stopped separately. If interlock
Interlock per Axis is commanded to any of the moving axis during cutting feed, all axes of
the machine movement will decelerate to a stop. When interlock signal
is reset, the moving starts.
28.3.2 Feed of all axes can be inhibited. When all axes interlock is commanded
All Axes Interlock during move, it decelerates and stops. When all axes interlock signal is
reset, the moving restarts.
28.3.3 Feed of all axes in the automatic operation can be inhibited. When
Automatic Operation automatic operation all axes interlock is commanded during move, it
decelerates to a complete stop. When the automatic operation all axes
All Axes Interlock interlock is reset, move restart .
28.3.4 Start of the next block can be inhibited during automatic operation. Block
Block Start Interlock already started will continue to execute to the end. When block start
interlock is reset, execution starts from the next block.
28.3.5 Start of blocks with move commands other than positioning can be
Cutting Block Start inhibited.
When cutting block start interlock is reset, execution of the next block is
Interlock restarted.
In case when spindle rotation was activated, or when spindle speed was
changed, cutting can be done in the correct speed by commanding cutting
block start interlock till the spindle accelerates to the commanded speed.
253
28.4 Feedrate can be decelerated by an external deceleration signal from the

machine side. A feedrate after deceleration can be set by parameter.
EXTERNAL External deceleration is prepared every axis and every direction.
DECELERATION When the tool is to be moved in the reverse direction ,futile time may not
be wasted since no external deceleration is applied.
Conditions to make this signal effective are set by parameters:
1) Whether this signal is applied to rapid traverse only or to all feeds.
2) Whether external deceleration in the + direction is made effective
(each axis).
3) Whether external deceleration in the – direction is made effective
(each axis).
This function allows the maximum of valid strokes and keeps shock to the
machine to a minimum, to stops at stroke end. This function is also useful
when overtravel of the machine from the stroke end in, for example, ATC
reference points, must e kept to a minimum.
254
28.5 This function is divided into two parts, as described below.

UNEXPECTED D Unexpected disturbance torque detection function
DISTURBANCE 1. Estimated–load torque output function
The CNC is constantly estimating the load torque, which does not
TORQUE DETECTION include the motor torque necessary for acceleration/deceleration.
FUNCTION Enabling the estimated–load torque output function makes it
possible to read this data from the PMC by using a window
function.
2. Unexpected disturbance torque detection alarm function
If a load torque obtained by using the estimated–load torque
detection function is larger than a value specified in a parameter,
the unexpected disturbance torque detection alarm function causes
the motor to stop or reverse by an amount specified in a parameter,
then causes the CNC to output an alarm; reversing is possible only
in the case of servo motors.
The parameters used with the unexpected disturbance torque detection
function are described below.
(1) Servo axis
Unexpected disturbance torque detection function available
Bit 0 of parameter
Unexpected disturbance torque detection function to be used? No. 1958 = 0
No
Yes
Bit 0 of parameter No. 1958 = 1
Only the estimated–load torque

Unexpected disturbance torque detection alarm function to be used? output function is enabled.
No
Yes
Set bit 5 of parameter No. 1957 to 1 to observe load torque
<Adjustment>
Set up parameters 1738, 1862, 1863, 1996, and 1997
Reset bit 5 of parameter No. 1957 to 0
Both the estimated–load torque output and unexpected disturbance torque detection alarm functions are enabled.
255
(2) Spindle axis
Unexpected disturbance torque detection function available
Set up parameters 3391, 3392, 3393, and 3394

(or 3611, 3612, 3613, and 3614 for the second spindle)
Only the estimated–load torque

Unexpected disturbance torque detection alarm function to be used? output function is enabled.
No
Yes
Set up parameter 3485 (or parameter 3705 for the second spindle)
Both the estimated–load torque output and unexpected disturbance torque detection alarm functions are enabled.
256
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 29. STATUS OUTPUT
29
257
29. STATUS OUTPUT NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
29.1 This signal is sent to the machine side when NC power is on and control
becomes possible. Sending of this signal will be stopped when NC power
NC READY SIGNAL is turned off.
29.2 This signal is sent to the machine side when the servo system becomes
operatable. Axes necessary to be braked must be braked when this signal
SERVO READY is not sent.
SIGNAL
29.3 This signal shows that tape reader or main program in memory is
rewinding.
REWINDING SIGNAL
29.4 This signal is transmitted when the NC comes under an alarm status.
Alarm type signal is also sent out.
ALARM SIGNAL By this alarm type signal, differences between the “overtravel alarm”,
“over heat alarm”, “servo alarm”, “program error alarm” or “control unit
abnormality alarm” are distinguished.
29.5 This signal is sent out when pulse distribution of the M, S, T, or B

functions has ended, so that they can be used after move of the
DISTRIBUTION END commanded block ends.
SIGNAL
29.6 This signal is sent out when it is under automatic operation.
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION SIGNAL
29.7 This signal is sent out when automatic operation is being activated.
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION START
LAMP SIGNAL
29.8 This signal is sent out when automatic operation is held by feed hold.
FEED HOLD SIGNAL
29.9 This signal is sent out to show that the NC has been reset.
RESET SIGNAL
29.10 This signal shows that an axis is under inposition status. This signal is
output for all axes.
INPOSITION SIGNAL
29.11 This signal shows that an axis is moving. This signal is sent out for every
axis.
MOVE SIGNAL This move signal can be combined with the interlock signal to
automatically clamp and unclamp the machine, or control on/off of the
lubricating oil.
258
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 29. STATUS OUTPUT
29.12 This signal is output to show move direction of each axis. This signal is
output for each axis.
AXIS MOVE
DIRECTION SIGNAL
29.13 This signal shows that the move command is done under rapid traverse.
RAPID TRAVERSING
SIGNAL
29.14 This signal is output to show that the machine is under tapping mode
(G63) or tapping cycle (G74,G84) is under operation.
TAPPING SIGNAL
29.15 This signal shows that the machine is under thread cutting mode (G33).
THREAD CUTTING
SIGNAL
29.16 This signal shows that the machine is under constant surface speed control
mode (G96).
CONSTANT SURFACE
SPEED CONTROL
SIGNAL
29.17 This signal shows that input is done under inch input mode (G20).
INCH INPUT SIGNAL
29.18 To inform the exterior of the states of menu switch, software operator’s
panel,which are set via CRT/MDI, and machine operator’s panel,
DI STATUS OUTPUT following DI state output signals are sent.
SIGNAL – Mode selection signal
– Signal block signal
– Manual absolute on/off signal
– Dry run signal
– Machine lock signal
– Display lock signal
– Auxiliary function lock signal
– Option block skip signal
– Mirror image signal
259
30. EXTERNAL DATA INPUT/OUTPUT NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
30 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
The external data input/output function allows NC operation by data sent

from outside the NC (for example from the machine side).
The following external data input/output are available.
1) External tool compensation
2) External program number search
3) External sequence number search
4) External workpiece coordinate system shift
5) External machine coordinate system compensation
6) External alarm message
7) External operator message
8) External custom macro variable value input
9) External tool offset amount output
10) External program number output
11) External sequence number output
12) External workpiece coordinate system shift amount output
13) External machine coordinate system compensation amount output
14) External custom macro variable value output
260
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 30. EXTERNAL DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
30.1 In this function, offset number is specified from outside to change tool
offset amount.
EXTERNAL TOOL The input signal designates whether the input tool offset amount is:
COMPENSATION – absolute or incremental
– geometry offset or tool wear offset
– cutter radius compensation amount or tool length compensation
amount
When 0 was specified for offset number, the offset number currently
selected for use is selected.
If the machine is equipped with automatic measurement devices of tools
and workpiece, error can be input to the NC with this function.
External tool compensation amount range is:
0 – 999999
in least command increment.
30.2 A program number from 1 – 9999 can be given from outside to the NC
to call the corresponding program from the NC memory.
EXTERNAL In machines with automatic loading function of various workpiece, this
PROGRAM NUMBER function can be used to automatically select and execute program suitable
SEARCH to the workpiece.
30.3 A sequence number from 1 – 99999 is given from outside to the NC, and
the sequence number is searched from the current selected program.
EXTERNAL
SEQUENCE
NUMBER SEARCH
30.4 The workpiece coordinate system can be shifted for the shift amount
given from outside.
EXTERNAL The input signal specifies whether the input shift amount is:
WORKPIECE – absolute or increment
COORDINATE – for which axis
SYSTEM SHIFT – for which workpiece coordinate system (G54 – G59), or for all
coordinate systems
This shift amount is not lost by power off.
The shift amount range is:
0 – 99999999
in least command increment.
261
30. EXTERNAL DATA INPUT/OUTPUT NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
30.5 The machine coordinate system is compensated by offset amount given

from outside. This offset amount always take absolute value; never an
EXTERNAL MACHINE increment value.
COORDINATE The offset amount range is:
SYSTEM 0 – 9999
COMPENSATION in detection unit.
When offset amount is input, the actual machine move distance is the
difference between the previous offset amount and current offset amount.
This function is used to compensate the machine coordinate system error
caused by mechanical deformation.
30.6 By sending alarm number from outside, the NC is brought to an alarm

status; an alarm message is sent to the NC, and the message is displayed
EXTERNAL ALARM on the CRT screen of the NC. Reset of alarm status is also done with
MESSAGE external data.
Up to 4 alarm numbers and messages can be sent at a single time. Alarm
numbers 0 – 999 can be sent to the NC, though the NC will display the
number with an“EX” to distinguish from the internal numbers.
Up to 30 characters of alarm message can be sent with a single alarm
number.
30.7 Message to the operator is given from outside the NC, and the message
is displayed on the CRT screen.
EXTERNAL The message is sent after the operator message number (0 – 999). Up to
OPERATORS 4 messages with message numbers can be sent at a single time.
MESSAGE The message numbers 0 – 99 are displayed on the CRT screen along with
the message. An “EX” is put before the number when displayed on the
screen.
Message numbers 100 – 999 will not be displayed on the CRT screen;
only the messages will be displayed on the CRT screen without the
numbers.
Maximum 128 characters can be used for a single message. An external
data will clear the operator messages.
30.8 By Specifying Custom Macro Variable Value Input

EXTERNAL CUSTOM By specifying custom macro common variable number from outside, the
MACRO VARIABLE variable value can be changed. Variable value of 0 – 99999999 can be
input.
VALUE INPUT
30.9 A specified offset number of the tool offset amount can be output by a
request from outside the NC. When 0 is specified as offset number, the
EXTERNAL TOOL currently selected offset number will be output.
OFFSET AMOUNT
OUTPUT
30.10 Main program number currently under execution can be output by an

external request.
EXTERNAL
PROGRAM NUMBER
OUTPUT
262
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 30. EXTERNAL DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
30.11 Sequence number of the currently executed block can be output by an

external request.
EXTERNAL
SEQUENCE NUMBER
OUTPUT
30.12 Offset amount of the specified axis in the specified workpiece coordinate
system can be output by an external request. When 0 is specified as the
EXTERNAL workpiece coordinate system number, the currently selected coordinate
WORKPIECE system number will be output.
COORDINATE
SYSTEM SHIFT
AMOUNT OUTPUT
30.13 Compensation amount of the specified axis in the specified machine

coordinate system can be output by an external request.
EXTERNAL MACHINE
COORDINATE
SYSTEM
COMPENSATION
AMOUNT OUTPUT
30.14 Variable value of the specified common variable number can be output by
an external request.
EXTERNAL CUSTOM
MACRO VARIABLE
VALUE OUTPUT
263
31. EXTERNAL WORKPIECE
NUMBER SEARCH NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
31 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH
By specifying workpiece numbers of 01 – 31 externally (from the

machine side, etc.), program corresponding to the workpiece number can
be selected.
The workpiece number and the program is corresponded in either of the
following methods according to parameter selection.
1) The workpiece number equals the program number.
For example when workpiece number 21 is specified, program, O0021
is selected.
2) The first 2 digits of the program number is optional, and the last 2
digits, the workpiece number.
3) The first 2 digits of the program number is the parameter set number,
and the last 2 digits the workpiece number.
264
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 32. MACHINE INTERFACE
32 MACHINE INTERFACE
265
32. MACHINE INTERFACE NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
32.1 All functions of the Series 15 can be used with this interface.
BASIC MACHINE
INTERFACE (BMI)
32.2 This interface is compatible with the SYSTEM 3M.
There are limits to functions.
3M INTERFACE
32.3 This interface is compatible with the SYSTEM 6M.

There are limits to functions. When used with connection unit, physical
6M INTERFACE interface will be the same as the SYSTEM 6M.
266
33. PROGRAMMABLE MACHINE
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS CONTROLLER (PMC–NA/NB)
33 PROGRAMMABLE MACHINE CONTROLLER

(PMC–NA/NB)
Magnetic sequence circuit of the machine side can be incorporated in the

CNC.
With Series 15, maximum input of 1024 points and output of 1024 points
can be processed.
I/O Link dealing I/O Link dealing I/O Link dealing

connection unit I/O Unit operator’s panel
connection unit
Maximum input point 192 points 1024 points 96 points
Maximum output point 128 points 1024 points 64 points
User Select Ladder; 8000 steps

rogram
program one of
steps these Ladder; 16000 steps, Memory only for C language/
(PMC–NA) options. PASCAL; 40 KB
Ladder; 16000 steps, Memory only for C language/

PASCAL; 168 KB

PASCAL; 424 KB

PASCAL; 936 KB
User Select Ladder; 8000 steps

rogram
program one of
steps these Ladder; 24000 steps
(PMC NB)
(PMC–NB) options
options.
Ladder; 24000 steps, Memory only for C language;
128 KB

384 KB

896 KB
In addition to ladder diagrams, program sequences can also be written in

C or Pascal, thus allowing more complex control. Note that Pascal can
be used for PMC–NA only.
NOTE
For the dedicated Pascal area, specify PMC control B
function as the basic option.
267
CONTROLLER (PMC–NA/NB) NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
33.1 There are two types of PMC instructions, basic and functional.
PMC INSTRUCTION 1) Basic instruction
Basic instructions are used most extensivly in the design of sequence
program and command to perform one–bit operations, such as AND,
or OR, there are 12 types.
The mnemonic language is as follows:
RD, RD.NOT, WRT, WRT.NOT,
AND, AND.NOT, OR, OR.NOT,
RD.STK, RD.NOT.STK,
ADN.STK, OR.STK
SET, RST (PMC–NB only)
2) Functional instruction
Functional instructions ease programming of machine interfaces that
are difficult to program with basic instructions. 55 kinds of function
instruction is prepared in PMC–NA. 68 kinds of function instruction
is prepared in PMC–NB. See the following table.
No Symbol Function
1 END 1 First level program end
2 END 2 Second level program end
3 END 3 Third level program end
4 TMR Timer processing
5 TMRB Fixed timer processing
6 TMRC Timer processing
7 DEC Decoding
8 DECB Binary decoding
9 CTR Counter processing
10 CTRC Counter processing
11 ROT Rotation control
12 ROTB Binary rotation control
13 COD Code conversion
14 CODB Binary code conversion
15 MOVE Data transfer after AND
16 MOVOR Data transfer after OR
17 COM Common line control
18 COME Common line control end
19 JMP Jump
20 JMPE Jump end
21 PARI Parity check
268
No Symbol Function
22 DCNV Data conversion
23 DCNVB Extended data conversion
24 COMP Comparison
25 COMPB Binary comparison
26 COIN Coincidence check
27 SFT Shift register
28 DSCH Data search
29 SDCHB Binary data search
30 XMOV Indexed data transfer
31 XMOVB Binary indexed data transfer
32 ADD Addition
33 ADDB Binary addition
34 SUB Subtraction
35 SUBB Binary subtraction
36 MUL Multiplication
37 MULB Binary multiplication
38 DIV Division
39 DIVE Binary division
40 NUME Constant definition
41 NUMEB Binary constant definition
42 DISP Message display
43 DISPB Extended message display
44 EXIN External data input
45 POS1 (*1) Simple positioning module control
46 POS2 (*1) Positioning module control
47 POSDP (*1) Positioning module status data read
48 POSDO (*1) Positioning module control data output
49 SPCNT Spindle control
50 MONI (*1) Monitor control
51 WINDR Window data read
52 WINDW Window data write
53 LIBRY (*1) Library
269
CONTROLLER (PMC–NA/NB) NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
No Symbol Function
54 LEND (*1) Library end
55 FNC9X optional function command (X=0 * 7)
56 MOVB (*2) Transfer of 1 byte
57 MOVW (*2) Transfer of 2 byte
58 MOVN (*2) Transfer of an arbitrary number of bytes
59 JMPB (*2) Label jump1
60 JMPC (*2) Label jump2
61 LBL (*2) Label
62 MMC3R (*2) MMC3 window data read
63 MMC3W (*2) MMC3 window data write
64 MMCWR (*2) MMC window data read
65 MMCWW (*2) MMC window data write
66 DIFU (*2) Rising edge detection
67 DIFD (*2) Falling edge detection
68 EOR (*2) Exclusive OR
69 AND (*2) Logical AND
70 OR (*2) Logical OR
71 NOT (*2) Logical NOT
72 END (*2) End of a subprogram
73 CALL (*2) Conditional subprogram call
74 CALLU (*2) Unconditional subprogram call
75 SP (*2) Subprogram
76 SPE (*2) End of a subprogram
(*1) : It is effective only in PMC–NA.

(*2) : It is effective only in PMC–NB.
270
33.2 In addition to the former PMC functions, a large window between the
PMC and the NC is offered, for the machine tool builders to make
NC WINDOW software and incorporate abundant new know–hows. The following
functions are available in the PMC through the window.
– Read of MDI key data.
– Display of data on the CRT.
– Use of the non–volatile memory.
– Read of NC data.
Machine position, skip position, servo delay amount, acceleration/
deceleration delay amount, custom macro variables, parameter value,
feedrate, diagnosis value, alarm number, tool offset data, modal data.
– Change of NC data
Manual pulse generator interruption amount, custom macro variables,
parameter value, feedrate, tool offset data.
– Format conversion of CNC command programs
– Input/output of CNC command programs
– Input/output of data through reader/puncher interfaces
33.3
NC WINDOW B The PMC can process the following operations through the window.
1) Read out of tool management data
2) Graphic drawing
33.4 By allowing input signals from the PMC side to the CNC side to turn to
and off, the same operation as operating keys on the CRT/MDI panel can
KEY INPUT FROM be performed.
PMC The following applications are possible, for instance. After allowing to
travel the tool at an arbitrary machining position by using the playback
function (option), when to store its positions as the program command,
X, Y, Z, INSERT, etc. must be input via key operations. However, these
operations can be realized simply by depressing a switch on the operator’s
panel at the machine side. Namely, just like same effects can be obtained
by allowing key input signals such as X, Y, Z, INSERT, etc. to turn
ON/OFF at the PMC side, when a switch is depressed.
33.5 The PMC parameters can be output through the reader/puncher interface.
Also, he output tape can be read for setting the parameter again.
OUTPUT AND
SETTING OF PMC
PARAMETERS
271
34. MAN MACHINE CONTROL (MMC)
(ONLY 150–MB) NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
34 MAN MACHINE CONTROL (MMC) (ONLY 150–MB)
Machine tool builders can incorporate highly advanced man–machine

interface functions such as conversational automatic programming or
conversational operation based on much knowhow.
272
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS (ONLY 150–MB)
34.1
HARDWARE Item Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS Processor 32–bit microprocessor.
Arithmetic processing unit can be optionally mounted.
Main memory 512 KB (including O/S area).

(RAM) It can be expanded up to a total of 832 KB optionally.
Auxiliary ROM file 512 KB/1 MB/2 MB

memory (including O/S area)
Data file Bubble memory

512 KB/1 MB
Battery backup RAM

128 KB/256 KB/512 KB
Floppy disk Both–sided high density

(option for (format capacity 1 MB)
developing 5–1/4 inch floppy disk x 2
softwares)
Display 14 inch color CRT

(commonly used with the CRT/MDI of CNC and PMC)
Character display Alphanumeric/Kana (Japanese alpha-

bets) characters.
80 characters x 27/21 lines JIS first–level
Kanji (Chinese Character)
40 characters x 27/21 lines Color (x7),
inversion, and blinking can be specified
for can be specified for each character.
Graphic display 640 x 432 dots

Color (x7) can be specified for each dot.
Keyboard Built–in keyboard

(commonly used with the CRT/MDI of CNC and PMC)
ASCII configuration full keyboard

(option for developing softwares)
Interface Reader/puncher Serial port (x 3)

interface
Printer interface Centronics specifications parallel port

(x 1)
273
34.2
SOFTWARE Item Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS Operating system Single user multi–task O/S, editor, assembler, and de-
(O/S) bugger are also included.
Multi–task It is supported by the O/S. These

functions can be utilized by any
Graphics language for development.
Language for BASIC interpreter Standard attachment. Hardware–

development dependent portion such as graph-
ics is also supported by the lan-
guage level.
C compiler Purchased separately.
PASCAL compiler Nearly all languages for develop-

ment marked for the above O/S
are available.
Relocatable
assembler
Otehrs
FANUC library The following functions can be supported:

d MMC/CNC window
d MMC/PMC window
d Expanded graphics function
274
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS (ONLY 150–MB)
34.3 A large window is prepared between CNC and MMC.

The following operation can be performed at the MMC side via the
MMC/CNC WINDOW window. For details, refer to the MMC Operator’s Manual.
d CNC system data input

d Output of CNC command data for operation
d Output of CNC command data for registration
d Output of CNC command data for verification
d CNC command data input
d Specified program search
d Specified program delete
d All programs delete
d Tool offset input
d Tool offset output
d Parameter input
d Parameter output
d Setting data input
d Setting data output
d Custom macro variable input
d Custom macro variable output
d Skip position input
d Servo delay input
d Acceleration/deceleration delay input
d Model data input
d Diagnosis input
d A/D conversion data input
d Alarm status
d Program No. under execution
d Sequence No. under execution
d Actual speed
d Spindle speed
d Absolute position
d Machine position
275
34.4 The following functions are available at the MMC side through the MMC
and PMC window:
MMC/PMC WINDOW
d DI/DO image input
d Data input
d Data output
NOTE
The MMC cannot be installed partially (simple
conversational automatic programming, CRT/MDI 2
control, and 9″ CRT etc..)
276
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 35. CONTROL UNIT
35 CONTROL UNIT
277
35. CONTROL UNIT NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
35.1 There can be the following four kinds of control units of Series 15 and the
one of best be selected according to the system configuration.
CONTROL UNIT
1) Kind and size of control unit
3 slots : 202 (W) × 380 (H) × 172 (D) mm
4 slots : 254 (W) × 380 (H) × 172 (D) mm
6 slots : 366 (W) × 380 (H) × 172 (D) mm
8 slots : 478 (W) × 380 (H) × 172 (D) mm
35.2 The input power source of Series 15 (CNC unit) is as follows.

POWER SUPPLY 200 to 240 V +10%, –15%
50/60 Hz 3 Hz
35.3 1) Ambient temperature

ENVIRONMENTAL 0°C to 45°C when operating
CONDITIONS –20°C to 60°C when stored or delivering
2) Change in temperature
Max. 1.1°C/min
3) Humidity
75% or less (relative humidity) generally
Max. 95% for a short time (no condensation)
4) Vibration
0.5 G or less when operating
5) Circumstances
When using in places with thick dust, cutting oil, or organic solvents
consult us.
278
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 36. SERVO
36 SERVO
A connectable servo motor and the servo amplifier are as follows.

Servo motor : FANUC AC servo motor
(With serial interface pulse coder)
Servo amplifier : FANUC AC servo amplifier
(Digital servo)
279
37. POSITION DETECTOR NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
37 POSITION DETECTOR
A connectable position detector is as follows.

For semi–closed control : Serial interface pulse coder
(Servo motor built–in type)
For full–closed control : Pulse coder/Optical scale
(2–phase pulse interface)
280
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 38. SPINDLE
38 SPINDLE
A connectable spindle motor and the spindle amplifier are as follows.

Spindle motor : FANUC AC spindle motor, etc.
Spindle amplifier : FANUC AC spindle amplifier, etc.
281
39. MACHINE INTERFACE NC FUNCTIONS B–62082E/04
39 MACHINE INTERFACE
Series 15 has the interface to connect FANUC I/O Link.

The device such as I/O Unit–MODEL A with FANUC I/O Link can be
connected.
282
B–62082E/04 NC FUNCTIONS 40. POSITION SWITCHING FUNCTION
40 POSITION SWITCHING FUNCTION
This function outputs a signal when machine coordinates along a control

axis are in the range specified by a parameter.
Specify in parameters a control axis and the range for machine coordinates
in which the position switching signal is output.
The position switching signal can be output on up to ten lines.
283
APPENDIX
B–62082E/04 APPENDIX A. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE
A RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE
Table A (a) Linear axis (in case of metric thread for feed screw and metric input)
Increment system
IS–A IS–B IS–C IS–D IS–E
Least input 0.01 mm 0.01 mm 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm 0.00001 mm

increment or *1 or *1 or or
0.001 mm 0.0001 mm 0.00001 mm 0.000001 mm
Least command 0.01 mm 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm 0.00001 mm 0.000001 mm

increment
Interpolation unit 0.005 mm 0.0005 mm 0.00005 mm 0.000005 mm 0.0000005

mm
Max. 999999.99 mm 99999.999 mm 9999.9999 mm 9999.99999 mm 999.999999 mm

programmable
dimension *2
Max. rapid 2400000 mm/min 240000 mm/min 100000 mm/min 10000 mm/min 1000 mm/min
traverse *4
Feedrate range 0.0001 – 2400000 0.0001 – 240000 0.0001 – 100000 0.00001 – 10000 0.000001 – 1000
*4 mm/min mm/min mm/min mm/min mm/min
Incremental feed 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.000001,
*5 100, 1000 10, 100 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 0.00001, 0.0001,
mm/step mm/step mm/step 1.0 mm/step 0.001, 0.01, 0.1
mm/step
Tool 0 – 999.99 mm 0 – 999.999 mm 0 – 999.9999 0 – 9999.99999 0 – 999.999999

compensation mm mm mm
Backlash 0 – 9999 pulses 0 – 9999 pulses 0 – 9999 pulses 0 – 9999 pulses 0 – 9999 pulses
compensation
*6
Dwell time *3 0 – 999999.99 0 – 99999.999 sec 0 – 9999.9999 sec 0 – 9999.99999 0 – 999.999999

sec sec sec
287
A. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE APPENDIX B–62082E/04
Table A (b) Linear axis (in case of metric thread for feed screw and inch input)
Increment system
Least input 0.001 inch 0.001 inch 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch 0.000001 inch
0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch 0.000001 inch 0.0000001 inch
Least command 0.01 mm 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm 0.00001 mm 0.000001 mm

increment
Interpolation unit 0.0005 inches 0.00005 inches 0.000005 inches 0.0000005 inches 0.00000005
inches
Max 39370.078 3937.0078 393.70078 39.3700787 3.93700787

programmable inches inches inches inches inches
dimension *2
Max. rapid 2400000 mm/min 240000 mm/min 100000 mm/min 10000 mm/min 1000 mm/min
traverse *4
Feedrate range 0.00001 – 96000 0.00001 – 9600 0.00001 – 4000 0.00001 – 400 0.000001 – 40
*4 inch/min inch/min inch/min inch/min inch/min
Incremental 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.000001, 0.0000001,
feed *5 1, 10, 100 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.000001,
inch/step inch/step inch/step 0.001, 0.01, 0.1 0.00001, 0.0001,
inch/min 0.001, 0.01
inch/min
Tool 0 – 99.999 0 – 99.9999 0 – 99.99999 0 – 999.999999 0 – 99.9999999

compensation inches inches inches inches inches
compensation
*6
Dwell time *3 0 – 99999.999 0 – 9999.9999 sec 0 – 999.99999 sec 0 – 9999.99999 0 – 999.999999

sec sec sec
288
Table A (c) Linear axis (in case of inch thread for feed screw and inch input)
Increment system
Least input 0.001 inch 0.001 inch 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch 0.000001 inch
0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch 0.000001 inch 0.0000001 inch
Least command 0.001 inch 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch 0.000001 inch 0.0000001 inch
increment
Interpolation unit 0.0005 inches 0.00005 inches 0.000005 inches 0.0000005 inches 0.00000005
inches
Max. 99999.999 9999.9999 999.99999 999.999999 99.9999999

programmable inches inches inches inches inches
dimension *2
Max. rapid 240000 inch/min 24000 inch/min 10000 inch/min 1000 inch/min 100 inch/min
traverse *4
Feedrate range *4 0.00001 – 240000 0.00001 – 24000 0.00001 – 10000 0.000001 – 1000 0.000001 – 100
inch/min inch/min inch/min inch/min inch/min
Incremental feed 0.001, 0.01,0.1, 1, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.000001, 0.0000001,
*5 10, 100 inch/step 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.000001,
inch/step inch/step 0.001, 0.01, 0.1 0.00001, 0.0001,
inch/min 0.001, 0.01
inch/min
Tool 0 – 99.999 0 – 99.9999 0 – 99.99999 0 – 999.999999 0 – 99.9999999

compensation *6 inches inches inches inches inches
compensation
Dwell time *3 0 – 99999.999 0 – 9999.9999 0 – 999.99999 0 – 9999.99999 0 – 999.999999

sec sec sec sec sec
289
A. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE APPENDIX B–62082E/04
Table A (d) Linear axis (in case of inch thread for feed screw and metric input)
Increment system
Least input 0.01 mm 0.01 mm 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm 0.00001 mm

0.001 mm 0.0001 mm 0.00001 mm 0.000001 mm
Least command 0.001 inch 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch 0.000001 inch 0.0000001 inch
increment
Interpolation unit 0.005 mm 0.0005 mm 0.00005 mm 0.000005 mm 0.0000005 mm
Max 999999.99 99999.999 9999.9999 9999.99999 999.999999 mm

programmable mm mm mm mm
dimension *2
Max. rapid 240000 inch/min 24000 inch/min 10000 inch/min 1000 inch/min 100 inch/min
traverse *4
Feedrate range *4 0.0001 – 2400000 0.0001 – 240000 0.0001 – 100000 0.000001 – 10000 0.0000001 – 1000
mm/min mm/min mm/min mm/min mm/min
Incremental feed 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.000001,
*5 100, 1000 1, 10, 100 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 0.00001, 0.0001,
mm/step mm/step mm/step 1.0 mm/step 0.001, 0.01, 0.1
mm/step
Tool 0 – 999.99 mm 0 – 999.999 mm 0 – 999.9999 0 – 9999.99999 0 – 999.999999

compensation mm mm mm
Backlash 0 –9999 pulses 0 – 9999 pulses 0 –9999 pulses 0 –9999 pulses 0 –9999 pulses
compensation *6
Dwell time *3 0 – 999999.99 0 – 99999.999 0 – 9999.9999 0 – 9999.99999 0 – 999.999999

sec sec sec sec sec
290
Table A (e) Rotary axis

Increment system
Least input 0.01 deg 0.01 deg 0.001 deg 0.0001 deg 0.00001 deg
0.001 deg 0.0001 deg 0.00001 deg 0.000001 deg
Least command 0.01 deg 0.001 deg 0.0001 deg 0.00001 deg 0.000001 deg
increment
Interpolation unit 0.005 deg 0.0005 deg 0.00005 deg 0.000005 deg 0.0000005 deg
Max. 999999.99 deg 99999.999 deg 9999.9999 deg 9999.99999 999.999999

programmable deg deg
dimension *2
Max. rapid 2400000 deg/min 240000 deg/min 100000 deg/min 10000 deg/min 1000 deg/min
traverse *4
Feedrate range *4 0.0001– 0.0001– 0.0001 – 0.00001 – 0.000001

2400000 240000 100000 10000 1000
deg/min deg/min deg/min deg/min deg/min
Incremental feed 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.000001,
*5 100, 1000 1, 10, 100 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 0.00001, 0.0001,
deg/step deg/step deg/step 1.0 deg/step 0.001, 0.01, 0.1
deg/step
Tool 0 – 999.99 deg 0 – 999.999 deg 0 – 999.9999 0 – 9999.99999 0 – 999.999999

compensation deg deg deg
compensation *6
Dwell time *3 0 – 999999.99 0 – 99999.999 0 – 9999.9999 0 – 9999.99999 0 – 999.999999

sec sec sec sec sec
*1 Selected by parameters for each axis. Certain functions are not

applicable for axes with different increment systems (e.g. circular
interpolation, tool nose radius compensation, etc.)
*2 When given commands for axes of different increment system in the
same block, limitations are set by the smallest value.
*3 Will depend on the unit system of the axis on address X.
*4 The feedrate ranges shown above are limitations depending on CNC
interpolation capacity. When regarded as a whole system, limitations,
depending on the servo system, must also be considered.
*5 In case of BMI interface, incremental feed amount can be specified by
setting amount (parameter setting.)
*6 The unit of backlash compensation is detection unit.
291
B. FUNCTIONS AND COMMAND
FORMAT LIST APPENDIX B–62082E/04
B FUNCTIONS AND COMMAND FORMAT LIST
The symbols in the list represent the followings.
IP _______ : X _______ Y _______ Z _______ A . . . _______
As seen above, the format consists of a combination of arbitary axis

addresses among X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V, and W.
x : First basic axis (X usually)
y : Second basic axis (Y usually)
z : Third basic axis (Z usually)
α : One of arbitrary addresses
β : One of arbitrary addresses
Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
Functions Illustrations Command format
Positioning (G00) G00___:
Start point
Linear G01___F___:
interpolation (G01)
Start point
Circular Start
point G02 G02 R___
interpolation (G02, G03) G17 Xp___ Yp___ F___ ;
J R G03 I___ J___
( x, y ) G02 R___
I G18 Xp___ Zp___ F___ ;
End point G03 I___ K___
( x, y ) G03 G02 R___
G19 Yp___ Zp___ F___ ;
R G03 J___ K___
J
I
(In case of X–Y plane)
Helical G02 R___

interpolation (G02, G03) G17 Xp___ Yp___ α___ F___ ;
G03 I___ J___
G02 R___
Start G18 Xp___ Zp___ α___ F___ ;
point (x, y, z) G03 I___ K___
( x, y ) G02 R___
G19 Yp___ Zp___ α___ F___ ;
G03 J___ K___
(In case of X–Y plane, G03)
α: Any axis other than circular interpolation axes.
292
B–62082E/04 APPENDIX FORMAT LIST
Dwell (G04) Per second dwell

X ___
G04 ;
P ___
Per revolution dwell
X ___
G95 G04 ;
P ___
Exact stop (G09) Velocity

G01
G09 G02 _____ ;
Time G03
Change of offset value by Geometry offset amount

program (G10) G10 L10 P___ R___ ;
Wear offset amount
G10 L11 P___ R___ ;
Work zero point offset amount
G10 L2 P___ ___ ;
Cutter G 41 G17 G40

compensation (G40–G42) G 42 G18 G41 __ D___ ;
G 40 G19 G42
D: Tool offset No.
Tool length G43

compensation (G43, G44, α__ H __ ;
G44
G49)
G43
Offset H __ ;
G44
z
H: Tool offset No.
G49; … Cancel
Tool offset (G45–G48) G 45 Increase G45

G46
G 46 Decrease __ D __ ;
G47
G 47 Double G48
increase
Double D: Tool offset number
G 48
decrease
Compensation aniount
Scaling P4 P3 G51 ___ P___ ;

(G50, G51) P4’ P3’
P : Scaling magnification
G50; … Cancel
P1’ P2’
P1 P2
Setting of local coordinate G52 ___ ;

system Local coordinate
x
(G52) system
y
Workpiece coordinate
system
Command in machine G53 ___ ;

coordinate system
(G53)
293
Selection of workpiece
coordinate system Å Å
ÅÅ
Workpiece
Å
zero point
offset
Workpiece
coordinate
system
G54
: ___ ;
Å Å
(G54 – G59) G59
Machine
coordinate
system
Single direction G60 ___ ;

positioning
(G60)
Inch/metric conversion Inch input G20;

(G20, G21) Metric input G21;
Stored stroke check (X Y Z) G22 X___ Y___ Z___ I___ J___ K___ ;
(G22, G23) G23; … Cancel
(I J K)
Reference position G27 __ ;

return check (G27)
Start point
Reference position return Reference position G28 ___ ;

(G28) 2
2nd, 3rd, 4th reference G30 P 3 ___ ;
position return (G30) 4
Intermediate
point Start
point
Return from reference Reference position G29 __ :

position (G29)

Intermediate point
Skip function (G31) G31

Multiple skip function Start G31.1
(G31.1 – G31.3) point G31.2 __ F __ ;
Skip G31.3
signal
ÔÔ ÔÔ
ÔÔ ÔÔ
Thread cutting (G33) Even lead thread cutting
G33 ___ F___ Q___ :
ÔÔ ÔÔ
Q : Thread cutting start point shift angle
Inch thread cutting
G33 ___ E___ Q___ ;
F E : Threads per inch
Programmable mirror Mirror G51.1 ___ ;

image (G50.1, G51.1) G50.1; … Cancel

294
B–62082E/04 APPENDIX FORMAT LIST
Cutting mode/Exact stop V G64 ___ ; Cutting mode

mode, Tapping mode, G 64
G60 ___ ; Exact stop mode
Automatic corner override t G62 ___ ; Automatic corner override mode
V G63 ___ ; Tapping mode
G 60
t
Custom macro One–shot call

(G65, G66, G66.1, G67) Macro G65 P___ <Argument assignment>;
O_; P: Program No.
G65 P_ ;
Modal call
M 99 ; G66
G66.1 P___ <Argument assignment>;
G67; … Cancel
Coordinate system Y G17 Xp __ Yp __

rotation (G68, G69) G68 G18 Zp __ Xp __ Rα;
α
G19 Yp __ Zp __
( x, y ) G69 ; … Cancel
X
( In case of X–Y plane )
Canned cycles See “Canned cycle”. G80; … Cancel

(G73, G74, G76, G73
G80 – G89) G74
G76
x__ y__ z__ P__ Q__ R__ F__ L__ ;
G81
:
G89
Absolute/incremental G90 ; Absolute

programming G91 ; Incremental
(G90/G91) G90 ___ G91___ ; Combined use
ŸŸ
ŸŸ
Change of workpiece G92 ___ ;
coordinate (G92)
Inverse time/Per–minute 1/min G93___ F___ ; Inverse time

feed/Per–revolution feed mm/min inch/min G94___ F___ ; Feed per minute
(G93, G94, G95) mm/rev inch/rev G95___ F___ ; Feed per revolution
Initial point return/R point G 98 G98 ____________ ;

return (G98, G99) I point G99 ____________ ;
G 99 R point
Z point
Constant surface speed m/min or feet/min. G96 S __ ;

control (G96, G97) G97; … Cancel
295
Hypothetical axis G07 α0;

interpolation (G07) Xp G17
G18 G02 Xp___ Yp___ Zp___ ;
G19 G02
G07 α1;
Zp
α:Hypothetical axis
Polar coordinate Local coordinate G17 G16 Xp___ Yp____ ;

(G15, G16)
Yp
Ô G18 G16 Zp___ Xp____ ;
Ô
Yp G19 G16 Yp___ Zp____ ;
G15; … Cancel
Xp
Xp
Workpiece coordinate system
Tool length measurement Measuring position G37 Z____ ;

(G37) reach signal
Z
Start Measuring
point point
296
B–62082E/04 APPENDIX C. LIST OF TAPE CODE
C LIST OF TAPE CODE
ISO code EIA code

Meaning
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0 f f f 0 f f Numeral 0
1 f f f f f 1 f f Numeral 1
3 f f f f f 3 f f f f Numeral 3
7 f f f f f f f 7 f f f f Numeral 7
A f f f a f f f f Address A
B f f f b f f f f Address B
C f f f f f c f f f f f f Address C
D f f f d f f f f Address D
E f f f f f e f f f f f f Address E
F f f f f f f f f f f f f Address F
G f f f f f g f f f f f f Address G
H f f f h f f f f Address H
I f f f f f i f f f f f f Address I
J f f f f f j f f f f Address J
K f f f f f k f f f f Address K
L f f f f f l f f f f Address L
M f f f f f m f f f f Address M
N f f f f f n f f f f Address N
O f f f f f f f o f f f f Address O
P f f f p f f f f f f Address P
Q f f f f f q f f f f Address Q
R f f f f f r f f f f Address R
S f f f f f s f f f f Address S
T f f f f f t f f f f Address T
U f f f f f u f f f f Address U
V f f f f f v f f f f Address V
W f f f f f f f w f f f f Address W
X f f f f f x f f f f f f Address X
Y f f f f f y f f f f Address Y
Z f f f f f z f f f f Address Z
297
C. LIST OF TAPE CODE APPENDIX B–62082E/04
ISO code EIA code

Meaning
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DEL f f f f f f f f f Del f f f f f f f f x Delete (cancel an error punch).

Not punched. Can not be used in sig-
NUL f Blank f x
nificant section in EIA code.
BS f f f BS f f f f * Back space
HT f f f Tab f f f f f f * Tabulator
LF or NL f f f CR or EOB f f End of block
CR f f f f f * Carriage return
SP f f f SP f f * Space
% f f f f f ER f f f f Absolute rewind stop
( f f f (2–4–5) f f f f Control out (a comment is started)
) f f f f f (2–4–7) f f f f Control in (the end of a comment)
+ f f f f f + f f f f Positive sign
– f f f f f – f f Negative sign
: f f f f f Colon (Address O)
/ f f f f f f f / f f f f Optional block skip
. f f f f f . f f f f f f Period (A decimal point)
# f f f f f Sharpe
$ f f f * Dollar sign
& f f f f f & f f f f * Ampersand
’ f f f f f * Apostrophe
* f f f f f Asterisk
, f f f f f , f f f f f f Comma
; f f f f f f f * Semicolon
< f f f f f * Left angle bracket
= f f f f f f f * Equal
> f f f f f f f * Right angle bracket
? f f f f f f f * Question mark
@ f f f * Commercial at mark
” f f f * Quotation
[ f f f f f f f Left brace
] f f f f f f f Right brace
NOTE
1 *: When read in the comment zone, the codes are read into the memory.
When read in the significant datazone, the codes are ignored.
2 x: Ignored.
3 When a custom macro option is used, the following codes can also be used in the significant
data zone.
+. [, ], #, *, @, ? in ISO code.
+ in EIA code and codes set by parameter.
4 Codes not in this table are ignored if their parity is correct.
5 Codes with incorrect parity cause the TH alarm; however, when they are in the comment zone,
they are ignored without generating the TH alarm.
6 A character with all eight holes punched does not generate the TH alarm even if EIA code.
298
B–62082E/04 APPENDIX D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS BASIC UNIT
D EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS BASIC UNIT
Name Number of Figure
3–slot control unit Fig.1
ISA extension unit Fig. 5
299
D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS BASIC UNIT APPENDIX B–62082E/04
Fig. 1 3–SLOT CONTROL UNIT
Specification : A02B–0162–B503
A02B–0162–B513
Weight : 2.3kg
300
A02B–0162–B514
A02B–0162–B524
A02B–0162–B534
Weight : 2.5kg
301
A02B–0162–B516
A02B–0162–B526
A02B–0162–B536
A02B–0162–B546
A02B–0162–B556
A02B–0162–B566
A02B–0162–B576
Weight : 3.8kg
302
Specification : A02B–0162–B508 A02B–0240–B508 A02B–0244–B508

A02B–0162–B518 A02B–0240–B518 A02B–0244–B518
A02B–0162–B528 A02B–0241–B508
A02B–0162–B538 A02B–0241–B518
A02B–0162–B548 A02B–0242–B508
A02B–0162–B558 A02B–0242–B518
A02B–0162–B568 A02B–0243–B508
A02B–0162–B578 A02B–0243–B518
Weight : 5.0kg
303
Fig. 5 ISA EXPANSION UNIT
Specification : A02B–0207–C030
16.2
15
105 112 112 112

172
49 56 56 56 56 56 56 56
380
360
Weight : 2.0kg
NOTE
1 The above figure shows a configuration in which an ISA
expansion unit is added to a 6–slot control unit.
2 An ISA expansion unit is always added to the left side of the
control unit.
304
B–62082E/04 APPENDIX E. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS CRT/MDI UNIT
E EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS CRT/MDI UNIT
9″ monochrome CRT/MDI (small size, horizontal type) Fig.1
9″monochrome CRT/MDI (standard size, vertical type) Fig.2
9″ monochrome CRT/MDI Fig.3

(standard size, horizontal type)
9″ monochrome CRT (separate type) Fig.4
9″ PDP/MDI (small size) Fig. 5
9″ PDP/MDI (standard size) Fig. 6
9″ PDP (separate type) Fig. 7
9.5″ LCD/MDI (vertical type), Fig. 8

10.4″ LCD/MDI (vertical type)
9.5″ LCD/MDI (horizontal type), Fig.9

10.4″ LCD/MDI (horizontal type)
14″ CRT/MDI (vertical type) Fig. 10
14″ CRT/MDI (horizontal type) Fig. 11
Separate MDI (for 9″ CRT or 9″ PDP) Fig. 12
Separate MDI (vertical type for 10.4″ LCD) Fig. 13
Separate MDI (horizontal type for 10.4″ LCD) Fig. 14
10.4″ color LCD (separate type) Fig. 15
9.5″ monochrome LCD (separate type) Fig. 16
305
E. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS CRT/MDI UNIT APPENDIX B–62082E/04
Fig. 1 9″ MONOCHROME CRT/MDI (SMALL SIZE, HORIZONTAL TYPE)
Specification : A02B–0163–C301 (M series, English key)

A02B–0163–C302 (T series, English key)
Weight : 4.5kg
306
Fig. 2 9″ MONOCHROME CRT/MDI (STANDARD SIZE, VERTICAL TYPE)
Specification : A02B–0163–C244 (English key)

A02B–0163–C444 (Symbolic key)
Weight : 5 kg
307
Fig. 3 9″ MONOCHROME CRT/MDI (STANDARD SIZE, HORIZONTAL TYPE)

Weight : 4.5 kg
308
Fig. 4 9″ MONOCHROME CRT (SEPARATE TYPE)
Weight : 3.5 kg
309
Fig. 5 9″ PDP/MDI (SMALL SIZE)
Specification : A02B–0163–C305 (M series, English key)

A02B–0163–C306 (T series, English key)
Weight : 3 kg
310
Fig. 6 9″ PDP/MDI (STANDARD SIZE)

Weight : 3.5 kg
311
Fig. 7 9″ PDP (SEPARATE TYPE)
Weight : 2.5 kg
312
Fig. 8 9.5″ LCD/MDI (VERTICAL TYPE), 10.4″ LCD/MDI (VERTICAL TYPE)
Specification : A02B–0163–C331 (English key for MB/MFB/TB/TTB/MEL/TEE)

A02B–0163–C333 (English key for TFB/TTFB/TEF)
A02B–0163–C341 (English key for MMC–IV)
A02B–0163–C371 (English key for MB/MFB/TB/TTB/MEL/TEE)
A02B–0163–C571 (Symbolic key for MB/MFB/TB/TTB/MEL/TEE)
A02B–0163–C581 (Symbolic key for MMC–IV)
55.0
Weight : 5.5 kg
313
Fig. 9 9.5″ LCD/MDI (HORIZONTAL TYPE), 10.4″ LCD/MDI (HORIZONTAL TYPE)

A02B–0163–C372 (English key for MB/MFB/TB/TTB/MEL/TEE)
A02B–0163–C582 (Symbolic key for MMC–IV)
Weight : 5.0 kg
314
Fig. 10 14″ CRT/MDI (VERTICAL TYPE)

A02B–0163–C523 (Symbolic key for TFB/TTFB/TEF)
Weight : 20.5 kg
315
Fig. 11 14″ CRT/MDI (HORIZONTAL TYPE)

Weight : 20.5 kg
316
Fig. 12 SEPARATE MDI (FOR 9″ CRT OR 9″ PDP)

Weight : 1 kg
317
Fig. 13 SEPARATE MDI (VERTICAL TYPE FOR 10.4″ LCD)

Weight : 1 kg
318
Fig. 14 SEPARATE MDI (HORIZONTAL TYPE FOR 10.4″ LCD)

Weight : 1 kg
319
Fig. 15 10.4″ COLOR LCD (SEPARATE TYPE)
Panel cut drawing

Weight : 2.5 kg
320
Fig. 16 9.5″ MONOCHROME LCD (SEPARATE TYPE)
Panel cut drawing

Weight : 2.5 kg
321
F. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62082E/04
F EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
Position coder Fig.1
Manual pulse generator Fig.2
Pendant type manual pulse generator Fig.3
Battery case for separate type absolute pulse coder Fig.4
Punch panel (wide width type) Fig. 5
Punch panel (narrow width type) Fig. 6
Portable tape reader without reels Fig. 7
Portable tape reader with reels Fig. 8
Separate type tape reader without reels Fig.9
Separate type tape reader with reels Fig. 10
322
B–62082E/04 APPENDIX F. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
Fig. 1 POSITION CODER
Specification :
Position coder C A76L–0027–0001#101 (Max. 4000rpm, with 160 160 flange)
Position coder D A76L–0027–0001#001 (Max. 6000rpm, with 160 160 flange)
Position coder G A76L–0027–0001#201 (Max. 8000rpm, with 160 160 flange)
Position coder J A76L–0027–0001#102 (Max. 4000rpm, with 68 68 flange)
Position coder K A76L–0027–0001#002 (Max. 6000rpm, with 68 68 flange)
Position coder L A76L–0027–0001#202 (Max. 8000rpm, with 68 68 flange)
Position coder E A76L–0027–0001#103 (Max. 4000rpm, without flange)
Position coder F A76L–0027–0001#003 (Max. 6000rpm, without flange)
Position coder H A76L–0027–0001#203 (Max. 8000rpm, without flange)
(1) Position coder C, D, G (with 160 160 flange)
Key position
(2) Position coder E, F, H (without flange)
4–M3
depth 7
60 circumference
Key position
323
(3) Position coder J, K, L (with 68 68 flange)
Key position
Note : Mechanical specifications of the position coder

are as follows :
(1) Input axis inertia
1.0 10–3kg@cm@sec2 or less
(2) Input axis starting torque
1000g@cm or less
(3) Input axis permissible loads
Radial Thrust
Operation 10kg or less 5kg or less
Idle 20kg or less 10kg or less
Attach a pulley directly to the position coder

shaft and drive the timing belt. Confirm that the
loads conform with the above allowable value.
324
Fig. 2 MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR
Specification : A860–0202–T001
83.5
φ80.0
φ55.0
50.0
30.0
M4X8.0
60.0
3 holes equally spaced

on a 72 dia
11.0
PULSE GENERATOR
FANUC LTD
0V A 5VB
M3 screw terminal
120.0°
325
Fig. 3 PENDANT TYPE MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR
Specification : A860–0202–T004 to T015
A860–0202–T004 to T009
90 38.0 M3 screw
terminal
25
140
100.0
39.0
M3 screw
terminal
A860–0202–T010 to T015
90 38.0 M3 screw
terminal
25
140
100.0
39.0
M3 screw
terminal
326
Fig. 4 BATTERY CASE FOR SEPARATE TYPE ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER
Specification : A06B–6050–K060
103 Minus polarity indication

4–M4 counter sinking Plus polarity indication
Plus terminal with

3–M3 screw holes
Minus terminal with

3–M3 screw holes

4–ø4.3 Mounting holes
Arrow view A

NOTE
Power supply is not included.
327
Fig. 5 PUNCH PANEL (WIDE WIDTH TYPE)
Specification : A02B–0120–C181 (Cable length : 1m)

A02B–0120–C182 (Cable length : 2m)
80
5
13
328
Fig. 6 PUNCH PANEL (NARROW WIDTH TYPE)
Specification : A02B–0120–C191 (Cable length : 1m)

40
20 13
329
Fig. 7 PORTABLE TAPE READER WITHOUT REELS
380 240
Paint : Munsell No. 5GY3.5/0.5 leather tone finish

Weight : Applox. 15kg
330
Fig. 8 PORTABLE TAPE READER WITH REELS
530
331
Fig. 9 SEPARATE TYPE TAPE READER WITHOUT REELS
Wiring screw M3 6
Power terminal strip
Signal cable Cable holder

View from allow A
Signal cable connector
Coating color : Metallic silver

Weight : 6kg (Panel installation hole
Unit : mm layout diagram)
Note )
Install the tape reader, from the rear side of panel with holes
and secure with screws and nuts. If this is not convenient,
attach a M5 stud in φ5.3 hole and secure with a nut.
332
Fig. 10 SEPARATE TYPE TAPE READER WITH REELS
View from arrow A
M5 10
stud
4–φ5.3
RS–232–C
Interface connector
Power connector
A
(Panel installation hole
layout diagram)
Parallel interface Coating color : Metallic silver

connector Weight : 9kg
Unit : mm
Note )
Install the tape reader, from the rear side of panel with holes
and secure with screws and nuts. If this is not convenient,
attach a M5 stud in φ5.3 hole and secure with a nut.
333
G. POWER SUPPLY AND HEAT LOSS APPENDIX B–62082E/04
G POWER SUPPLY AND HEAT LOSS
Unit Power supply voltage Power supply
3 slot control unit 170 to 264VAC 2A

+ PSU AI
4 slot control unit 2A

+ PSU AI

+ PSU BI

+ PSU BI

+ PSU BI
14″ CRT/MDI unit 170 to 264VAC 0.6A
9″ CRT/MDI unit 24VDC10% 0.8A

10% includes mo-
9″ PDP/MDI unit mentary surges and 2.0A
ripples
9.5″ LCD/MDI unit 0.8A
10.4″ LCD unit 0.8A
I/O Unit–A Depends on the type and num-

ber of modules. Refer to “I/O
Unit–MODEL A connection
and Maintenance Manual”
(B–61813E)
(PSU : Power supply unit)
334
B–62082E/04 APPENDIX G. POWER SUPPLY AND HEAT LOSS
Name Heat-
loss
Control Basic unit (4–slot) 60W Power AI

unit
Basic unit (4–slot) 80W Power BI
Main CPU board 20W
PMC board 18W
Sub CPU board 18W This board can not be used in

15MEK or 15MEL.
Option 1 board 15W
RISC board 18W This board can not be used in

15MEK or 15MEL.
Buffer board 6W
(for multiple axis)
Axis CPU 15W
MMC–II CPU board 20W This board can not be used in

15MEK or 15MEL.
MMC–II graphic 20W This board can not be used in

board 15MEK or 15MEL.
MMC–III CPU board 20W This board can not be used in

15MEK or 15MEL.
MMC–IV CPU board 15W This board can not be used in

15MEK or 15MEL.
OSI/ethernet board 18W This board can not be used in

15MEK or 15MEL.
Data server board 18W
CRT/MDI 9″ monochrome 14W For small and standard size

CRT/MDI
9″ color CRT/MDI 38W For small and standard size
9″ monochrome 40W For small and standard size

PDP/MDI
10.4″ color LCD/MDI 20W
9.5″ color LCD/MDI 20W
14″ color CRT/MDI 70W
Connec- Connection unit 1 35W

tion unit
Connection unit 1+2 60W
Opera- Operator’s panel 30W

tor’s panel connection unit
Control transformer 51W
335
B–62082E/04 Index
ƠNumbersơ Basic machine interface, 266
Basic simultaneously controllable axes, 23
1–block plural M command, 99
Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed
2nd, 3rd and 4th reference point return (G30), 73 interpolation, 65
3–dimensional circular interpolation function, 36 Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after rapid traverse
interpolation, 67
3–dimensional tool compensation (G40, G41), 122
Bi–directional pitch error compensation function, 137
3M interface, 266
Binary data input operation by remote buffer, 171
6M interface, 266
Block start interlock, 253
Buffer register, 190
ƠAơ
Absolute and incremental programming (G90, G91), 85 ƠCơ
Acceleration/deceleration before cutting feed, 66 Canned cycles (G73, G74, G76, G80–G89, G98, G99), 106
Acceleration/deceleration before pre–read interpolation, 67 Changing of tool offset amount (Programmable data input)
(G10), 128
Acceleration/deceleration function for the constant speed
specified by the PMC axis control function, 68 Chopping function (G81.1), 182
Accuracy compensation function, 132 Circle cutting function, 116
Activation of automatic operation, 190 Circular interpolation (G02, G03), 34
Active block cancel, 198 Circular interpolation by radius programming, 112
Actual spindle speed output, 90 Circular threading B (G02.1, G03.10), 47
Additional optional block skip, 104 Clock function, 220

Command format, 104
Additional workpiece coordinate systems (G54.1), 81
Compensation functions, 117
Advanced preview control function, 167
Constant surface speed control (G96, G97), 89
Alarm signal, 258
Constant surface speed control signal, 259
All axes interlock, 253
Continuous thread cutting, 57
All axes machine lock, 205
Control axis detach, 177
Arbitrary command multiply (CMR), 178
Control unit, 277, 278
Automatic acceleration/deceleration, 63 Control–in/Control–out, 104
Automatic corner deceleration, 166 Controllable axes expansion, 23
Automatic corner override (G62), 69 Controlled axes, 22
Automatic operation, 188 Coordinate system conversion, 138
Automatic operation all axes interlock, 253 Coordinate system rotation (G68, 69), 141
Automatic operation signal, 258 Coordinate systems, 77
Automatic operation start lamp signal, 258 Coordinate value and dimension, 84
Automatic operation stop, 191 CRT screen function, 234
Automatic reference position return (G28, G29), 72 Custom macro, 152, 153
Automatic tool length measurement (G37), 148 Cutter compensation, 120
Automatic/manual simultaneous operation, 196 Cutter compensation B (G40 – 42), 120

Cutter compensation C (G40 – G42), 120
Auxiliary function lock, 205
Cutting block start interlock, 253
Axes control, 175
Cutting feedrate, 60
Axis control with PMC, 183
Cutting feedrate clamp, 60
Axis move direction signal, 259
Cutting mode (G64), 68
Axis switching, 139
Cutting point speed control function, 67
Cutting/rapid traverse position check function, 68
Cycle start, 190
ƠBơ Cylindrical interpolation (G07.1), 43
Background editing, 237
Backlash compensation, 136
Basic addresses and command value range, 103 ƠDơ
Basic controlled axes, 23 Data input/output, 246
i–1
INDEX B–62082E/04
Data protection key, 227 External workpiece number search, 264

Decimal point input/pocket calculator type decimal point input,
87
Designation direction tool length compensation, 131
ƠF ơ
DI status output signal, 259
F1–digit feed, 61
Diagnosis functions, 243
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE, 248
Diameter and radius programming, 87
FANUC handy file, 248
Directory display and punching on each group, 229
FANUC PROGRAM FILE mate, 248
Directory display of floppy cassette/program file, 227
Feed forward control, 169
Display, 216
Feed functions, 58
Distribution end signal, 258
Feed hold, 191
Distribution process by remote buffer, 173 Feed hold signal, 258
Dog–less reference position setting function, 76 Feed per rotation without a position coder, 69
Dry run, 205 Feed stop, 178
Dwell (G04), 69 Feedrate clamp by circular radius, 167
Feedrate override, 62
Figure copying (G72.1, G72.2), 114
ƠE ơ Floating reference position return (G30.1), 74
Electronic gearbox automatic phase synchronization, 187 Follow up function, 176
Emergency stop, 250 Follow–up for each axis, 176
Environmental conditions, 278 Foreground editing, 237
Equal lead thread cutting (G33), 56 Function for displaying multiple subscreens, 230
Function for overriding the rapid traverse feedrate in 1% units,
Exact stop (G09), 68 62
Exact stop mode (G61), 68 Function for switching between diameter and radius
Execution of automatic operation, 190 programming, 87
Expanded part program editing, 238 Function selection with hard keys, 242
Explanation of the keyboard, 210 Functions and command format list, 292
Exponential function interpolation (G02.3, G03.3), 45 Functions for high speed cutting, 164
Functions to simplify programming, 105
External alarm message, 262
External custom macro variable value input, 262
External custom macro variable value output, 263
External data input/output, 260
ƠGơ
External deceleration, 254 Graphic display function, 224
External dimensions basic unit, 299

External dimensions CRT/MDI unit, 305
External dimensions of each unit, 322 ƠHơ
External I/O device control, 242 Handle interruption, 196
External machine coordinate system compensation, 262 Hardware specifications, 273
External machine coordinate system compensation amount Helical interpolation (G02, G03), 37
output, 263 Helical interpolation B (G02, G03), 38
External operation function (G80, G81), 111 Helical involute interpolation, 49
External operators message, 262 Help function, 231
External program number output, 262 High speed machining (G10.3, G11.3, G65.3), 165
External program number search, 261 High–precision contour control, 168
External sequence number output, 263 High–precision contour control using 64–bit RISC processor,
174
External sequence number search, 261
High–speed distribution by DNC operation using remote buffer,
External tool compensation, 261 170
External tool offset amount output, 262 High–speed M/S/T/B interface, 98
External workpiece coordinate system shift, 261 High–speed measuring position reach signal input, 149
External workpiece coordinate system shift amount output, 263 High–speed part program registration function, 242
i–2
B–62082E/04 INDEX
High–speed skip signal input, 147 Manual absolute on/off, 202

Hypothetical axis interpolation (G07), 39 Manual arbitrary angle feed, 201
Manual data input (MDI), 215
Manual feed, 200
ƠI ơ Manual handle feed (1st), 200

Manual handle feed (2nd, 3rd), 201
Inch input signal, 259
Manual interruption during automatic operation, 196
Inch thread cutting (G33), 57
Manual interruption function for three–dimensional coordinate
Inch/metric conversion (G20, G21), 86 system conversion, 203
Inclination compensation, 135 Manual numeric command, 202
Increment system, 25 Manual operation, 199
Incremental feed, 200 Manual reference position return, 71
Index table indexing, 113 Maximum stroke, 25
Inposition signal, 258 MDI operation, 189
Input/output devices, 248 Measurement functions, 145
Interlock, 253 Mechanical handle feed, 176
Interlock per axis, 253 Memory operation, 189
Interpolation functions, 31 Menu switch, 222
Interpolation type pitch error compensation, 133 Mirror image, 176
Interpolation–type straightness compensation, 137 Miscellaneous functions, 96, 97
Interruption type custom macro, 163 MMC/CNC window, 275
Inverse time feed (G93), 61 MMC/PMC window, 276

Move signal, 258
Involute interpolation, 48
Multi–buffer (G05.1), 165
Multi–edit function, 242
ƠKơ Multi–step skip function (G31.1 – G31.3), 147
Key and program encryption, 163

Key input from PMC, 271
ƠNơ
Name of axes, 23
NC format guidance, 224
ƠL ơ NC format guidance with picture, 225
Label skip, 104 NC ready signal, 258
Language selection, 219 NC window, 271
Linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation, NC window B, 271
64
Normal direction control (G41.1, G42.1), 181
Linear interpolation (G01), 33
Number of common variables, 162
List of specifications, 4
Number of registered programs, 238
List of tape code, 297
Number of tool offsets, 128
Load meter display, 221
Local coordinate system (G52), 79
ƠOơ
Operation history, 232
ƠM ơ Operation mode, 189
M–code group function, 234 Optional angle chamfering, 112
Machine coordinate system (G53), 78 Optional angle corner rounding, 112
Machine interface, 265, 282 Optional block skip, 104
Machine lock on each axis (Z axis command cancel), 205 Output and setting of PMC parameters, 271
Machining time stamp function, 228 Override, 62
Main program, 101 Override cancel, 62
Man machine control (MMC) (Only 150–MB), 272 Override play back, 241
i–3
INDEX B–62082E/04
Overtravel, 251 Reset, 191

Overtravel functions, 251 Reset signal, 258
Restart of automatic operation, 192
Restart of block, 193
ƠP ơ Retrace, 197
Parameter setting (RS–232–C) screen, 231 Retrace program editing function, 206
Part program storage and editing, 236 Rewind, 189
Part program storage length, 239 Rewinding signal, 258
Per minute feed (G94), 60 Rigid tapping (G84.2, G84.3), 110
Per revolution feed (G95), 61 Roll–over function for a rotation axis, 184
Plane swiching function, 83 Rotary table dynamic fixture offset, 129

Run hour & parts number display, 220
Play back, 240
PMC instruction, 268
Polar coordinate command (G15, G16), 86
Polar coordinate interpolation (G12.1, G13.1), 41 ƠS ơ
Portable tape reader, 248 S code output, 89
Position detector, 280 Safety functions, 249
Position switching function, 283 Scaling (G50, G51), 140
Positioning (G00), 32 Screen for specifying high–speed and high–precision
machining, 231
Power supply, 278
Screen saver function, 235
Power supply and heat loss, 334
Second feedrate override, 62
Preparatory functions, 26
Second feedrate override B, 62
Program configuration, 100
Second miscellaneous functions, 97
Program end (M02, M30), 191
Selection of execution programs, 189
Program name, 101
Self diagnosis functions, 244
Program name (48 characters), 101
Sequence number, 102
Program number, 101
Sequence number comparison and stop, 191
Program number search, 189
Sequence number search, 189
Program restart, 192
Servo, 279
Program restart function and output of M, S, T and B, codes,
192 Servo off, 176
Program search with program names, 189 Servo ready signal, 258
Program stop (M00, M01), 191 Setting and display data, 208
Program test functions, 204 Setting and display unit, 209
Programmable machine controller (PMC–NA/NB), 267 Simple conversational automatic programming function, 226
Programmable mirror image (G50.1, G51.1), 113 Simple synchronization control positional deviation check
function, 180
Programmable parameter entry (G10, G11), 136
Simple synchronous control, 177
Programming axis name addition, 24
Simultaneously controllable axes expansion, 23
Single block, 205
Single direction positioning (G60), 33
ƠRơ Skip function (G31), 146
Range of command value, 287 Skip function for EGB axis, 186
Rapid traverse, 59 Skipping the commands for several axes, 148
Rapid traverse override, 62 Smooth interpolation function, 52
Rapid traversing signal, 259 Soft keys and calculation keys, 214
Read/punch function for custom macro common variables, 162 Software operator’s panel, 223
Reader/puncher interfaces, 248 Software specifications, 274
Reference position, 70 Spindle, 281
Reference position automatic setting function, 75 Spindle functions, 88
Reference position return check (G27), 73 Spindle positioning, 90
i–4
B–62082E/04 INDEX
Spindle speed analog output, 89 Tool compensation memory, 126

Spindle speed binary code output, 89 Tool compensation memory A, 126
Spindle speed clamp (G92), 90 Tool compensation memory B, 127
Spindle speed fluctuation detection (G25, G26), 91 Tool compensation memory C, 127
Spiral interpolation and conical interpolation, 51 Tool functions, 93
Spline interpolation, 50 Tool length compensation (G43, G44, G49), 118
Status output, 257 Tool length measurement, 149
Stored pitch error compensation, 133 Tool length/workpiece zero point measurement B, 150
Stored stroke check 1, 251 Tool life management, 95
Stored stroke check 2 (G22, G23), 251 Tool offset (G45, G46, G47, G48), 119
Stored stroke limit check in manual operation, 203 Tool offset by tool number, 124
Straightness compensation, 136 Tool retract & recover, 193
Straightness compensation at 128–point, 137 Torque limit skip, 151
Stroke check before move, 252 Transverse inhibit limit function, 198
Sub program, 102 Trouble diagnosis guidance, 244
Twin table control, 179
Two axes electronic gear box, 185
ƠT ơ
T code output, 94
Tangential speed constant control, 60 ƠUơ
Tape codes, 102 Unexpected disturbance torque detection function, 255
Tape operation, 189 Upgraded 5–axis control compensation parameter, 184
Tape reader, 247
Tape reader with reels, 247
Tape reader without reels, 247 ƠWơ
Tapping mode (G63), 69
Waveform diagnosis function, 233
Tapping signal, 259
Workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59), 78
The second cylindrical pitch error compensation method, 134
Workpiece coordinate system preset (G92.1), 82
Thread cutting, 55
Workpiece coordinates system change (G92), 80
Thread cutting signal, 259
Workpiece origin offset value change (programmable data
Three–dimensional coordinate conversation, 142 input) (G10), 80
Three–dimensional cutter compensation, 130 Workpiece zero point manual setting function, 234
i–5
Revision Record
FANUCĄSeries 15/150 For Machining Center DESCRIPTIONS (B–62082E)
The parameters of the following functions were added.

3–dimensional circular compensation, Helical involute inter-
polation, Spiral interpolation and Conical interpolation, Second
feedrate override B, Function for overriding the rapid traverse
feedrate in 1% units, Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration af-
ter rapid traverse interpolation, Cutting point speed control func-
tion, Acceleration/deceleration function for the constant speed
specified by the PMC control function
function, Cutting/rapid traverse
position check function, Feed per rotation without a position cod-
er, Automatic reference position setting function, Dog–less ref-
erence position setting function, Plane conversion function,
Function for switching between diameter and radius program-
ming, Circle cutting function, Rotary table dynamic fixture offset,
Advance control function, Three–dimensional cutter function,
The second cyclical pitch error compensation method, Skipping
02 Dec., ’93
93 the commands for several axes, Read/ Read/punch
unch function for cus
cus-
tom macro common variables, Advance control function, High–
precision contour control function, Follow–up for each axis, Sim-
ple synchronization control Positional deviation check function,
Upgraded 5–axis control function, Roll–over function for a rota- 04 Apr., ’97 15MEK and 15MEL were added.
tion axis, two–axis electronic gear box, Program restart function
and output of M, S, T, and B, codes Active block cancel, Manual
interpolation function for three–dimensional coordinate conver-
sion, Retrace program editing function, Function for displaying
multiple
li l subscreens,
b H
Helpl ffunction,
i P
Parameter settingi
(RS–232–C) screen, Screen for specifying high–speed and The explanations of the following functions were added:
high–precision machining, Operation history, Wave form diag- Smooth interpolation function, Designation direction tool length
nosis function, CRT screen saving function, High–speed part compensation, Three–dimensional coordinate conversion, In-
program registration function, Function selection by hard keys, terpolation–type straightness compensation, Straightness com-
Multi edit function,FANUC Handy File, Position switching func- pensation at 128 points, Bi–directional pitch error compensation
tion Correction of errors. function, Torque limit skip, High–precision contour control using
64–bit RISC processor, Skip function for EGB axis, Electronic
03 Sep.,
Se ., ’96
96
gearbox automatic phase synchronization
synchronization, Transverse inhibit
limit function, Stored stroke check in manual operation function,
M
M–code d group ffunction,
ti W
Workpiece
k i zero point
i t manuall setting
tti
function, Screen saver function, Unexpected disturbance torque
01 Feb., ’93
detection function.
A endixes D to G were added.
Appendixes
150–MB was added.
Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

· No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.
· All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.

Fanuc Series 15 150 Model B

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fanuc Series 15 150 Model B

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fanuc Series 15 150 Model B

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 15 / 150 – Model B

GFZ-62082E/04 April 1997

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

©Copyright 1997 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :

FANUC Series 15–MB 15–MB

FANUC Series 15–MFB 15–MFB

FANUC Series 15MEL–MODEL B–4 (*) 15MEL

FANUC Series 150–MB 150–MB Series 150

(*) The FANUC Series 15MEK/MEL–MODEL B–4 is a software–fixed

Manuals related to Manuals related to FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B are as follows.

List of Manuals Related to Series 15/150–MODEL B

FANUC Series 15–TB/TFB/TTB/TTFB DESCRIPTIONS B–62072E

8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

10. TOOL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

11. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

12.6 SEQUENCE NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

15. ACCURACY COMPENSATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

15.7 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER ENTRY (G10, G11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

16. COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

17. MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

18. CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

19. FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED CUTTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

20. AXES CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

20.4 SERVO OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

21. AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

22. MANUAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

23. PROGRAM TEST FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

24. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

24.26 CRT SCREEN SAVING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

25. PART PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

26. DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

27. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

28. SAFETY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

29. STATUS OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

30. EXTERNAL DATA INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

31. EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

32. MACHINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

33. PROGRAMMABLE MACHINE CONTROLLER (PMC–NA/NB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

34. MAN MACHINE CONTROL (MMC) (ONLY 150–MB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

35. CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

36. SERVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

37. POSITION DETECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

38. SPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

39. MACHINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

40. POSITION SWITCHING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

B. FUNCTIONS AND COMMAND FORMAT LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

C. LIST OF TAPE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS BASIC UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

E. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS CRT/MDI UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

F. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

G. POWER SUPPLY AND HEAT LOSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334